Sangamo_Sabre_III_3600_Magnetic_Tape_Recorder_Reproducer_Technical_Manual_Aug73 Sangamo Sabre III 3600 Magnetic Tape Recorder Reproducer Technical Manual Aug73

User Manual: Sangamo_Sabre_III_3600_Magnetic_Tape_Recorder_Reproducer_Technical_Manual_Aug73

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 316

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

lJ

I.

SAB E iU
3600 ft;\
ETIC TAPE:

.,

e

f'
@

Ii!

."

<"

~

IIIIII

co

SA'''G
S ri
:=============----=.----~~

NY

TABLE OF CONTENTS
AND
LIST OF EFFECTIVE BULLETINS
OPERATOR'S SECTION
BULLETIN

PAGE
NUMBER

OPERATOR'S TAB
GENERAL INFORMATION TAB
GENERAL INFORMATION
Scope
Description
General Specifications
General. . .
Tape Transport .
Magnetic Heads .
Direct Record/Reproduce .
FM RecordlReproduce .
PCM Write/Read . . . .

3602-3

x

1
4
4
4

5
5
6
8
3603-3

1
1
1
1
3
3
3

3
4
4'
4

5

OPERATOR'S DATA TAB
OPERATOR'S DATA
General. . .
Description of Controls and Indicators
General. . . . . . . . " .
AC to DC Power Supp!v (optional) .
Tape Transport . . . . . . .
RIR Signal Chassis and Signal Boards
Chassis . . . .
Direct RIR Boards •
Direct Record. .
Direct Reproduce
Bias Oscillator Board
FM R/R Boards . .

EFFECTIVE
BULLETIN

2

INSTALLATION TAB
Ij\lST ALLATION
General. •
Site Selection
Installation Requirements.
Power Requirements
General. . . . .
Power Connections .
Signal Cable Connections
Record . .
Reproduce.
Inspection . .
General. .
Cable Assemblies.
Installation Summary

BULLETIN
NUMBER

3601-1
1
1
1
2
2
4
4
4

4
4
5
5

_ X

PAGE
NUMBERS
FM Record. . . .
FM Reproduc.e
PCM VVrite/Read Boards
PCM v\%'ite .
PCM Read. . . .
PCM Clock. . . .
Encoder (high density) .
Voice/Edge AlB R/R Boards
Voice Record. . . .
Edge AlB Record
Voice-Edge AlB Reproduce
Tape Threading . .
Operating Procedures
Power Appl.ication
Tape Tr~nsport
Recording . . .
Chassis . . .
Direct Record .
FM Record.
Reproducing . .
Chassis . . .
Direct Reproduce
FM Reproduce
FM 4- 7 Speed Expander
Tape Synchronous Speed Control
Reference Recording
Reference Reproducing
Tape Sensing .
Remote Control
Operator's Theory
General. . .
Power Supply .
Tape Transport
General. .
Mode Control
Speed Control .
Capstan Sync
Tape Sync.
Reel Drive. .
Signal Electronics
Chassis . . .
Record Electronics
Rzpmduce Electronics
Operator's Maintenance
General. . . . . .
Inspection. . . . .
Preventive Maintenance
Tape Path .
R/R Heads. . . .

5
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8

10
10
10
11
11
11
12

12
13
13
13

14
14

14
15
15

15
16
16
16
16
16
16

16
18
18
18

19
19

19

20
20
20
20
21

21
21

BULLETIN
NUMBER

EFFECTIVE
BULLETIN

BULLETIN

PAGE
NUMBERS

Magnetized Head .
Head Degaussing
Tape Splicing. . . .
~hecks and Adjustments
DC Transport Power
DC to DC Converter.
Mode Control Circuits
Speed Control. . .
Reference Frequency Checks.
Capstan T athometer
Capstan Servo Control
Tape Sync Control
Reel Drive. . . . .
Tension. . • . •
Pinch Roller Pressure
Record/Reproduce Chassis
Record Chassis
Reproduce Chassis . .
Signal Electr~mics
System Performance Measurements .
Wow and Flutter. . .
Direct R/R. . . . •
Frequency Response
Signal to Noise Ratio
FM R/R. . . . . •
Frequency Response
Signal to Noise Ratio
DC Linearity

BULLETIN
NUMBER

EFFECTIVE
BULLETIN

21
21
22

23
23
23
24
25
25
26

27
28
29

29
29
31
31

31
32
32
32
34
34
34
34
34

35

35
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

FIGURE NUMBER

PAGE NUMBER

TITLE

..
GENERAL INFORMATION BULLETIN 3602-1

1.

Overall Functional Block Diagram

3

2.
3.
4.

Typical Sabre III.

9

• .

.

.

.

SABRE III with Front Operator Access Doors Open
SABRE III, Cabinet Removed, Assembly Orientation.

10
11

INSTALLATION BULLE::rIN 3603-3
1.

Mounting and Outline Dimensions

2

2.

Typical Installation Cable Connections

6

OPERATOR'S DATA BULLETIN 3601·1

1.

Transport Control Panel

2.

Tape Threading Diagram

3.

System Functional Block Diagram

3

..

v

9
17

(JUliE NUMBER

TITLE

PAGE NUMBER

4.

Speed Control System Basic Block Diagram

19

5.

Tape Splicing Procedure

23

6.

Capstan Board, Location of Testpoints and Adjustments.

28

7.
8.

Pinch Roller Pressure Threading .

29

Pinch Roller Pressure Adjustment

31

LIST OF TABLES
TITLE

TABLE NUMBER

PAGE NUrlilBE F1

INSTALLATION BULLETIN 3603-3
1.

Fuse Information

4

2.

Cables R€'wired and Supplied

4

3.

Cables Required But Not Supplied

5

OPERATOR'S DATA BULLETIN 3601-1

,.
2.
3.
4.

Tape Record Time With Footage Index
Fuse Functions

.

20

.

Reference Frequencies

26

Record/Reproduce Speed Lines

31

~~il~~.c~~~=========-~~

vi

(:==============~:::~

TABLE OF CONTENTS
AND
LIST OF EFFECTIVE BULLETINS
MAINTENANCE SECTION
PAGE
NUMBER

BULLETIN

BULLETIN
NUMBER

MAINTENANCE TAB
TAPE TRANSPORT TAB
TAPE TRANSPORT TAB
General. . . . .
Theory of Operation
General. . . .
DC Power Distribution .
System Mode Control Logic
Sequencies (ie Stop to Forward) .
Speed Control SYstem . . .
Reference Oscillator Circuits
Tachometer Signal Circuits
Tape Signal Circuits. . .
Frequency Preparation Circuits
Phase Comparison Circuits
Frequency Comparison Circuits .
Acceleration Amplification Circuits
Reel Drive. . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance - Each of the following headings contain
Circuit Description, Test Data, Parts List and Diagrams
pertaining to that heading .
General. . .
, Mode Control .
Logic Board
Speed Control.
Capstan Board
Tape Sync Board.
Capstan Power Amplifier
"
Reel Drive. . . .
Photocell Assembly
Microswitch
Pinch Rollers . .
Reel Drive Board .
Parts Removal/Replacement Data
Cabinet Removal. . .
Board Replacement. .
Capstan Motor Assembly
Motor Replacement .
Brush Replacement .
Tach Lamp Replacement
Pinch Roller Assembly. .
Roller and Bearing Replacement.
Solenoid Replacement . ~ . •

.
,~'

C==================::.:::J:J

3604-4
11

2
2 thru 8

9

10
11
11
11
12

15
15
15

16
16
16
16
20
20

32
36
38
38

38
38
39
43
43
43
43
43
45
45
46
46
47

vii

EFFECTIVE
BULLETIN

BULLETIN

PAGE
NUMBER

Reel Drive Assembly
Tension Arm Spring Replacement
Photbceil Replacement. . . .
Microswitch Replacement. . . •
inertia Dampening Roller and Bearing Replacement
Record and Reproduce Head Replacement . .
Record Head Replacement and Alignment
Reproduce Head Replacement and Alignment
Tape V~jdth Change .
1 inch to 1/2 inch
. . . . . . . . .
1/2 inch to 1 inch
Assy. Reference Designations and Mech. Parts List.

BULLETIN
NUMBER

EFFECTIVE
BULLETIN

48
48
48
48
49
50
50

52
53
53

54
54

Diagrams
Remote Shorting Plug WIring
Record Head Wiring
Reproduce Head Wiring
Transport Wiring
Transport Overall Schematic
RECORD TAB - Any bulletin behind this tab contains the
following: Gemral, Operating Data, Theory, Maintenance,
Parts list, and Diagrams.
RECORD CHASSIS
DIRECT RECORD
FM RECORD
BIAS
PCM WRiTE
ENCODER

3653-1
3609·'
3643-'
3613-1
3644-1
3650·'

X

X

X
/"X..

REPRODUCE TAB - Any bulletin behind the reproduce tab
contains the following: General, -Operating Data, Theory,
Maintenance, Parts List and Diagrams.
REPRODUCE CHASSIS
FM REPRODUCE
DIRECT REPRODUCE
PREAMPS AN D PREAMP POWER SUPPLY
FM 4-7 SPEED EXPANDER
PCM READ
PCM CLOCK
DECODER

3654-1
3647-1
3641-1
3639-1
3648-1
3645·1
3646-1
3655-1·

X

X
)(
X

POWER SUPPLIES TAB - Any bulletin behind the power
supplies tab contains the following: General, Operating Data,
Theory, Maintenance, Parts List, and Diagrams.
REGULATED AC TO DC POWER SUPPLY
DC TO DC CONVERTER

3638-1
3637-1

x
X

=- ::J

BULLETIN

BULLETIN
NUMBER

PAGE
NUMBER

OPTIONAL ITEMS, KITS, ETC, TAB - Any bulletin
behind• the optional items tab generally contains the
following: General. Operating Data, Theory, Maintenance, Parts List, and Diagrams.
VOICE R/R
EDGE AlB R/R
TAPE SHUTTLE
FM DENSITY CHANGE
CALIBRATION/MONITOR METER
PHOTO END-OF-TAPE SENSE

3606-1
3633-1
3629-2
3634-1
3632·1
3642-1
3652-1

PLAYBACK MONITOR KIT
FM CALIBRATOR

3656-1

EFFECTIVE
BULLETIN

X
X

X

PARTS LIST TAB
3680-1

PARTS LIST

x

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
TITLE '

FIGURE NUMBER
TAPE TRANSPORT BULLETIN 3604-4

PAGE NUMBER

1.

Speed Control System Basic Block Diagram .

10

2.

Speed Control System Overall Block Diagram

13

3.

Capstan Board, Component Location ,

,

.

30

4.

Capstan Board, Schematic Diagram.

. '.

31

5.

Tape Sync Board, Schematic and Component Location

6.

Capstan Power Amp Schematic and

7.
8.
9.

Reel Drive Overall Schematic and Board Component Location

45

Capstan Motor Wring Variations

48

10.

Shaft and Pinch Roller Assembly

50

11.

Pinch Roller Solenoid Mounting Details

51

12,

Tensic'ln Arm and Photocell Assembly

53

13.

Inertia Roller.

54

14.

Typical Tape Head Mounting Details
Remote Control Shorting Plug Wring Diagram
Record Head Wiring Diagram
Reproduce Head Wiring Diagram
Transport Wiring Diagram
Transport Schematic Diagram

,

V\~ring

Diagram

Capstan Motor Partially Disassembled

.

• .

•

• • •

"

37
40

• 49

55

The remaining tab divided sections contain bulletins as listed and indicated in earlier portions of this table of contents. Each
of these bulletins contain diagrams pertaining to the item covered by that bulletin.

ix

HI
F~'[_,~
FM _ _'-f!L.':.~i&._
Digital _ _ _ __

J

~-~-=---===============-=-=-=--=--.

-.-....,..I.I'..·---·--=l

MAGNETIC HEAD CHARACTERISTiCS
and
SIGNAL ELECTRONICS BOARD SERIAL NUMBERS
for
TAPE TRANSPORT SERIAL NO . .-.:...7...,;..49.:;;,..8::..-_ __
HEAD

PART NO.

SERIAL NO.

TAPE TYPE 3M---B.8.£Lor Equiv.
TRACK NUMBERING
FORMAT
IRIG

RECORD
REPRODUCE
Track Direct Record
Serial No.
No.

Direct Repro Direct Record
Serial No.
Bias level
(vdc)

1

?4R~

1r-l43

1.?0

2

2~2

1541
1468
1537
1f342
1536
1494
1539
1547
1545

1.80
1 40
1.90
1.20
1.80
1.20
1.80
1.20
1.85

1544
1538
1540
1546

1.10

-.3_.Lill4
4
2481
2427
5
6
2473
2441
7
8
2456
2490
~
10
2484
11
,12

2451

2435
2397
[13
14 • 2236

Band

w~.n

,

1.15
V

FM Repro
Serial No.

I.

FM Expander
Serial No.

..

0.17?

3125 ..

2202

:lj32

2263

0.166
0.172
0,168

I

.I

..3168
3169
3170
4024
4025
4026

2204
2201
2206
2207
2214
2215
2216

4027
4028
4029
4030

2217
2218
2219
2220

peM Read,
Decoder
Seria: No.

PCM \'kite,
Encoder
Serial No .

FM Inl=>ut
Band
level
Classification
o/uDev.
:!:
(vrms)

??Of)

~..illiL

~167

1.85
1.80

FM Record
Serial No.

..

Clas~ification

.

BIAS BOARD SERIAL NO.~BIAS FREQ 8.4
MHz
PCM CLOCK BOARD SERIAL NO: ___________
EDGE AlB OR VOICE RECORD BOARD SERIAL NO._.:..3....
4.lo<.9_ __
EDGE AlB OR VOICE REPRODUCE BOARD SERIAL NO~S). 585
1-740%
586
7 - 1430%
PCM Format
Conversion

WRI

j

Q....1l{L

0.1 fJ.f3
0.166
0.125
0.130
0.128

I

.

W.B.II

0.128

I

0.124

j'

I

I

!I

I
I

!

0.127

0.128

'I

/

.,I

---1
,

I

I

t-

:l

I

NOTE: DIRECT NORMAL RECORD lEVEL=100 mvrms at TP2. This level is defined
as the input level required to produce 1% third harmonic distortion.

~

FM input level measured at TP1 on FM record board.
.. Refer to the applicable record bu!letin for characteristics of band classification.

3600
4900
Rev.3 3-12·73

BULLETIN NO. 3602-3

GENERAL INFORMATION
SCOpE
This technical manual has been prepared to provide the necessary information for installation, operation,
and maintenance of the SABRE 111,3600, MAGNETIC TAPE RECORDER/REPRODUCER.
The manual is divided into two tab identified sections; Operator's, and Maintenance. The Operator's
section is further divided into three sections, generally containing the following information.
GENERAL INFORMATION - This section contains a bulletin covering the use of the technical manual,
general description of the system with photographs, general specifications, and optional features.
INSTALLATION - This section contains a bulletin covering Sangamo "UTE-OFF", power requirements,
site selection, power connections, inspection (fuses and installation connections), dimensional diagrams,
installation summary, and possibly interfacing information.
OPE RA TO R 'S - This section contains a bulletin covering a description of controls and indicators, tape
. threading, operating procedures, operators theory, operator's maintenance (including checks and adjustments), and system performance measUrements.
Additional bulletins may be included in any of these sections.
The Maintenance section is further divided into six sections, generally containing the following information.
TAPE TRANSPO RT - This section contains a bulletin covering overall basic theory, maintenance data for
each transport related circuit board, assembly, etc., parts removal/replacement data, parts list, and diagrams
for the basic tape transport and tape movement circu its. RECORD - This section contains bulletins covering the recording of signal data onto the moving magnetic
tape. Separate bulletins for record chassis, FM record, direct record, bias, etc., each contain operating
data, theory, maintenance, parts list, and diagrams.
REPRODUCE - This section contains bulletins covering the recovery and reproduction of signal data recorded on magnetic tape. Separate bulletins for reproduce chassis, FM reproduce, direct reproduce,
preamplifiers, etc., each contain operating data, theory, maintenance, parts list, and diagrams.
POWER SUPPU ES - This section contains bulletins covering the optional AC to DC power supply and the
DC to DC converter employed with the system. Each bulletin contains operating data, theory, maintenance,
parts, and diagrams.
OPTIONAL ITEMS - This section contains a bulletin for each particular option or addition to the
recorder/reproducer system. Each bulletin may contain operating procedures, theory, maintenance, parts
list, and diagrams. All voice or time code record/reproduce information is found here.

«

1 t:::=::::::::==========::::::::J1
Ch. 1 8-73

~t\\Q1~~~
(![Jl~~~~~~

BULLETIN NO. 3602-3
PARTS LIST -. This section contains a bulletin, listing and describing the electrical parts used in the
,corder/reproducer system. This listing, numerically by Sangamo part number, is provided for cross
eferencing from a smaller parts list on or near the diagrams for each assembly or subassembly (bulletin).

Q

DESCRIPTION
The SAB REI ~I, 3600, Recorder/Reproducer contains the capability of moving magnetic tape across
the record and reproduce heads in either direction at a precise and uniform rate, during the record and/or
reproduce process.
To accomplish tape movement over the heads at the most precise speed a capstan drive system with
inertia dampening roller and pinch rollers is employed, refer to figure 1. The capstan, which controls all
tape movement, is controlled by the speed control and mode control circuits. The reel drive circuits are
utilized to provide the proper feeding and taking up of tape to and from the capstan as it turns. In addition to these tape movement circuits are special circuits which provide added features to the standard
tape movement capability (end-of-tape sense, etc.).
To record signal data, time code signals, or voice the input signal must be conditioned, and possibly,
combined with bias, by the record boards prior to being applied to the head for recording on tape. These
record boards are normally capable of recording at any tape speed in various bandwidths.
In reproducing signal data, time code signals, or voice, the reproduced signal must be applied through
the preamps to the reproduce board complement of the type signal recorded (FM, direct, etc.). The reprorl.,uce board conditions the signal to present it at the system output in a form most like the input signal,
. lior to recording.

C

An optional AC to DC regulated power supply is available to provide the necessary dc voltage required
by the recorder/reproducer. A standard DC to DC converter assembly converts the input dc voltage to
various voltages required by the tape movement circuits, record/reproduce circuits, and for the most part
any other circuit or circuits which may be used in the system.
The complete model number of the recorderlreproduceris dependent upon the family of speeds
supplied, the type of signal electronics supplied, and the frequency response available as follows:
MODEL

3612

DESCRIPTION
IRIG FM low-band (20 kHz at 120 ips) with 120 through 1 7/8
ips speed range.
OR
IRIG intermediate-band (20 kHz at 60 ips) with 60 through 15/16
ips speed range.

3614

IRIG FM intermediate-band (40 kHz at 120 ips) with 120 through
1 7/8 ips speed range.
OR
I RIG wide-band group I (40 kHz at 60 ips) with 60 through 15/16
ips speed range.

2

BULLETIN NO. 3602-3

--r"l't.,r--]
'IAEELOA'_VE
CIPCUIT$

INPUT
:s1GNALS

---,,---,

--------------------~

'RECORD

Et.EC1'RONICS

speED LINES

TO RECORD
ELECTRONICS

L
SPEED
CONTROL
CIRCUITS

SQUELCH AND

SPEED LiNes
TO REPRODUCE:

:~;if;,';[

MODE

CONTROL

Oi?ERATOR

.....>-----,-------i..'COMMANDS

CIRCUITS
. _ - . -_ _---J

flEPROOUCE
ELECTRONICS
END·OF·
TAPE $E~SE
CIP.CU!T~

OUTPUT
SIGNALS

$'~STEM

REGULATEO
+29Vdc

TO TRANSPORT

AC

roOCPOWER
SUPPLY

AC iNPUT

REEL ORIVE
SENSE

Figure 1. Overall Functional Block Diagram

c::==::=_,__,__

=..===:=::===:========::==:11

CIRCUITS

BULLETIN NO. 3602-3

MODEL

DESCRIPTION

3618

IRIG FM wide-band group I (80 kHz at'120 ips).

3621

! RIG direct wide-band with 1.6 MHz equalizers with FM wideband group II capability.

3622

IRIG direct wide-band with 2.0 MHz equalizers with FM wideband group II capability.

3630

I RIG wide-band capability with mixed channel electronics (Le.
80 kHz FM and 2.0 MHz direct).

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS OF TYPICAL SYSTEM (See Specification bulletin at the rear of
this bulletin)

Figure 2.

Typical SABRE III

BU LLETI N NO. 3602·3

LEFT TAPE
TENSION ARM

HEAD
AREA

RECORD
CHASSIS

CONTROL
PANEL

RECORD, REPRODUCE
AND POWER
CONNECTOR PANELS

r.·. " · · ·
f
\

~'
RIGHT TAPE
TENSION ARM

Figure 3. SABRE III With Front Operator Access Doors Open

cc====-=~=::=::=:==·=-==========:=:==:====:======~ 5

.

BULLETIN NO. 3602-3

TAPE SYNC BOAR D
(OPTIONAL, MOUNTED
ON CAPSTAN BO ARD)

SQUELCH
SWITCH
SQUELCH
. SQUELCH

DISABLE -of--~ ACTIVE

LOGIC
BOARD

REEL DRIVE
BOARD
OCTO DC
CONVERTER
R EPR 0 DU CE ---'...-.-.:~
CHASSIS

RANGE
-";;";;""--SWITCH

AIR

~---- FILTER

Figure 4. SABRE III, Cabinet Removed, Assembly Orientation

28 Vdc .

t

24 Vdc

Bulletin 3?O"l A

portable
recorder/
reproducer
specifications
SAN GAM 0: THE INNOVATORS OF TAPE INSTRUMENTATION
SANGAMO ELECTRIC COMPANY

SABRE III RECORDER/REPRODUCER SPECIFICATIONS
TAPE TRANSPORT
Tape Speeds: 120,60,30, 15,7-1/2,3-3/4,1-7/8 ips or
60,30, 15,7-1/2,3-3/4, 1-7/8,15/16 ips. All speeds are
electrically selectable and bi-directional.
Reel Size: Precision or NAB, 10-1/2, 14,15 or 16 inch.
Performances with precision reels.
Reel Lock~: Non-detachable, 20° turn to lock. No
removable parts.
Tape Width: 1/2 or 1 inch. Field change kits available.
Footage Counter: Linear 5 digit, bi-directional and
resettable.
Tape Thickness: 1.0 or 1.5 mil base may be used
interchangeably. Performances measured with Sangamo
recommended tapes, I RIG 50 mil tracks, and in capstan
synchronous mode.
Start and Stop Times: Less than 5 seconds for all
record/reproduce speeds for 14 inch reels. SI ightly
longer with 15 and 16 inch reels.
Flutter:
Tape Speeds
(ips)

Two Sigma
Flutter %

120
60
30
15
7-1/2
3-3/4
1-7/8
15/16

0.20
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.60

Reference Oscillator Stability: 1 part in 105 per day.
Speed Control Correction Rate: ±20% speed change per
second without loss of synchronism.
Speed Control Correction Range: ±25% nominal speed,
minimum.
Instantaneous Time Base Error (Observed over 10
second period):

Tape Speeds
(ips)

TBE (Peak)
(Microseconds)

120
60
30
lS
7-1/2
3--3/4
1-7/8
15/16

± 0.50
± 0.50
± 0.60
± 1.00
± 2.00
± 4.00
± 8.00
±12.00

Per IRIG 106-71
Bandwidth

0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5

kHz
Hz- 10
kHz
Hz- 10
kHz
Hz- 5
Hz- 2.5 kHz
Hz- 1.25 kHz
Hz
Hz - 625
Hz
Hz - 313
Hz
Hz - 156

Dynamic Interchannel Time Displacement Error
{lTD E): Less than ±1.5 microseconds between outside
even or odd tracks on one inch tape at 120 ips.
Rewind/Fast Forward Speed: 750 feet per minute for
standard system.
Tape Loop Operation (Optional 117 V ac, 60 Hz
only): 10 to 150 foot (60 through 15/16 ips) loops can
be accommodated when rack mounted. Splice blanking
available. Performances available for each application.
Controls: Illuminated pushbuttons for control
of: Power, Stop, Record, Forward, Reverse, and Fast.
Capstan Sync and Tape Servo Indicator Light. Rotary
Tape Speed selector. Tape Speed selector also selects
Direct reproduce equalization, FM center frequencies
and filters automatically, for any seven adjacent system
tape speeds. Provision is included for remote operation
except power and speeds. Optional photo end-of-reel
sensing and shuttle.
Tape Speed Accuracy: ±0.1% of selected tape speed.
REPRODUCE TAPE SERVO SYSTEM (Optional)
Reference Frequency: 400 kHz or 200 kHz selectable at
120 ips; submultiples at lower speeds. (Other frequencies
on special order).
('

Auto Lock: Capstan servo automatically reverts to
capstan synchronous mode with loss of tape reference or
in record mode.
Long Term Speed Stability: ±O.OOl% referenced to
record speed.
Servo Correction Bandwidth: 200 Hz at 7-1/2 ips.
Servo Sync Dropout Susceptibility: 6 dB dropouts will
not cause loss of sync.
MAGNETIC HEADS
Track Geometry: PerlRIG 106-71. One-half inch head,
7 tracks interleaved with edge track A. One-inch head,
14 tracks interleaved with edge tracks A and B. Other
formats available on special order.
Configuration and Polarity: Per IRIG 106-71.
Adjustable Reproduce Gap Azimuth: Within ±1 minute
of arc standard with I RIG wideband channels.
DIRECT RECORD/REPRODUCE CHANNEL
Input Sensitivity: 0.2 to 10 V rms; adjustable in two
ranges with vernier overlap to produce normal record
level. Two position selector; 0.2 to 1.5 V, 1.5 to 10 V.
Nominal Input Level: 1.0 V rms.
Nominal Input Impedance: Two position selector;
10,000 ohms (high), 75 ohms (low), unbalanced to
ground; shunted by less than 100 pF. Other values
available.
Third Harmonic Distortion: tRIG recommended 1% at
1()D..{, of upper band edge frequency.

Frequency Response and Sigraaf/Noise (nns/rms):

INTERMEDIAT'E BAND
Tape Speeds
(ips)

.•

120
60
30
15
7-1/2
3-3/4
1-7/8
15/16

Bandwidth"

SIN'''''

(±3dBI

(dB)

300 Hz - 600
200 Hz - 300
200 Hz --150
200 Hz- 75
200 Hz- 38
200 Hz- 19
200 Hz- 10
200 Hz- '5

kHz
kHz
kHz
kHz
kHz
kHz
kHz
kHz

38
38
37
35
34
34
34
31

WIDEBAND (Option I)
120
60
30
15
7-1/2
3-3/4
1-7/8

400 Hz-1.6
400 Hz- 0.8
400 Hz.- 0.4
400 Hz- 0.2
400 Hz- 0.1
400 Hz- 50.0
400 Hz- 25.0

MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
kHz
kHz.

28
28
28
28
26
26
25

-

WIDEBAND (Option II)
120
60
30
15
7-1/2
3-3/4
1-7/8

400 Hz- 2.0
400 Hz- 1.0
400 Hz- 0.5
400 Hz- 0.25
400 Hz - 125
400 Hz- 62.5
400Hz - 31.25

MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
kHz
kHz
kHz

22
22
22
22
21
20
20

"All bands amplitude and phase equalized.
"*With 18 dB/octave bandpass filter (per IRIG 106-71).

Exclusive FM Density Selection (Optional): A two
position switch electronically programs the center
frequencies and FM filters to operate at the appropriate
band and speed for any two adjacent bands. An X speed
record/reproduce system in one band will be a (X-l)
speed record/reproduce system in the adjacent band.
Performances available for each application.
IRIG lOW BAND

Output Impedance: 50 ohms nominal, unbalanced to
ground.

Input Sensitivity: 0.2 to 10 V rms; adjustable in two
ranges with vernier overlap for full deviation. Three
position selector; 0.2 to 1.5 V; 1.5 to 10.0 V, or TEST.
Nominal Input Level: 1.0 V rms.
Nominal Input Impedances: 125,000 ohms resistive ( 1.5
to 10 V range). 20,000 ohms resistive (0.2 to 1.5 V
range). All shunted by less than 100 pF, unbalanced to
ground. Other loading values available on special order.

108
54
27
13.5
6.75
3.375
1.688

kHz
DC - 20
kHz
DC- 10
kHz
DC- 5
DC- 2.5 kHz
DC- 1.25 kHz
DC- 0.625 kHz
DC- 0.312 kHz

52
51
50
49
48
46
46

120
60
30
15
7-1/2
3-3/4
1-7/8

IRIG INTERMEDIATE BAND
120
60
30
15
7-1/2
3-3/4
1-7/8
15/16

216
108
54
27
13.5
6.75
3.375
1.688

kHz
DC- 40
DC- 20
kHz
kHz
DC- 10
kHz
DC- 5
DC- 2.5 kHz
DC- 1.25 kHz
DC.- 0.625 kHz
DC- 0.312 kHz

51
51
49

48
47
46
45

41

IRIG WIDEBAND GROUP I
120
60
30
15
7-1/2

3-314
1-7/8
15/16

432
216
108
54
27
13.5
6.75
3.38

DCDCDCDCDCDCDCDC-

80
40
20
10
5
2.5
1.25
0_625

kHz
kHz
kHz
kHz
kHz
kHz
kHz
kHz

48
48
48
47
47
46
44
40

"Flat Amplitude (FA) within 1 dB; Linear Phase (lP)
+1, -3 dB.

""1 dB less with LP filters.

Group Delay Variation (120 ips): Less than ±250
nanoseconds from 100 kHz to 1.6 MHz.
FREQUENCY MODULATION RECORD/REPRODUCE
CHANNEL

SIN (dB)""
(FA)

Center
Frequencies

'Optional Frequency Response~. Wideband(options I and
II) at 15/16 ips available on special order. .
Output Level: Adjustable to 1.0 V rms into 75 ohms at
normal record level.

(kHz)

(FA or lP)
Filter"
Response

Tape
Speeds
(ips)

IRIG WIDEBAND GROUP II
Filter Response +
120
60
30
15
7-1/2
3-3/4
1-7/8

900
450
225
112.5
56.25
28.125
14.06,

DC - 500
DC -250
DC -125
DC - 62.5
DC- 31.25
DC- 15.6
D_C- 7.8

+ DC to 400 kHz +1, -3 dB
. DC to 500 kHz +1, -6 dB
,

,

kHz
kHz
kHz
kHz
kHz'
kHz
kHz

SIN (dB)
33
33
32
32
30
30
30

Transient Response (120 ips):

Dropout Rate: Maximum of 1 in 10 6 with
recommended tape at 5 KBPI (serial) and 2 KBPI
(paraliel).

R_i_se_T_im_e~._(M_a_x_lToverShoot (Max)

t--_ _ _._ _-+__

500 kHz
80 kHz (FA)
80 kHz (LP)

2 Microseconds
5 Microseconds
6 Microseconds

-r"I

I

15%

15~

2O/~

DC Drift:, Less than ±O,5% of peak-to-peak deviation
over an 8 hour period for 10°C after 15 minute warmup.

Output Level: 0 to +6; 0 to - 6; or +6 to - 6 volts,
adjustable downward in each case into 1000 ohm load.
TTL compatible.
Output Polarity: Logic "one" may be made either
positive or negative with respect to logic "zero".

DC Linearity: Less than ±0.5% of peak-to-peak
deviation referenced to best straight line.

Output Format: NRZ-L, NRZ-M, N RZ-S, RZ; B l¢-L,
B l¢-M, B l1>-S (serial only).

Total Harmonic Distortion (All Speeds): Less than 0.5%
for frequencies lower than 0.1 Fco for all I RIG low,
intermediate, and wideband Group I; less than 1.0% for
wideband Group II.

Output Rise and Fall Times: Less than 500 nanoseconds
with 1000 ohm load shunted by 150 pF maximum.

Output Level (Full Deviation): Adjustable to 1.0 V rms
nominal into 75 ohms, with shortcircuit protection.
(SCP).
Output Impedance: 50 ohms nominal, unbalanced to
ground with SCPo
Output Squelch: Automatic for all speeds and activated
from FM carrier detector or transport synchronous logic.
DIGITAL (PCM) WRITE/READ CHANNEL
Input Signal Level: 2 volts minimum, 50 volts
maximu m, peak-to-peak.
Input Formats Acceptable: NRZ-L, NRZ-M, NRZ-S,
RZ; Bl¢.-L, B1¢-M,Bl¢-S (serial only).
Input Signal Polarity: Positive, negative, or symmetrical
about zero.
Input Impedance: 20,000 ohms (maximum) unbalanced
to ground; shunted by less that 100 pF.

Output Impedance: Less than 100 ohms, unbalanced to
ground.
PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION
Size: 26 inches high by 19 inches wide by 11-1/2 inches
deep. Additional enclosure required (7 inches high) for a
14 channel-7 speed FM switchable record/reproduce
system.
DC Power: Switchable between 28±2 VDC and 24±2
VDC (15 and 16 inch reels not applicable on 24 VDC);
optional DC power supply for operation from 47 to 440
Hz at 105 to 240 V ac.
DC Power Supply Size: 7 inches high by 19 inches wide
by 11-5/8 "inches deep.
Weight: Approximately 100 pounds. Optional DC
power supply weighs approximately 40 pounds.

Record Mode: Non-bias recording.

GENERAL

Intermediate NRZ Bit Rates and Densities (Maximal"":

Environment: Designed for laboratory, field van,
shipboard, automotive and aircraft.

SERIAL MODE
Tape
Speeds
(ips)

Bit Rate
(KBPS)

Density

600
300
150
75
38
19
10

5
5
5
5
5
5
5

5

5

120
60
30
15
7-1/2
3-3/4
1-7/8
15/16

(KBPI)

PARALLEL MODE

Bit Rate
(KBPS)

Density
(KBPI)

240
120
60
30
15
7.50
3.75
1.88

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

""Optional Bit Rates.
Higher serial and parallel bit rates
for special applications with wideband heads optionally
available. B11> & R Z formats at half densities.

Bulletin 3207 A
0273
Printed in U.S.A.

Temperature: Operating Range 5° to 50°C.
Humidity: 5 to 95% relative, non-condensing.
Altitude: 30,000 feet operating; 70,000 feet
non-operating.
Standard Colors: Front door and cabinet -- Olive. Front
trim and card fronts - Beige.
Other Optional Features: Monitor oscilioscopes, FM
calibrators, edge voice annotation (local or rack
mounted type with speaker), remote control (handheld)
or rack mount type), edge track timing, FM re-recording,
HDDR PCM encoder, sequential record/reproduce, peak
reading monitor meters, head degausser, anti-vibration
kits, rack mount kits, special paint, special cabinets,
casters with anti-tilt platform, lifting eye bolts,
protective covers.

Specifications are as of February 15, 1973,
and are subject to change without notice,

SANGAMO ELECTRIC COMPANY
DATA SYSTEMS
Box 3347, Springfield, Illinois 62714
217-544-6411

BULLETIN NO. 3603-3

INSTALLATION
GENtRAL
Upon delivery of a system to a customers facility, Sangamo provides a "LITE-OFF" (startup) service performed by an authorized Sangamo service engineering representative. This is provided to ensure the system
was not affected by shipment and that all contract requirements have been met; as well as familiarizing the
customer with the equipment and instruction manuals. Upon receiving the system initially, as shipped
from the factory, the Sangamo Service Engineering Department should be contacted concerning "L1TEOFF", unless prior arrangements have been made.
For installation checkout ("L1TE-OFF")
of systems delivered in the U.S.A. call
collect to:

Sangamo Electric Company
P.O. Box 3347
Springfield, Illinois 62708
Tel. 217-544-6411
Ext. 352 Service Engineering

SITE SELECTION
Overall dimensions of the 3600,SABRE III, Recorder / Reproducer are shown in figure 1. If the auxiliary
chassis and/or power supply are not supplied, ignore that information. When choosing a site for the installation, enslIre enough space is provided for adequate Clearance of front and back openings. Ensure the air
vent openings are not obstructed, allowing the proper flow of air. Also ensure the unit will not be subjected
to exceptionally strong magnetic fields, damaging vibrations, dirt or debris.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
The recorder/reproducer is ready to install as received. Place the main cabinet on top of the power supply
unit (if supplied). The depressions in the black mounting feet fit over the metal projections on the top of
the power supply. Place the auxiliary chassis (if supplied) on top of the main cabinet and secure it using the
metal clasps fastened on both sides of the auxiliary chassis.
POWER REQUI REMENTS
a.
GENERAL - The SABRE 111,3600, Recorder/Reproducer requires either 28 Vdc ± 2 Vdc or 24 Vdc ±
2 Vdc at a load of 480 to 840 watts. An optional power supply is available permitting operation from a
variety of AC power sources. Refer to the configuration sheet (first page in this manual) to note the power
supply supplied.
Note,a range switch, located on the left side of the recorder/reproducer, must be changed when switching
from 28 to 24 Vdc input or vice versa.

=:=

BULLETIN NO. 3603-3

28.50

rAIR
EXHAUST -

11.5

-1

§~
..

~::' ~~

~~~
AIR
INTAKE - -

,.--19.00---1

i···r·L~~L
,,",,4 I
.I
FITTING
CARRYiNG
HANDLES

'8
~.3:
i..-75J

14-11.32

I

J

"j"
0.312

~

~

-.-- 17.8

--

\LUSH---FITTING
CARRYING
HANDLES

~

.....

~

~~~R~\
90 LBS

_~

-.J

_I

tJ]

II '~D'~APPROX
o

MAX. WT
21. 5 LBS

0

1.7.5.J
AUXILIARY CHASSIS

r-11.32~

[iE}
~~
be
l.-7.5-J

r-- ----j
'L['--===----"11
0
011
---==f
1900

AIR
INTAKE

0312

6. 97 10

J

l.--!7.e - - , .

AIR
EXHAUST

~ACIDC
POWER
§a
RECEPTACLES
.

I

-l'"~_ APPROX

•

MAX. WT
45 L8S

AC/OC POWER
SUPPLY UNIT

NOTE'
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
GIVEN IN INCHES.

Figure 1. Mounting and Outline Dimensions

------~~

2

Ct=.============:=_=================~j

BULLETIN NO. 3603-3

b.

. POWER CONNECTIONS

(1)
WITHOUT OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY - When no optional power supply is supplied, it is
necessary for the cllstomer to connect the recorder/reproducer to the available DC supply. A power cable
may be supplied if ordered by the customer, in which case simply connect it between the POWE R connector
and the customers available supply observing correct polarity. If no power cabie is supplied, complete the
following steps.

Step 1.

Locate the fOllr pin power connector (normally shipped with the accessories).

Step 2.

Remove the hood from this connector.

Step 3.

'Using sufficient lengths of wire, slip the hood onto the wires and make the following connections:

#14 gage wire
#14 gage wire
#14 gage wire
#14 gage wire
#18 gage wire

to
to
to
to
to

Pin B ( + 28 Vdc) (
special,for
blower fan
Pin u ( - 28 Vdc) ~
Pin A ( + 28 Vdc)
Pin C ( - 28 Vdc)
connector case. (earth ground)

CAUTION
Insure that proper connections are made with no possibility

~lf

shorting.

NOTE

Use different colors of wire to distinguish polarity.
Step 4.

Slide the hood onto the connector and secure it.

Step 5.

Terminate the three wires to the available DC supply observing correct polarity.

(2)

WITH OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY

Step 1.

Locate the supplied power cable (normally shipped in the air filter cavity of the power supply).

Step 2.

Connect this power cable between the power supply and the main power panel, refer to figure 2.

Step 3.

Connect the power cord for the power supply to the available AC supply.

SIGNAL CABLE CONNECTIONS

s.

RECORD - The data signals to be recorded are to be connected to the standard BNC connectors on
the record connector panel. The reference signal should be connected to the proper channel if tape synchronous
is to be utilized, refer to figure 2.
b.
REPRODUCE - The reproduce signals appear at the BNC connectors on the reproduce connector
panel during the reproduce process. The tape synchronous signal must be applied to the TAPE BNC connector on the power connector pane!, refer to figure 2.

BU LLETI N NO. 3603-3

INSPECTION

a.

GENERAL

Step 1.

Check the dust covers for dents or cracks in the glass.

Step 2.

Check the cabinet for dents or scratches.

Step 3.

Check the tape-tension arms for free movement.

Step 4.

Check that the fuses are in place and are of the proper value. Refer to table 1, fuse information.

•

TABLE 1.
LOCATION

DESIGNATION

FUSE INFORMATION

RATING

-

FUNCTION

PART NO.

Rear of Transport

Fl

ABC-20A

Primary DC Power

859774·001

Rear of Transport

F2

F02B-3A

Capstan Motor Power

821926

Left Side of Transport

F3

AGX-8A

DC to DC Power

510279-004

Optional Power Supply Unit

F1

ABC-lOA (110 V input)

Primary AC Power

859774-008

ABC-5A (220 V input)

Optional Power Supply Unit

F2

ABC-20A

859774-005
+28 Vdc output

859774-011

--

b. CABLE ASSEMBLIES - When the system is installed ensure the following cable connections have
been made properly. Refer to figure 2

,.-

TABLE 2. CABLES REQUIRED AND SUPPLIED *
FUNCTION

FROM

TO

AC Primary Power

Customers AC Source

DC Power Supply

DC Power Supply or

Transport Power & Control

(using Optional DC power supply)
DC Primary Power

--

Remote Control**

Customers DC source

Connector Panel, Power Connector

Optional Remote Control Unit

Transport Power & Control
Connector Panel, Remote Connector

Record Tape Sync Ref Signal ***
Reproduce Tape Sync Ref Sjgnal**~
Record Monitor***
Reproduce Monitor***

Record Connector Panel,

Record Connector Panel, Ref

REF Connector

Channel Input (normally even channel)

Reproduce Connector Panel,

Transport Power & Control

Ref Channel Output

Connector Panel, TAPE Connector

Record Connector Panel

Monitor Device (calibration/monitor

Monitor Output Connector

meters, scope, etc.)
Monitor Device

Reproduce Connector Panel
and/or Auxiliary Reproduce

o

Connector Panel, Monitor Connector
Including all options

*"*Optional

_ (calibratio~/monitor meter,
scope, etc.)

** If remote control panel is not used, the- remote jumper plug must be inserted
into the REMOTE jack on the Power & Control ~anel befGre proper operation
can be achieved.

4CI=========================~~

BULLETIN NO. '3603-3

NOTE

For t'oice and edge track cable
connections refer to the voice
or edge track bulletin in the
optional items section.

,------------._----------,

--~~.

TA BlE 3. CABLES REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED

--_.

FUNCTION
Record Signals Input
Reproduce Signals Output

TO

FROM
CuHomers Data Source

Record Connector Panel

Reproduce Connector Panel

(normally BNC)
Customers Analyzing Equip-

and/or AuxJliary Reproduce
Connector Panel (normally BNC)

ment.

INSTALLATiON SUMMARY
Upon completion of the inspection procedures the user is strongly urged to thoroughly familiarize himself with the equipment, by using this technical manual. Refer to the configuration sheet and contents with
list- of effective bulletins (front of manual) to determine what the system contains and what bulletins are
applicabh~ for this particular configuration.

c::

:::. ::::::: =-::J

5

c=·========

BULLETIN NO. 3603-3

------------l

REPRODUCE

RECORD

_-=.l

(Optionall

L-_ _ _ _ _..:...._C"-Ac.:Lc.:'.;;.;:.RP:TlONI~ONITOR

MEr~_~~~~~_'_S_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-_ _ _ _

I

--1

I

I
I

-0

I--

POVIIER &

r

__J

©==©

MONITOR

CONT~OL

-[J

(Optional)
AUXILIARY REPRODUCE CHASSIS

©

©

REF.

EDGE

TRACK

IN

MONITOR

VOICE

IN

0
0

J

TO SELECTED
REF. RECORD CH.

I-________~ECORO CONNECTOR PAN,~E,-,L,-_ __

©------©
L
I

MONITOR

VOICE OR
EDGE TRACK

DATA

AUXILIARY _
REPRODUCE

. fROM SELECTED
REPAOO E CH.

REF~

EOGe

AO

EOGE ( )

CHASSIS

CABLING
REPRODUCE CONNECTOR PANel

~~~~!:"'L---+-----iL,---:_ __
UNIT
IOptloNlI)

POWER
FOR
OPTIONA

REMOTE

POWER

AUXILIAAY

VOICE
CHASSIS

~

1-________-'PO.:;,w:..En .. CONTROL CONNECTOR PANEL
RECORDER/REPRODUCER

DC POVUER SUPPLY

'(Option:-II

4

PRIMARV

ACPOW

Figure 2. Typical Installation Cable Connections (right side of cabinet)

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

OPERATOR'S DATA
1

GENERAL
This bulletin contains the information required to sufficientiy operate this Sangamo recorder/reproducer.
Information contained consists of description of controls and indicators, tape threading, operating procedures, operator's theory, operator's maintenance, and system performance measurements. Additional and/
or more detail operator information for certain subassemblies, optional features, etc., may be found in the
appropriate bulletin in the maintenance section. Consult the contents and list of effective bulletins, and
configuration sheet at the front of this manual for variable standard items and options present on this particular recorder/reproducer.

TABLE 1. TAPE RECORD TIME WITH FOOTAGE INDEX*
Reel Size (inches)
I RIG Bandwidth H
Base Thickness (mils)
Length (feet)
120
60
Tape Speed 30
(ips)
15
7-1/2
3-3/4
1-7/8
15/16

10-1/2
1& 2

1.5
2500
4.2M
8.3M
16.6M
33.3M
66.6M
2.2H
4.4H
8.8H

10-1/2
1&2
1.0
3600
6M
12M
24M
48M
96M
3.2H
6.4H
12.8H

10-1/2
3
1.0
4600
7.65M
15.3M
30.6M
1.0H
2.0H
4..1H
8.2H
16.4H

14
1&2
1.5
5000
8.3M
16.6M
33.3M
66.6M
2.2H
4.4H
8.8H
17.6H

14
1& 2

1.0
7200
12M
24M
A8M
96M
3.2H
6.4H
12.8H
25.6H

14
3
1.0
9200
15.3M
30.7M
61.3M
2.0H
4.1H
8.2H
16.4H
32.8H

*To nearest 1/10 minute (M) or 1/10 hour (H), reel to reel ** 1. Low
2. Intermediate
3. Wideband

DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
a. GENERAL - The operator controls and indicators are generally located in the following three areas;
(1) AC to DC power supply control panel (optional) at the base of the unit, (2) tape transport control panel,
at the right front of the unit, and (3) R/R signal boards. Optional or additional features mayor may not
require additional operator controls or indicators. Refer to the optional items section, in the maintenance
section, to ascertain this.
When the calibration/monitor meter panel (optional) is supplied, it will normally be located above the
tfansport in a separate enclosure. The calibration/monitor meter panel contains db meters which are con-

•

1

BULLETIN f-JO. 3601,"1

nected to the monitor outputs of the record and reproduce chassis. Normally a db meter is suppl ied for
eaCh channel of signal electronics and the voice channel (if supplied). Switches on the front panel provide
for selection between FM RECORD, DIRECT RECORD, and REPRODUCE. Each db meter, for record, is
calibrated to read 0 db for the optimum direct record level (.1 Vrms at REC LEV testpoint) and the proper
FM deviation level (±40% or ±3001o). During reproduce the db meters are calibrated to read 0 db for 1 Vrms.
b. AC to DC POWER SUPPLY (OPTIONAL)
POWER on-off toggle switch
(up-on, down-off)

Controls the application of AC
power to the power supply unit,
thus controlling the +28 Vdc
output of the supply.

28 VOLT INDICATE LAMP

Indicates, when lit, +28 Vdc is present
at the power supply output.

28 VOLT RESET SWITCH

Provides for reestablishing +28 Vdc
after an overload is sensed and the 28
VOLT INDICATE is not lit.

c. TAPE TRANSPORT
TAPE indicator lamp
.I'''.''''}'!wa y s present but functional
't5nly with the tape sync option)

Indicates, when lit, tape speed is being
controlled by a tape reference signal
recorded on tape (optional feature).

SYNC indicator lamp

When individually lit, indicates tape
speed is being controlled by tachometer
reference signal. Should always be lit
when the TAPE indicator lamp is lit.

POWE R indicating pushbutton

Controls the application of primary
power to the recorder/reproducer.
When lit, 24-30 Vdc is applied to all
primary power circuits.

SHUTTLE indicating switch (optional)

Used to activate the shuttle control
circuitry.

E.O.T. (end-of-tape sense)

Used to activate the end-of-tape sense
circuitry.

FWD (forward) indicating pushbutton

Initiates forward tape motion. (reels
turning clockwise). Indicates forward
tape motion when fit.

QANGE switch (de to dcconve~er, left
side of unit - up is 28 Vdc down IS 24 Vdc).

Selects between accepting 28 V dc power
input and 24 Vdcpower input.

=::

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

REV (reverse) indicating pushbutton

Initiates reverse tape motion (reels
turning counterclockwise). Indicates
reverse tape motion when lit.

FASTJ. indicating pushbutton

initiates the fast mode after tape direction has been established. Indicates,
when lit, tape is moving at the fast
speed (faster than 120 ips).

RECORD indicating pushbutton

Initiates the record electronics when
depressed and tape is moving at the
selected speed. Indicates, when Iit,
power is supplied to the record electronics.

STOP indicating pushbutton

Stops tape motion when. depressed
or applies reset power to the reel drive
servos. Indicates machine is ready
for operation when lit.

SQUELCH selector switch (from the rear
of the unit, switch position to the left
squelch is disabled and to the right is
squelch active).

Provides for disabling the servo squelch
feature utilized by the FM reproduce
boards.

~.

~

o

TAPE SPEED SELECTOR

[JQ

BB
BB

Figure 1. Transport Control Panel

3

=============: ~Iii~~

C=!

==::JI

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

Tape Speed Selector

Establ ishes the tape movement
speed.

DENSITY switch (transport connector panel).,

Selects between HIGH or LOW density determining the frequency of
the reference signal to be recorded
on tape (optional tape sync).

TAPE FOOTAGE COUNTER indicator

Indicates the number of feet passing
the capstan.

d. RECORD/REPRODUCE SIGNAL CHASSIS AND SIGNAL BOARDS
1. CHASSIS (contains no operator controls)

2. DIRECT R/R BOARDS (front panel unless otherwise stated)
(a) DIRECT RECORD BOARD (part no. 857033)
RANGE switch

Selects between two standard input
level ranges (0.2 to 1.5 Vrms and
1.5 to 10 Vrms). -

REC ADJ control

Adjusts the input signal to the board
providing the capability of obtaining
the direct normal record level (optimum
head current) at R EC LEV testpoint .

~switch

Selects between two standard input
impedance ranges (LO-75 ohms,
HI 10K ohms).

(b) DIRECT REPRODUCE BOARD (part no. 857218)
OUTPUT LEVEL control

Adjusts the output reproduce signal
level from the board.

(c) DIRECT REPRODUCE BOARD (part no. 836083, amp and phase equalization)
OUT ADJ control

Adjusts the output reproduce signal
level from the board.

4

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

3. BIAS OSCILLATOR BOARD (front panel)

Interrupts the bias signal passing to
any 01 all record electronics (including
voice).

BIAS OfF switch

4. FM R/R BOARDS (front panel unless otherwise stated)
(a) FM RECORD BOARD (part no. 835326)

ZERO control

Adjusts the carrier frequency generated by the veo.

RANGE switch

Selects between two input level
ranges {0.6 to 2.5 V peak and 2.5
to 12.5V peak} and the test position (shorted input).

IN ADJ control

Adjusts the input signal level to the
board, providing the capability of
obtaining the proper percent deviation
(±400k or ±30%) from the carrier
frequency.

~

Selects between two standard input impedance ranges (LO-75 ohms,
HI-20K ohms).

switcb

(b) FM RECORD BOARD (part no. 836161)
RANGE switch

Selects between two input levels
ranges (0.2-1.5Vrms and 1.5-10
Vrms) and the test position (shorted
input).

IN ADJ control

Adjusts the input signal level to the
board, providing the capability of
obtaining the proper percent deviation (±40% or ±30%) from the
carrier frequency.

CF (carrier frequency) control

Adjusts the corrier frequency geo- .
erated by the VeQ,

RE-REC (re-record) switch (optional)

Provides-selection for type of signal
to be recorded. ON provides capability
of recording a modulated carrier signal
reproduced from" another F M track.

5

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

(FM reproduce board). OFF provides
capability of recording a standard ac
or de signal.
(c) FM REPRODUCE BOARD (part no. 857215)

•

OUT LEV control

Adjusts the output reproduce signal
level from the board.

(d) FM REPRODUCE BOARD (part no. 836154)

OUT LEV control'

Adjusts the output reproduce signal
level from the board.

RE REC (re-record) switch (optional)

Provides selection of signa! form at
the board output. ON provides a
modulated carrier at the board out-.
put (BNC) for re-recording purposes
on another FM channel. OFF provides the standard output of a dec
tected and filtered signal.

SQUELCH indicator

Indicates, when lit, the board output
is squelched (output signal is not
present) by lack of proper servo contro! speed or possibly lack of carrier.

ZERO control (on filter unit)

Adjusts the board output for 0 Vdc
with onlv carrier input (no modulated carrier input).

5. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) VVRITE/READ BOARDS (front oanel unless otherwise stated)
(a) PCM WRITE BOARD (part no. 835982)

BAL control

Adjusts the input to accept positive
or negative theshold levels (de offsets of input data).

DE LAY control

Adjusts a delay to compensate for
small "gap scatter" and "fixed skew"
errors associated with the write head
gaps and al ignment.

R E CO R D control

Adjusts the record current applied
to the record head to obtain optimum
record level.

«l rr ITr0J "1\ [i' r'

~m!I~I)));7)tr))~)~J cc::::=.=======:=:=::====:::::J:J
'-lllu(ill[ill ,)J

0,

6

CL=_===========:=_=_======::=:oJ

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

(b) PCM READ BOARD (part no. 835984)
GAIN control

Adjusts the input level to the board
from the reproduce head and preampl ifiers.

TR IG control

Adjusts the plus and minus firing
voltage levels of the Schmitt trigger,
for symmetry.

. DE LAY control

Adjusts the static skew and gap
scatter compensation delay.

OUT control

Adjusts the output level from the
board.

(e) PCM CLOCK BOARD (part no. 835988)

GATE WIDTH control

Adjusts the length of the system
"SKEW GATE" pulse, (virtual
clock).

OUTPUT control

Adjusts the clock board output
amplitude.

(d) ENCODER BOARD (high density, part no. 836277)
DATA ADJUST

Adjusts the input data reference
level for the input trigger circu it.

CLOCK ADJ UST

Adjusts the input clock reference
level for the input trigger circuit.

RECORD LEVEL ADJUST

Adjusts the record current applied
to the record head to obtain optimum record level.

6. VOICE/EDGE AlB RECORD/REPRODUCE BOARDS (front panel unless otherwise stated;.
(a) VOICE RECORD BOARD (part no. 856477)
ON/OFF microphone switch

Activates record board and appl ies
bia!: signal (annotate feature).

VOLUME microphone control

Adjusts output signal level of microphone.

VOICE/TIMING switch (side of board)

Selects between either voice record
(annotate feature) or timing record
(no annotate feature, power on continuously with RECORD lit).

7 C::::::===============:::::J:=J

~i~~~~~

BULLETIN NO.

3601-"

A/B TRACK SELECTION switch (side of board)

Selects which track, A or B, voice
is recorded on.

(b) EDGE A/B RECORD BOARD (part no.

835661)

ON/OFF microphone switch

Activates record board and appl ies
bias signal (annotate feature).

VOLUME microphone control

Adjusts output signal level of microphone.

A/B TRACK SELECTION switch

Selects either A-time code, B-voice,
or A-voice, B-time code.

TIME CODE REC ADJ

Adjusts the input signal level to the
time code record circuitry on the
edge AlB record board.

(e) VOICE/EDGE AlB REPRODUCE BOARD (part no.

856772)

VO LUME control (front panel)

Adjusts the output reproduce signal
level from the board.

VOLUME CONTROL (speaker amp enclosure)

Adjusts the signal level to the
speaker amp input.

TAPE THREADING
The following procedures, with fjgure 2, provide the necessary information to correctly thread the recorder/reproducer, in the reel to reel fashion.
Refer to the loop adapter bulletin, maintenance section, for threading diagram and instructions concerning the optional loop adapter. -

Step 1.

With the power indicating lamp off (power supply unit) or the POWER indicating pushbutton
off (control pane!), align all the guiding pins on the dual hub. This action will lock the two hubs
so that they will not turn independently.

Step 2.

By aligning the slots ona full reel of tape with the guiding pinson the hub, place the full reel
onto the inner hub. =rhe tape should feed off when the reel turns clockwise (in the forward
mode).
\/I.nlile holding the reel with one hand, turn the inner hub 20°clockwise until the hub locks the
reel into position.

Step 3.
Step 4.

To release the hubs from each other, turn the locking pin (the pin in the 1-1/4 inch slot)
counterclockwise while holding the squared guiding pin which is located directly behind the
locking pin.

~'I~~lC~=3==========~d8CI==============~

BULLETIN NO 3601-1

Step 5.

Place an empty reel onto the outer hub and lock it in place by holding the reel and turning
the hub 20°clockwise until secured.

Step 6.

Refer to the tape threading diagram and thread the tape over guide #1 and below the lower
tape tension arm.

Step 7.

Continue with the tape over the right side of the footage counter and the tape sense post,
over the right translation post, and under the left translation post.

Step 8.

Thread the tape up (to the left of guide #2) between the capstan and the right pinch roller,
over the record head and around the inertia dampening roller, then down past the reproduce
heads, between the capstan and left pinch roller, and to the right of guide #3.

Step 9.

Continue with the tape below the upper tape tension arm, over guide #4, and onto the empty
outer ree: for several tu ms.

Step 10.

Inspect the entire tape path to ensure that the tape is threaded and aligned correctly.

- - - - - . - - - - INERTIA

LEFT PINCH ROLLER ---"--

GUIDE" 3

OM/Pf.NING POLLER

- - - RiGHT PINCH ROLLER

----_+{

r - - - - RIGHT

TRANSLATION POS:

OXIDE 510£
TAPE SENSING POST

GUIDE .# 4

uppeR TAPE
TENSION ARM

""

FOOTAGE COUNTER

.

TAPE ON OUTER REEL

_

"
TAPE ON INNER REEl- --_......\

,

_.. _-_. OXIDE SIDE

\

I
I

t - - lO'wER TAPE
' - "_ _;;;/

Figure 2. Tape Threading Diagram (reel to reel)

TENS!O~

AR ...

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

OPERATING PROCEDURES

a. POWER APPLICATION - Primary dc power (24-30 Vdc} is applied to the transport by depressing
the POWE R pushbutton switch (alternate switch) on the transport control panel. If the optional AC to DC
power supply is being used ensure the POWER toggle switch is placed to the ON position.
CAUTiON
Ensure that proper power connections are made to the recorder/reproducer
as explained in the Installation Bulletin. If an optional power supply is being used, refer to the applicable bulletin for information. If remote control
is not-being used, the remote connector MUST be inserted into the REMOTE
jack on the Power Connector Panel.
Always make certain the dc to dc converter's (left side of recorder/reploducer) range switch is positioned
properly (24 Vdc or 28 Vdc) for the input dc voltage to the system.
CAUTION
Always remove POWER prior to switching input voltage ranges with the de
to de converter range switch.
b. TAPE TRANSPORT - The following information is provided to properly move tape in the standard
modes. For optional or special modes (shuttle, tape sync, etc) refer to later paragraphs and possibly bul''tins in the maintenance section.
Step 1.

After initial application of power, or if a condition of loose tape exists, the STOP lamp will
not be lit, in which case STOP should be depressed and held in untii it is lit. This action applies
reset power to the reel drive servos and prepares the tape path for correct operation. With an
extreme slack tape condition the STOP mode button should be pulsed (pressed numerous
times in succession) to prevent tape breakage or misaligned tape while feeding to the reel.
NOTE
After application of power, a 20 second warm-up period
(with STOP lamp lit) is suggested for stablization of the
tape control logic.

Step 2.

'IMlenever the POWER lamp is lit, power is applied to the reproduce electronics. Therefore,
it isonly necessary to depress FORWARD or REVERSE (allow a few seconds to obtain a
phase lock speed control condition to deactivate the F M squelch circuit) to reproduce data at
the selected speed. See additional reproduce operating instructions in the Reproduce bulletins,
maintenance section.

Step 3.

To record information, ensure STOP is lit and depress the RECORD and either FORWARD or
REVERSE push buttons. The FORWARD or REVERSE pushbutton must be released before
the RECORD pushbutton is released. See additional record operating instructions in the
Record bulletins, maintenance section.

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

NOTE
The machine is recording only when the RECORD .indicator is lit.
Step 4.

To move tape in the FAST mode, depress the direction pushbutton (FORWARD or REVERSE)
and then depress the FAST pushbutton. To enter the FAST mode in the same direction as
tape is moving, simply push FAST.

Step 5.

Vllhen in the FAST mode, and the operator wishes to enter the RECORD or REPRODUCE
mode, simply push FORWARD or REVERSE as applicable (RECORD must also be depressed
for recording).

Step 6.

To stop all tape motion, depress STQP. It is not necessary to depress STOP when switching
from one mode to another.

c. RECORDING - Recording information onto magnetic tape for storage may be performed in either
direction at any available tape speed. Refer to the general information bulletin for record specification5.
In order to record the following conditions must be met: ( 1) Tape must be threaded in accordance with
the tape threading procedures (previous paragraph); (2) Proper signal electronics must be installed into the
track numbers desired for use; (3) Proper input signal connections must be made in accordance with the
installation section; and (4) Record electronics must be adjusted properly for the signal to be recorded.
Refer to the maintenance section bulletins for more detail board calibration.
NOTE
If tape synchronous speed control is to be used
during the reproduction of tapes being recorded,
refer to the applicable paragraphs, found in later
portions of this section, before attempting to
record. "'

CAUTION
TAKE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID MAGNETIZING
THE HEADS: (1) REMOVE OR REPLACE SIGNAL BOARDS ONLY
'MiEN POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED. (2) DO NOT MAKE OR BREAK
SIGNAL INPUT OR RECORD HEAD LEAD CONNECTIONS WITH RECORD LAMP LIT; AND (3) DO NOT TEST CONTINUITY OF THE HEADS
WITH AN OHMMETER OR ANY SIMILAR TESTER.
1. CHASSIS
Step 1.

Refer to the Record Chassis bulletin, in the maintenance section, typical board placement
versus head channel.

2. 01 RECT RECORD
Step 1.

c

Check that STOP is lit and depress RECORD.

11

BULLET!N NO. 3601-1

Step 2.

If the Calibration/Monitor Meter panel (optional) is supplied set the proper channel selection
switch to the DIRECT RECORD position and adjust the REC ADJ control, of the applicable
direct record board, for a 0 db re?ding on the associated db meter. The calibration/monitor
meter is calibrated to indicate 0 db for the direct normal record level (optimum).

Step 3.

If the Calibration/Monitor Meter option is not supplied, connect an AC VTVM between the
red test point, R E C LEV, and the black testpoint, G R D, on the applicable direct record board.
Adjust the R E C ADJ control for a .1 Vrms reading on the VTVM, producing the direct normal
record level.

Step 4.

Select the desired tape speed.

Step 5.

Depress the desired direction pushbutton, FWD or REV, and REC, releasing the FWD or REV
pushbutton before R EC. Ensure both lamps are lit.

3. FM RECORD

Step 1.

W1en the optional FM density change kit is supplied, refer to information in the optional
items section.

Step 2.

Check that STOP is lit and depress RECORD.

Step 3.

If the Calibration/Monitor Meter panel (optional) is supplied set the proper channel selection switch to the FM R ECO R 0 position and adjust the IN ADJ control, of the applicable
FM record board, for a 0 db reading on the associated db meter. The calibration/monitor
meter is calibrated to indicate 0 db for the proper percent -deviation.

Step 4.

If the Calibration/Monitor Meter option is not supplied connect an AC VTVM between the
red testpoint, IN and the black testpoint, GRD, on the applicable FM record board. Adjust
the IN ADJ control for a Vrms reading corresponding to the value listed on the head char•
acteristic sheet at the front of this manual. .
-

Step 5.

Select the desired tape speed.

Step 6.

Depress the desired direction pushbutton FWD or REV, and REC, releasing the FWD or
REV pushbutton before R EC. Ensure both lamps are lit.

Step 7.

If re-record is supplied (not applicable on early models) and to be used, set -the re-record
switch to the ON position and ensure the pre-modulated signal is applied to the board input.

d. REPRODUCING - Fleproducing information previously recorded on magnetic tape may be performed in either direction at any available tape speed. Refer to the general information bulletin for reproduce specifications. In order to reproduce information the following conditions must be met: (1) The
proper tape (containing recorded information) must be threaded in accordance with the tape threading
procedures (previous paragraph prior to operating procedures); (2) Proper signal electronics must be installed into the track numbers for use (ensure the proper reproduce board complement of the type signal
~.
: corded is used); and (3) Proper output signal connections must be made in accordance with the installa\ji,:m section. Refer to the maintenance section for detail board calibration.

12 c:

BULLETIN NO. 3601-'1

NOTE
If tape synchrono'ls speed control is to be used during reproduction of
recorded tapes, refer to the applicable paragraphs found in later portions
of this section before attempting to reproduce,

1. CHASSIS
Step 1.

Wlen the optional F M density change kit is suppl ied, refer to information in the optional items
section.

Step 2·

The squelch circuit must be functioning properly as determined by the speed control system
adjustment, Particular emphasis is placed on the 45° phase angle. This must be exactly 4!3°
to ensure proper operation of the squelch circuit (output reproduce signal shorted to ground
during STOP, slewing speeds, or any period when the speed is not correct). Later models may
contain a squelch selector switch (located on the capstan board).

Step 3.

Refer to the Reproduce Chassis bulletin, in the maintenance section, for standard single chassis
board placement versus head channel and/or double chassis board placement versu~ head
channel.

2. DIRECT REPRODUCE (7 speeds)
Step 1.

Remove all power and remove the reproduce board(s} intended for use.

Step 2.

Check the board{s) for correct speed equalizers as well as their correct location on the board.
Refer to the maintenance section for board component location and information concerning
equ a I izers.

Step 3.

Re-install the boards properly, depress POWER and STOP, and select the desired tape speed
(keeping in mind the speed equalizers available).

Step 4.

If the Calibration/Monitor Meter panel (optional) is supplied set the proper channel selection
switch to the reproduce position. The Calibration/Monitor Meter is calibrated to indicate 0
db with the presence of 1 Vrms.

Step 5.

Depress FWD or REV as desired and adjust the applicable reproduce board OUTPUT LEVEL
for the desired output.

Step 6.

If the optional Calibration/Monitor Meter panel is not supplied, connect an AC VTVM to the
proper output connector, or board output testpoint if applicable, and adjust the OUTPUT
LEVEL as desired.

3. FM REPRODUCE (3speeds)
Step 1.

Remove ali power and remove the reproduce board(s) intended for use.

BULLETIN NO. 3601-,,1
i

Step 2.

Check the board(s) for correct speed equalizers, timing capacitors, and filters, as well as their
correct locations. Check also the speed matrix connections on the board. Refer to the main~enance section for board component locations, matrix connections, and information concerning equalizers, timing capacitors, and filters.

Step 3.

Re-fnstall the boards properly, depress POWER and STOP and select the desired tape speed
(keeping in mind the speed equalizers, timing capacitors, and filters available).

Step 4.

If the Calibration/Monitor Meter panel (optional) is supplied set the proper channel selection
switch to the reproduce position. The calibration/monitor meter is calibrated to indicate 0 db
with the presence of l Vrms.

Step 5.

If the optional Calibration/Monitor Meter panel is not supplied, connect an AC VTVM to the
proper output connector, or output testpoint if applicable, and adjust the OUT LEVE Las
desired.

4. FM 4-7 SPEED EXPANDER (4 speeds) - This board is used in conjunction with FM reproduce
(3 speed) board to provide more than three FM reproduce speeds. The only operator requirement is the
proper placement of this board with the associated FM reproduce board. The FM reproduce board must be
placed in the odd numbered chassis positions (odd board chassis positions) and the expander in the next
even numbered chassis position (even board chassis position). The equalizers, timing capacitors, and filters
must also be checked to ensure those speed dependent components are available for those speeds desired .
.l1efer to the maintenance section for component locations and information concerning filters, equalizers,
bing capacitors, and other speed dependent components.

e. TAPE SYNCHRONOUS SPEED CONTROL (optional) - In order to utilize the optional tape sync
method of speed control the reference signal must be recorded on an even numbered direct or FM re-record
record data track (tracks 6 or 8 are suggested for 1 inch and 2 or 4 for 1/2 inch) at the same time of normal
recording. The following procedures are to be followed in utilizing the tape sync option (tape sync board is
optional). Refer to the maintenance paragraphs and maintenance section for tape sync board setup and
calibration.

1. REFERENCE RECORDING
Step 1.

Ensure a BNC to BNC cable is connected from the REF connector (Power and Control Panel)
to the input BNC connector of the proper direct or FM re-record record channel (6 or 8 - 1
inch, 2 or 4 - 1/2 inch). Place a jumper board in the associated reproduce board position.

Step 2.

Place the reference density switch (Power and Control Panel) to the desired position (HI - 400
kHz, LO - 200kHz at 120 ips with submultiples at lower speeds). LO is the recommended
position.

Step 3.

With tape threaded properly, apply POWER and depress STOP, RECORD, and FORWARD.
Monitor the reproduced output (BNC connector) with an oscilloscope.

14

.========================:::J

CI

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

Step 4.

..

Adjust REC ADJ on the direct record board or IN ADJ on the FM record board (note when
using the F M record board for this feature the re-record switch must be ON, up position) for
a maximum amplitude signal on the oscilloscope. Note the Vrms reading between direct record board testpoints REC LEV, TP 2, (hi) and GROt TP 1, (Io), or FM record board testpoints
CAR, TP8, (hi) and GND, TP2 (10). Record this value for future reference, if desired .

2. REFERENCE REPRODUCING

Step 1.

Ensure a B NC to BNC cable is connected from the reference channel output to the TAPE
connector (Power and Control Panel).

Step 2.

Place a jumper board in the proper reproduce chassis board position corresponding to the reference record channel.

Step 3.

Proceed wi1h normal reproduce procedures ensuring the TAPE and SYNC lamps are lit.

f. TAPE SENSING

Step 1.

Place the EOT switch, on the Power Panet to the ON position. If the optionarphoto end-oftape feature is supplied, no further preparation is required to sense the end of tape.

Step 2.

For forward motion tape sensing, place a piece of metallic marker on the plastic side of the
recording tape, centered on a line parallel to and 1/8 inch from the tape deck edge of the tape.
NOTE

Use W. H. Brady Co., Stock No. OCl-1 (Sangamo Part No. 846462).
Step 3.

For reverse motion tape sensing, place a piece of metallic marker on the plastic side of the recording tape, centered on a line parallel to and 3/8 inch from the tape deck edge of the tape.

6. REMOTE CONTROL (OPTIONAL) - When the Remote Control Panel is available, tape movement
can be controlled remotely. If the operator desires to utilize remote control of the equipment, the same
operational procedures described in the preceding paragraphs should be followed. The Remote Control
Panel does not provide for remote power application. The POWE R lamp on the Remote Panel is an indicator only.
The Remote Control Panel may be a hand held mode! or a chassis mounted-mode. The chassis mounted
model mayor may not incorporate the voice speaker enclosure.
To connect the Remote Control Panel, remove the remote-shot1ing-plug from the REMOTE jack on the
Power Connector Panel and insert the remote control panel plug.
NOTE

If remote control is not being used, the remote-shorting-plug

MUST be inserted into the REMOTE jack.
The recorder/reproducer may be controlled remotely by external equipment other than the Sangamo
Remote Control Panel. This is accomplished by providing proper contact closures to the transport logic.
The remote-shorting-plug may be utilized for this purpose. Before beginning any remote set up of this
nature, it is absolutely essential to acquire a thorough knowledge of the system logic.

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

NOTE

Various options are listed and described in the
Optional Items section, maintenance section,
of this manual.
OPERATOR'S THEORY

a. GENERAL - This recorder/reproducer consists of two major assemblies (tape transport and signal
electronics) which constitute a servo speed control system with signal electronics for handling the desired
input and output data. Exact speed is maintained by continually comparing a signal derived from the rotational speed of the capstan with a known crystal oscillator reference. The resultant difference is converted to a proportional dc error signal that adds to or subtracts from the voltage supplied to the capstan
motor, thus speeding up or slowing down the recorder/reproducer.
For complete theory of any assembly, circuit board, etc., refer to the maintenance section of this manual.
b. POWER - The transport requires 24 - 30 Vdc primary power for proper operation. A DC to DC converter assembly, converts the primary power, to +12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, and +5 Vdc required by the mode control, speed control, reel drive, signal electronics, and other circuits.
The optional AC to DC power supply unit is capable of supplying 28 Vdc from a AC input of approxirnately 115/230 Vac at 47 to 440 Hz.
c. TAPE TRANSPORT
1. GENERAL - The tape transport panel is the heart of the recorder/reproducer. AI! of the other
assemblies are designed around this panel. The purpose of the transport panel is to move magnetic recording
tape at an accurate desired speed. Signals to and from the tape via the record and reproduce heads, are
routed from the transport panel to the signal bay for necessary amplification, modulation, or demodulation.
2. MODE CONTROL - The major operating modes of the recorder/reproducer may consist of
RECORD-FORWARD, RECORD-REVERSE, FORWARD (reproduce) REVERSE (reproduce), FAST
FORWARD, and FAST-REVERSE. Other portions of the control panel operate STOP, EOTS (end-of-tape
sense), tape speed and particular optional items. The mode control circuits (primarily the logic board),
when properly initiated by the operator control panel, control all modes of the recorder/reproducer.

3. SPEED CONTROL - The speed control speed system and all tape movement is centered around
the capstan drive system. The capstan drive is a low mass, high torque, single unit dc motor with integral
capstan which eliminates the need for belts, pulleys, or flywheels. The capstan controls the tape speed for
all modes of operation.
The magnetic tape is "pu lied" across the record and reproduce heads by pinching the tape between the
rotating capstan and a pinch roller. To accurately control the tape travel, the rotational speed of the capstan must be carefully controlled. This is accomplished by one of the two following methods of servo speed
!Control.

BULLETIN NO. 361]1-1

T E N S I 0REEL
5 [ ) N- - - r [ F E L D R I V E
SENSE
CI RCUITS

UI/PUT
SIGNALS

_ _ o_

_

--.J - -

OJ

RECORD

elECTRONICS

SPEED LINES
TO RECORD
ELECTRONICS

SPEED
CON mOL

CiRCUlTS

SQUElCH AND

SPE£DUNN
TO REPRODUCE:
ELECTRONICS

ro-

RECORD
ELECTRONICS

MODE
CONTROL

OPERATOR

~~--------------------~MMANDS

C!AClIll"S

-

_ODUCE

ELI'Cn'ONles
END-OF·
TAPE SENSE

CIRCUITS

OUTPUT

SJ!CHAlS

-REGULATED

+2BVdc

TO TRANSPORT

SYSTEM AC
TO OCroW'ER
StJI'1'lY

N;INPUT

REEL DRIVeSENSE

Figure 3. System Functional Block Diagram

c==-==================~===-=_~~

CIRCUITS

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

(a) CAPSTAN SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL - The primary method of controlling tape speed is

called CAPSTAN SYNCH RONOUS control. During Capstan Synchronous control, the internally generated
crystal oscillator reference signal is compared against a tachometer signal (from the capstan motor). Because
the tachometer siqnal is developed within the capstan motor, the frequency of the tachometer signal is
proportional to the rotational speed of the capstan. Any difference in frequency or phase between the
crystal oscillator reference and the tachometer signal is converted into an error difference signal to regulate
the capstan motor speed. During Capstan Sync the SYNC lamp on the operator's control panel should be lit.
(b) TAPE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL (OPTIONAL) - In order to achieve greater speed control
accuracy from a recorded tape, a second method, called TAPE SYNCHRONOUS control, is available as an
option. To use this method, a reference signal from a crystal oscillator is recorded on tape during the record
process. During reproduce, this reference signal replaces the tachometer signal and is compared with the reference frequency of the crystal oscillator. Any difference in frequency or phase is converted into an error
difference signal to increase of decrease the tape speed. I f the voltage level of the reproduced reference signal
is insufficient or if the signal is lost due to tape dropouts, the recorder/reproducer will instanteously revert
to Capstan Synchronous control. During tape sync the TAPE and SYNC lamps on the operator's control
panel should be lit.
NOTE

The Tape Sync option consists of a small printed circuit board
which plugs onto the capstan board.
During the record time, the Capstan Synchronous method is used to control tape speed.
The tape speed control circuits contain eight basic functional divisions as listed below with the circuit
board or subassembly containing each. Refer to figure 4.
1.

Reference Oscillator Circuits - Capstan Board

2.

Tachometer (Tach) Signal Circuits - Capstan Board

3.

Tape Signal Circuits (optional) - Tape Sync Board and Capstan Board

4.

Frequency Preparation Circuits - Capstan Board

5.

Phase Comparison Circuits - Capstan Board

6.

Frequency Comparison - Capstan Board

7.

Acceleration and Amplification Circuits - Capstan Board and Capstan Power Amplifier

8.

Capstan Motor Circuits - Capstan Board and Capstan Power Amplifier

4. REEL DRIVE - This recorder/reproducer's coxial reel drive system incorporates dual control for
inner and outer hub. Each hub is a part of a complete reel drive servo system including a dc motor driven
"lindle, a tape tension sensing arm with a photocell assembly, a dc servo amplifier located ~n the reel drive
~ard, and a power ampl ifier.
-

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

Also located on the reel drive board are special features including a dynamic brake in event of power failure,
an acceleration control (routed to the speed control system) for forward and reverse, and an acceleration
program power mode to stop mode.

FRfO

REF
SIGNA

FROM
TAPE

J
l

"l

TAPO
CII-TS
'''i'AL

(lPJ1.9NA

cnr..~p

Cl<.l~

REEl DRIVE

ACel. C(lNTHOL

ACeL
A~~O

AMP
CK1S

TAPE SYNC

1

CAPSTAN SYNC

TACl-lo.:\,1ETEI-l SIGNAL

Figure 4. Speed Control System Basic Block Diagram
The entire system is classified single ended since each reel drive hub can be driven in one direction only.
In the FO RWAR D mode the outer reel is driven clockwise while the inner reel free wheels (actually there
is a slight voltage applied to the inner reel to provide proper tension). In the REVE RSE mode the inner
reel is driven counterclockwise while the outer reel free wheels (with some drag).
d. SIGNAL ELECTRONICS
1~

CHASSIS - Each chassis, record and reproduce, provide sufficient space and electrical connections
to contain and operate the desired record boards and reproduce boards. ±l2 Vdc and +5 Vdc is supplied
to each chassis from the DC to DC converter. These voltages are supplied to each board jack to power each
board. Proper connections are provided for routing the input signals (record chassis) to the record head.
The reproduced signals are routed from the reproduce head and preamps to the reproduce board and the
output of the machine. Other signals involved in the chassis are the bias oscillator signal (record.only)
and the speed lines for record (carrier freq/speed) and reproduce (equalization and filterino/speed)
electronics.
2. RECORD ELECTRONICS - All record electronics are utilized to properly prepare the input signal"
for recording on the magnetic recording tape.· Preparation primarily consists of supplying tht: proper record
current to the record head to ensure optimum recording. Varied preparation is dependent on the type of
recording, (direct, FM, dig"ital, etc). All speed dependent preparation is automatic. Due to the many types
of recording, and types of boards to provide recording, a complete theory is located in the proper record
board bulletin in the maintenance section of this manual.

19

BULLETIN NO. 3601),-

r

3. REPRODUCE ELECTRONICS - All reproduce electronics are utilized for preparation of the re~oduced signal as it passes from the reproduce head and preamplifiers. Preparation involves amplification,
speed equalization, filtering and possibly others such as demodulation, etc; dependent on the type of recording. All speed dependent preparation (filtering, equalization, etc.) is automatically selected with the
selection of tape.speed. Due to the many types of reproducing, and the types of reproduce boards, a complete theory is located in the proper reproduce board bulletin in the maintenance section of this manual.
OPERATOR'S MAINTENANCE

a. GENERAL - Operator's maintenance provides inspection techniques, preventative maintenance procedures, tape splicing procedures, and checks and adjustments concerning power, tape transport, and signal
electronics. Inspection is limited to visual checks and replacement of fuses with preventative maintenance
pertaining to care of the tape path and R/R heads. Tape splicing procedures are provided to aid in splicing
tape, should the need occur. The checks and adjustments are provided as an aid to ensuring or obtaining
proper operation of the various areas of the recorder/reproducer's power tape transport, and signal electronics. Also provided are suggested areas (bulletins), in the maintenance section of this manual, to check
if particular indicated results are not obtained properly in these procedures. These suggestions may always
be supplemented with various other areas. The ones listed, intended to be the most probable, are in the
tape transport bulletin unless otherwise specified. Refer to the transport wiring diagram (rear of tape transport bulletin) and transport overall schematic when referring to these procedures as well as the maintenance
procedu res.

Cb.

INSPECTION

Step 1.

Check to see that no fuses are blown. Refer to Table 2 for transport fuse information and to
the Power Supply bulletin for Power Supply (optional) Fuse information.
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one of a higher rating unless continued operation
of the equipment is more important than probable damage. If a fuse burns
out immediately after replacement, do not replace it a second time until the
fault has been corrected.

TABLE 2. FUSE FUNCTIONS*
FUSE

RATING

FUNCTION

LOCATION

PART NO.

F1

ABC-2~

Primary OC
Power

Back of Transport

859774-011

F2

F02B-3A

Capstan Motor
Power

Back of Transport

821926

F3

AGX-8A

OCto DC

-

~~

Converter

20

Left Side of
Transport

510279-004

-

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1
NOTE

Additional fusing is contained on the optional power supply
unit; refer to the power supply bulletin. Additional fusing
may be contained on some auxiliary signal chassis.
Step 2.

Check that all plug-in boards and modules are properly seated.

Step 3.

Check that all plugs and jacks are properly mated and well seated. Refer to the installation
section for information concerning cabling connections.

c. PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE

1. TAPE PATH - Periodic cleaning of the tape path is necessary to ensure optimum performance.
The frequency of cleaning will depend upon the usage of the machine and the condition and type of tape
used. Normally, the tiansport should be cleaned daily. Materials required for cleaning are lint free cotton
swabs, a clean soft cloth, and isopropyl alcohol.

Step 1.

Deenerigze the machine and remove the tape from the tape transport.

Step 2.

Remove the head cover and the head shield.

Step 3.

Moisten a clean cloth with a small amount of isopropyl alcohol and wash all oxide deposit!>
from the tension arm guide pins, all four tape path guide pins, the two pinch rollers, the
inertia dampening roller, and the main capstan.
CAUTION"
Use only isopropyl alcohol to clean any of the tape path elements
or the tape heads. The use of any other solvent may result in possible
damage. Alcohol must be completely dry before tape is rethreaded.

Step 4.

Moisten a lint free cotton swab with a small amount of isopropyl alcohol and wash all oxide
deposits from the heads.

2. RIR HEADS
(a) MAGNETIZED HEADS - A magnetized head may cause degradation of the recorded signal and
a reduction ofthe signal-te-noise ratio. The following precautions should be taken to avoid magnetizing the
heads.

Step 1.

Remove oneplace plug-in boards only when POWER has been removed.

Step 2.

Do not make or break signal input or record head lead connections while in the RECORD
mode.

Step 3.

Do not test continuity of the heads with an ohmmeter or any similar test instrument.

(b) HEAD DEGAUSSING - The heads should be degaussed (demagnetized) when a 4 to 6 db drop
in signal-to-noise ratio is detected or whenever the direct second harmonic distortion exceeds one-half per
cent. The magnetic field of the head will cause partial erasure reducing the accuracy of the signal handling
circu its. Head degaussing may be performed with any good tape head demagnetizer.

C===============~J21C[==========~I~~~%~
~([JJ~«ill@~tlllYJ

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1
NOTE

If the tips of the demagnetizer are not covered with a material to
protect the head, cover these tips with a length of vinyl electrical
tape.

Step 1.

Connect the demagentizer to its proper power source.

Step 2

Place the demagnetizer tips across the head.

Step 3.

Slowly move the demagnetizer back and forth along the entire length of the head stacks at
least fou r times. This operation should take about 30 seconds.

Step 4.

Slowly move the tips of the demagnetizer away from the head. Motion of the demagnetizer
should be smooth and continuous (with no sudden movement).

Step 5.

Clean heads after degaussing.

d. TAPE SPLICING - Proper tape splicing is essential to avoid loss of tape-to-head contact, tape skew,
excessive head wear and other adverse effects. Wnen a tape splice becomes necessary, the following stepby-step procedu re is recommended.

Step 1.

/~

With a short piece of masking tape,
secure one of the magnetic tapes
(in the area to be spliced) to a flat
surface (e.g. the rigid back of a
paper tablet). The non-oxide (glossy)
side. of the magnetic tape must be
up.

Step 2

Carefully lay the second piece of
magnetic tape (in the area to be
spliced) over the secured magnetic
tape. Ensure that the edges are perfectly aligned and, using two more
pieces of masking tape, secure this
second magnetic tape over the first.

Step 3.

Using a sharp razor slice through
both pieces of magnetic tape. The
cut should be approximately 600 to
the edge of the tape.

Step 4.

Peel back the undesired top tape and
secure it under an edge of the masking
tape.

'-~

22

J

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

Step 5.

With the two pieces carefully butted
together, place a piece of standard
splicing tape across the cut. Using a
fingernail. or any blunt instrument,
ensure that the splicing tape makes
100% contact with the magnetic tape.

Step 6.

Carefully trim all splicing tape from
the edges of the magnetic tape. A
very slight concave cut into the
magnetic tape is advisable when
trimming.

Figure 5. Tape Splicing Procedure
e. CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS - The following checks and adjustments are provided as an aid in
ensuring or obtaining proper operation of the various areas of the recorder/reproducer's power circuits, tape
transport, and sigrfal electronics. Also provided are suggested areas, in the maintenance section, to check if
particular indicated results are not obtained properly in these procedures. These suggestions may always be
supplemented with various other areas. The or.es listed, intended to be the most probable, are in the tape
transport bulletin unless otherwise specified. Refer to the transport wiring diagram (rear of tape transport
bulletin in the maintenance section) and transport overall schematic when referring to these procedures as
well as the maintenance procedures.
1. DC TRANSPORT POWER

Step 1.

Ensure_primary DC power is applied to the transport. If the optional power supply is supplied,
ensure it is turned on, and the indicator lamp is lit. Depress and release the RESET switch
. (precautionary measure).

Step 2

Depress the POWER pushbutton switch on the control panel and ensure the lamp becomes lit.

Step 3.

With a DC voltmeter ensure +28 Vdc between TPl (hil, red testpoint, and TP2 (10), black testpoint, (both on the Power and Control Panel, right side of unit). Obse~ve correct polarity with
the measuring instrument.

Failure to obtain any or all of the above results suggests the following checks be rTlade.
(1) Power supply bu lIetin concerning adjustments and/or troubleshooting, maintenance
section of this manual.
(2) Cabling connections per the installation bulletin.
2. DC TO DC CONVERTER POWER

Step 1.

With satisfactory results obtained in previous DC transport power checks, open the left side
door panel of the unit and locate the dcto de converter assem_bly (tower portion of unit).

23

C==========11~_7~~ia~~

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

Step 2.

With POWE R on, use a dc voltmeter and ensure the presence of the following voltages between the indicated point and W3 (LO). Terminals W1, 2, and 3 are arranged in descending
order, with W3 at the top.
Indication Point
W1

W2
+ side of C3

. Voltage
+12 Vdc ±.1 Vdc
-12 Vdc ±.1 Vdc
+5 Vdc ±.25 Vdc

Failure to obtain any or all of the above results suggests the following checks be made.
(1) DC to DC Converter Fuse F3
(2) DC to DC Converter bulletin concerning adjustments and/or troubleshooting, maintenance
section.
3. MODE CONTROL CIRCUITS

Step 1.

Thread tape on the recorder/reproducer as explained in the tape threading procedure.

Step 2.

Ensure POWE R is on and depress STOP, ensuring its indicating lamp is lit. If extreme slack tape
is present pulse the STOP pushbutton gently to tighten tape and lift the tension arms. Observe
no tape movement with stop lamp lit._

Failure to obtain the above results suggests the following checks be made:
(1) Logic board circuits test, in the maintenance section, concerning stop mode.
(2). Reel drive system test, in the maintenance section, concerning microswitch, photocell,
tension arms, etc.

Step 3.

Depress FWD, ensuring its indicating lamp is lit, and observe tape moving from the inner reel
to the outer reel, with the capstan turning counterclockwise. Ensure both pinch rollers are
energized.

Failure to obtain the above results, with reverse tape movement (next step) possible, suggests the following checks be made:
(1) Logic board circuits test, in the maintenance section, concerning forward mode, and the
tape direction relay, K2.
Failure to obtain tape movement in either direction at any speed suggests -the following checks be made,
in sequence:
(1) Fuse F2 (capstan motor fuse).
(2) Logic board circuits test, in the maintenance section.
(3) Capstan board circuits test, in the maintenance section.
(4) Capstan Power Amplifier test, in the maintenance section.

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

Step 4.

Depress REV, ensuring its indicating lamp is lit, and observe tape moving from the outer reel
to the inner reel, with the capstan turning ciockw!se. Ensure both pinch rollers are energized.

Failure to obtain the above results, with forward tape movement possible, suggests the following checks
be mC}de.
(1) Logic board circuits test, in the maintenance section, concerning reverse mode, and the

tape direction, K2.

Step 5.

While moving tape in reverse (step 4), depress FAST, ensuring its indicator lamp is lit, and observe tape movement in the reverse direction at an accelerated rate (greater than 120 ips).
Ensure the right pinch roller is energized ..

Step 6.

Depress FWD, with FAST lamp lit, and observe ta;Je movement in the forward direction at an
accelerated rate. Ensure the left pinch roller is energized.

Failure to obtain the above results suggests the following checks be made:
(1) Capstan board circu its test, in the maintenance section.
(2) Logic board circuits test, in the maintenance section.

Step 1.

Depress STOP and FWD and place the EDT switch to the I N position. Ensure markers are
placed at the end and beginning of tape (standard E.O. T. feature). When the photo end-ot-tape
sense is used, ensure the sensing lamps are lit on the transport. Continue to move tape in for·
ward and observe tape movement stopping prior to tape becoming completely unwound from
the reel (approximately 75 feet left).

Step 2.

Complete Step 1 in the reverse mode.

Failure to obtain the preceeding results (Steps 1 and 2) suggests the following checks be made:
(1) Logic board circuits test, in the maintenance section.
(2) Photo End-of-Tape sense (optional) in optional items section.

3. SPEED CONTROL
(a) REFERENCE FREQUENCY CHECKS

Step 1.

With POWEf{ removed place the capstan board on its extender (if the cabinet back is removed
or cabinet removed, the board need not be extended). Connect a frequency counter between
testpoints TP5 (hi) and TP4 (10). Refer to figure 6 for capstan bbard locations.

Step 2.

Apply POWE Fl, depress STOP and either FWD or REV, and ensure the presence of the fre·
quencies (switching through the speeds) as listed in table 3 (TP5).

Step 3.

Move the frequency counter hi lead from TP5 to P2-16 (or at A7 pin 8). Ensure the proper
frequencies at both high and low densities, .while switching through the speeds in either REV
or FWD.

======= =============..

C(

======::J 25

============:=::J

rc.=====::=::=:

BU LLETI N NO. 3601-

NOTE
If the preceding signals are monitored with an oscilloscope,
they should be a symmetrical square wave with a logic "0"
level of +0.3 Vdc ±O.3 Vdc and a logic "1" level of +3.7 Vdc

±1.3 Vdc.

TABLE 3. REFERENCE FREQUENCIES
SPEED (ips)

TP5

120
60
30
15
7 1/2
33/4
1 7/8
if applicable
15/16

Step 4.

-

100 kHz
100 kHz
-50 kHz
25 kHz
12 kHz
6.25 kHz
3.125 kHz
1.562 kHz

P2-16 (low density)
200 kHz
100 kHz
50 kHz
25 kHz
12.5 kHz
6.25 kHz
3.125 kHz
1.562 kHz

P2-16 (high density)
400 kHz
200 kHz
100 kHz
50 kHz
25 kHz
12.5 kHz
6.25 kHz
3.125 kHz

Depress FAST and connect a frequency counter between testpoints TP5 (hi) and TP4 (10).
Ensure a 267 kHz signal.

Failure to obtain any of the preceding results suggests the following checks be made:
(1) Capstan board circuits test. in the maintenance section.
(b) CAPSTAN TACHOMETER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Step 1.

With the cabinet removed, rear access panel removed, or the capstan board on its extender,
depress STOP ando-FWD, and set to the slowest tape speed.

Step 2.

Connect a frequency counter and oscilloscope to the capstan board between testpoints TP6
(hi) and TP4 (10).

Step 3.

Ensure the presence of a symmetrical square wave of approximately 3.125 kHz (1 7/8 ips) or
1.562 kHz (15/16 ips) and SYNC lamp lit. If the symmetrical square wave is not present, locate the adjustment potentiometer on the capstan motor and adjust for best possible symmetrical square wave.

Step 4.

Switch through all speeds and check frequency versus speed per previous table 3 (same frequencies as TP5). Note that 120 ips produces a frequency at TP6 one-half that at TP5.

•

failure to obtain the preceding results suggests the following checks be made:
(1) Capstan board circuits test, in the maintenance section.

6~[v(n]((\\~\=,
(fJ}/nllr;))j7i1J)M,: )[1)

CI===================:=:JI

ijl.!nillili[ill~J>IY 11-73

26

CI-================::::;::========:=:J

BULLETIN NO. 3[;01-1
{c}

CAPSTAN SERVO CONTROL CHECKS and ADJUSTMENTS
NOTE

Tape must be threaded properly to complete the following.
Stefl 1;

With the cabinet remoVf]d, rear access panel removed, or the capstan board on its extender,
(left panel door removed), apply POWER and depress STOP and FWD. Set tape speed selector
to the slowest speed.

Step 2.

Monitor testpoint TP9, refer to figure 6, with an oscilloscope (TP4 10) end ensure the lower
portion of the trapezoidal vvaveform is at 0 Vdc level. Adjust R40, as necessary, to bring this
leve! to 0 Vdc.

Step 3.

Monitor testpoint TP1O(TP4 !o) with an oscilloscope and ensure the lower portion of this
trapezoidai wavdonn is at 0 Vdc !evel. Adjust R43, as necessary, to bring this leve! to 0 Vdc.

Step 4.

Monitor the capstan power amplifier heat sink (hi) with an oscilloscope (TP4 10) and ensure
severe ripple (above 10 Vp-p) is not present. Adjust R45, as necessary, to minimize ripple as
much as possible.

Step 5.

Monitor the time base error at testpoint TP7 (phase pattern) with an oscilloscope (TP4 10).
Jitter as this point should be minute. Adjust R52 and possibly R50 as necessary to minimize
jitter. After the tape sync mode (optional) is set up and adjusted (this consists of adjusting
R52) R50 will require readjustment in the capstan sync mode.
NOTE

TP8 may also be used to monitor this measurement and
make this adjustment.
Step 6.

Remove all POWER and connect an oscilloscope to capstan board P2-20 (hi) and TP4 (10).

Step 7.

Apply POWER and depress STOP, ensuring the presence of a logic 0 level (+0.3 Vdc ± 0.3 Vdc).

Step 8.

Depress FWD and ensure the logic 0 level changes to a logic 1 level with stable tape movement.
This function, very pertinent to the speed control squelch output for the FM reproduce boards,
is adjusted as follows:
(a)

With all POWER removed, locate PHASE LOCK adj., R94, on the capstan board (refer to
figure 6) and turn completely CWo

(b)

Apply POWER and depress STOP and FWD. Turn PHASE LOCK adj., R94, CCW untii
stable tape movement occurs, then turn slightly more CCW.

Failure to obtain the preceding results suggests the following checks be made:

c=:

(1)

Capstan board circuits test, in the maintenance section.

(2)

Capstan power amplifier circuits test, in the maintenance section.

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

SQUELCH
DISABLE
tv.:

•

L OC K

r------I
r--

R37

Al

I

TP18e

IOSC)

I

I

I

ACTIVE

PH~S@@J

TP15

__

"" SQUELCH

I

I

-c::::.r-

y

R35

T~6
TP5G

P2 I

/\,

Tt~8~O

!._ - - - - __I

TP4 (GNDe

1-

TP38

TRAPEZOID

'---

~VDC LEVEl)

1-

@@
R40 R43

<:1P10

TP9~

.-P12

R45

Pl

aTP11

RIPPLE@)

TP17.e

TP19
a

@)

, ...
,R50
,'.., '. ~\CAP
I

:1 SYNC
\"··"GAIN)

l'

\

,.1I

• TPl
OTP2

m:J

R52~

&viASTER &
TAPE SYNC
GAIN)

a

eTP13

TP14

CAPSTAN BOARD

Figure 6. Capstan Board, Location of Testpoints and Adjustments
(d) TAPE SYNC CONTROL CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS (OPTIONAL FEATURE)

NOTE
All preceding checks and adjustments in the speed
control system must be performed prior to completing the following.
Step 1.

Record in forward the tape reference signal at the slowest available speed. Refer to the tape
sync operating procedu res.

Step 2.

Rewind the tape and begin reproducing the reference signal recorded in step 1 (TAPE and
SYNC lamps should be lit). Monitor at the same time, the capstan board testpoint TP7,
with an oscilloscope, (TP410), and adjust R52 (tape sync gain adjust) for minimum jitter
on the oscilloscope. R50 will now require readjustment in the capstan sync mode.

·Step 3,

Record in forward, bias only on a section of tape (20-30 feet).

28

BULLET! N NO. 3601-1

Step 4.

Rewind and depress FWD reproducing the bias and noise (bias and noise track jumpered to
tape sync connector), ensuring the tape sync lamp does not lit.

Failure to obtain the above results suggests the following checks be made:
(1)

Direct record board or FM re-record of FM record board (bulletin in rn<,linten5nce section)
and aU tape sync cable connections including reproduce jumper board.

(2) Tape sync board circuits test, in the maintenance section.

4. REEL DHIVE CIRCUITS
(a) TENSION CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Step 1.

With POWER ON depress STOP and ensure the tension arms rise off their rnlcroswitches.

Step 2.

Depress FWD and after tension arms halJe stabilized ensure they are positioned (with tape
moving) midway of their path of travel and no oscillations or jittering of either arm is present.

Step 3.

If the tension arms are notpositioned properly remove power and gain access to the reel drive
board (Jeft side of unit). Apply power, depress STOP and FWD, and adjust each reel drive
board balance control, R 17 (first potentiometer at top of board) outer reel and R 2~ast potentiometer bottom of board) inner reel, until its associated tension arm is positioned rnidway
of its path of travel. Possibly adjust gain control R 23 (second potentiometer at top of board)
outer reel, and R8 (second potentiometer from bottom of board) inner reel to reduce arm
jitter.

(b) PINCH ROLLER PRESSURE

Step 1.

Step 2.

With all power off remove the rear access panel
and locate and remove the tape direction relay,
K2, and the reel drive board.

o
«UJ

:r

Fasten the tape tension arms away from their
"at rest" position.

Step 3.

Thread a four foot section of recording tape, and
attach the gram gauge"per figure 7.

Step 4.

Set the tape speed to the slowest speed available,
apply POWER and depress STOP and FWD.

a
a:
o

u

W

II::

/

Step 5.

Hold capstan firm and pull down on gram gauge
until tape begins to' slip. The gauge should read
900 to 1100 grams before the tape sl ips.

Step 6.

If the pressure seems to be incorrect, remove the
top and-rear access panels, or the cabinet, and
complete the following:

GRAM
GAUGE

Figure 7. Pinch Roller Pressure
Threading

CH.1

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1
NOTE
Relay K2 and the reel drive board must be
rep/aced.

a. Ensure tape is threaded correctly, set the tape speed selector to the 1 7/8 ips, and depress POWER
and FWD .

•

b. Disable the right hand pinch roller (viewed from the front of the machine) by holding the lever
assembly down, thus preventing contact to the capstan.
c. Apply the force gauge (calibrated in pounds) to the top of the left hand pinch roller lever assembly.
Apply pressure through the gauge until the tape ceases to move. The reading on the gauge at this
point should be 10 Ibs. ±1 lb. If this reading is not present adjust the tension adjustment tap at the
top of the lever, until this reading is obtained at the same moment the tape ceases to move. CCW
decreases pressure and CW increases pressure.
d. For adjustment to the right hand pinch roller move tape in the reverse (REV) direction, disable the
left hand pinch roller and repeat c in a similar manner.

TENSION
ADJUSTMENT
NUTS

CLEARANCE
ADJUSTMENT
NUTS

CAPSTAN
MOTOR

Figure 8. Pinch Roller Pressure Adjustment
Failure to obtain the above results and adjustment cannot be obtained, suggests the following checks be
made:
(1) Reel drive system test in the maintenance section.

30

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

. 7. RECORDIREPRODUCE SIGNAL CHASSlS
(a) RECORD CHASSIS

Step 1.

Ensure tape is threaded properly and several record boards are removed from the record chassis
(every board may be removed if every board jack is to be checked).

Step 2.

Depress POWER, STOP and RECORD.

Step 3.

With a de voltmeter 10 connected to system ground (black testpoint, Power and Control Panel)
ensure +12 V de at pin 23 and 0 V de at pins 11, 12, and 19 of an accessible record board jack
in the record chassis. Refer to chassis wiring in the maintenance section. Remove meter high
lead.

NOTE

+12 Vdc is applied to the board jacks after
-12 Vdc, due to a time delay relay.
Step 4.

Reverse meter polarity and ensure -12 Vdc at pin 1 of the same board jack in the record chassis.
Remove hi lead and correct meter polarity.

Step 5.

'MIile changing speeds ensure +5 Vdc at the pins corresponding to the tape speed as listed in
table 4.

-

.

-

TABLE 4. RECORD/REPRODUCE CHASSIS SPEED LINES
Standard

Non-Standard

Speed

120
60
30
15
7 1/2
33/4
1 7/8

Step 6.

Speed

Record Chassis

Reproduce Cha ssis

Jack Pin

Jack Pin

60
30
15
7 1/2
33/4
1 7/8
15/16

6
8
10
14
20
22
18

22
2
3
4
5
8
19

Remove all power and test connections and replace all boards removed.

Failure to obtain the above results suggest the following checks be made:
(1) Record Chassis bulletin in the maintenance section.

(b) REPRODUCE CHASSIS

Step 1.

With POWE R off ensure several boards are removed from the reproduce chassis (every board
may be removed if every board jack is to be checked).

cc====·
=:=:=========:=:==:::========'-=_=.=.====,_=:::::J::::J

31

c_
. __~_,,___

BULLETiN NO. 3601;-1
/.

Step 2.

Ensure tape is threaded property, apply POWER and depress STOP and FWD.

Step 3.

After machine has reached speed and the SYNC indicator is lit, connect a dc voltmeter LO to
system ground (black. testpoint, Power and Control Panel).

Step 4.

Connect H I of voltmeter to pin 23 of a reproduce board jack, refer to the reproduce chassis
w(ring in the maintenance section and ensure +12 Vdc. Connect HI to pins 11, 12, and 15,
and ensure 0 Vdc. Remove HI lead connection.

Step 5.

Reverse meter polarity and connect to pin 1 of board jack, reproduce chassis. Ensure a -12
Vdc reading.

Step 6.

With tape moving, switch through each speed (allowing time for stabilization and SYNC lamp
to lite) and ensure +5 Vdc at the pin associated with the corresponding speed as listed in
table 4). Earlier systems may -utilize +12 Vdc speed lines. Refer to the reproduce board
bulletins to determine switching voltage used.

Step 7.

With the R/R moving tape at the proper speed (sync lamp lit) always ensure pin 7, of all board
jacks, is not grounded.

Step 8.

Remove all power and test equipment.

Failure to obtain the above results suggests the following checks be made:
(1) Reproduce Chassis bulletin in the maintenance section.

8. SI GNAL ELECTRONICS - Refer to the maintenance section for bulletins containing maintenance
information for record/reproduc:esignal boards, bias oscillator, preamps, etc.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENTS

-

a. WOW AND FLUTTER - The following equipment is required to perform wow and flutter measurements.

Micom 8300 Wow and Flutter Meter.
One channel of properly calibrated direct record/reproduce electronics.

'Step 1.

During the following steps use a new or nearly new, thoroughly degaussed, reel of high quality
magnetic recording-tape. Also ensure the heads are 'degaussed and the tape path has been
Cleaned.

Step 2.

Select a tape track near the center of tape and ensure that properly calibrated direct record/
reproduce electronics are placed in the corresponding slots of their associated chassis.

Step 3.

Calibrate the Micom wow and flutter meter as follows:
.. Drift

1%

32 Cc==========================~

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

Peak-to-Peak

1%

PK Time . .

20

Meter Select

Demod

Drift BW . .

30 Hz

Step 4.

Connect the output of the wow and flutter meter to the input of the track being used, Record
Connector Panel.

Step 5.

Connect the input of the wow and flutter meter to the reproduce output of the channel being
used, Reproduce Connector Panel.

Step 6.

With the recorder/reproducer in the STOP mode, the Wow and Flutter meter should present
a LOW level indication. If a NORM or HIGH level indication is present adjust the output level
of the reproduce board until a LOW level indication appears.

Step 7.

With tape moving in the R ECO R D mode, at the desired tape speed, set the drift meter to zero.
A NORM level indication should be present on the meter. If NORM is not present, adjust the
output level of the reproduce board until a NORM level indication appears. Recheck drift
meter to ensure it is set at zero.

Step 8.

Refer to the following tabular I isting for filter and carrier characteristics requ ired for the Wow
and Flutter meter settings at the various speeds.
TAPE SPEED (ips)
120

60
30

15
7 1/2
33/4

1 7/8
15/16

if applicable

Step 9.

FI LTER (kHz)

CARRIER (kHz)

108
54
27

10
10
5
2.5
1.25
.625

13.5

6.75
3.375
1.688
.844

.312

.156

Read the wow and flutter value directly from the meter for each speed and compare to the
following typical wow and flutter specifications.
TAPE SPEED
120

60
30
15
71/2
33/4

1 7/8
15/16

• PEAK-TO-PEAK FLUTTER (tRIG) %

0.20
0.25
0.30

0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.80

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

b. DIRECT RECORD/REPRODUCE
1. FREQUENCY RESPONSE

Step 1.

Connect a sine wave generator to the input of the track to be tested.

Step 2.

Reoord a short section of tape with a 1000 cps sine wave at the optimum record level.

Step 3.

Record frequencies from 50 cps to at least 20010 beyond the upper band limit at the highest
speed of the electronics, keeping the output level of the generator constant.

Step 4.

Play back the 1000 cps section of tape and set the output level at a db. Do not change this
setting.,

Step 5.

Measure the frequency response of the track by playing back the recorded frequencies and.
referencing the output level to the setting of Step 4.

2. SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO

Step 1.

Record a section of tape with a 1000 cps sine wave at the highest speed of the available electronics, using optimum record current.

Step 2.

Depress STOP and remove the input signal.

Step 3.

Record a section of tape with BIAS only.

Step 4.

Play back the tape and measure the difference between the 1000 cps reproduce level and the
no signal reproduce level. (This is measured easiest by setting the output level of the 1000
cps signal to a db).

c. FM RECORD/REPRODUCE
1. FREQUENCY RESPONSE

Step 1.

Connect a function generator to the input o! the track to be tested.

Step 2.

Record a section of tape with a 100 cps sine wave at the highest speed of the available electronics at ±4001o FM Carrier deviation (low, intermediate, and W.B. I. only· W.B. "use ±3001o).

Step 3.

Record frequencies from (0.05 cps square wave) up to 100 cps sine wave at the highest speed
of the available electronics. Maintain a constant ±4001o (or ±30%) deviation level.

Step 4.

Replace the function generator with the sine wave generator and record frequencies from 100
cps sine wave to beyond the upper limit of bandpass at the highest speed of the available electronics, maintaining a constant ±4001o (or ±300,-b) deviation level.

Step 5.

Reproduce the recorded tape at each of the speeds desired to be tested, setting the output
reference (0 db) level during the pass of the initial 100 cps recording. Output should be within
3 db of the reference level at the upper band edge.

34

J

BULLETIN NO. 3G01-1

2. SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO

Step 1.

Record a portion of tape at ±4001o (or ±30%) carrier deviation using a 100 cps sine wave at the
highest speed of supplied electronics.

Step 2.

During the record process remove the input signal and continue to record the unmodulated
FM carrier.

Step 3.

Play back and measure the difference between the 100 cps signal level and the no signal level
with a VTVM. (This is measured easiest by setting the output level of the 100 cps signal to
o db).

Step 4.

Repeat the above steps for the other speeds, recording and reproducing at each speed.

•

3. DC LINEARITY

Step 1.

Connect a variable dc voltage supply across the input BNC on the Record Connector Panel of
the FM track being tested. Connect the positive side of the voltage supply to the center of
the BNC connector and the negative side to a convenient ground point.

Step 2.

Depres~

RECORD and allow 15 minutes for warm-up of the record electronics before pro-

ceeding.

Step 3.

Connect a frequency counter across the VCO (yellow test point) and G ROUND (black test
point) on the front of the FM record board.

Step 4.

Refer to the FM record bulletin for the proper center frequency and th_e correct deviation for
the speed and bandwidth being used.

Step 5.

If necessary use the ZERO adjust (front of FM record board) to obtain the correct center
frequency.

Step 6.

Adjust the variable power supply for 1 Vdc. Use the INPUT ADJUST (front of FM record
board) to obtain the proper frequency deviation measured at the VCO testpoint.

Step 7.

Position the RANGE switch on the front of the FM record board to the TEST position.

Step 8.

Depress FORWARD and while monitoring the playback signal, adjust the FM reproduce
board, DC LEVEL ADJ (side of board), for 0 Vdc.

Step 9.

Position the RANGE switch to the 2.5 V position.

Step 10.

Monitor the output signal and adjust the reproduce board, OUTPUT LEVE L (frent of board)
for 1 volt DC.

Step 11. Fill in the table below. Before changing input voltages position the RANG E switch ~o TEST
and ensure the center frequency has not changed. Use a digital voltmeter when measuring
the output voltages and possibly the input voltages.

(

I

BULLETIN NO. 3601-1

Input

Output

+1 vo!t DC
+.5 volt DC
+.25 volt DC
4-0 volt DC
-.25 volt DC
-.50 volt DC
-.75volt DC
-1 volt DC

Step 12. Using the tabular listing of input and output voltages from Step 11, plot the voltages on an
ordinary piece of graph paper as shown below.

output

50
lines

t

50

------+-0-----. +
~

Lines ; .

input

1000ib = 1 volt = 50 lines
500ib = .5 volt = 25 lines
5% = .05 volt = 25 lines
.5% = .005 volt = .25 lines

Step 13. After plotting the graph draw the best straight line through z.ero. All the points should be at
least .5% or .25 divisions from the line.

~1~i~~CI============~

36

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

TAPE. TRANSPORT
GENERAL
Information contained in this bulletin consists of maintenance data pertaining to the basic tape transport.
This information consists of theory of operation, maintenance, parts removal/replacement, and transport
diagrams.. The theory covers a general description of the major areas of the basic tape movement circuits.
Maintenance is broken down into circuit description, test data, parts list and diagrams for each assembly,
circuit board, etc., associated with the tape transport. Parts removal/replacement data contains information
for removal/replacement of mechanical parts, tape width kits, :,ead alignment, etc.
THEORY OF OPERATION
a. GENERAL - This information covers a systematic theory of the various areas of the tape transport.
More detailed theory in the form of circuit description for each circuit board or subassembly is found in
the maintenance section of this bulletin. Refer to the transport overall schematic.
b. DC POWER DISTRIBUTION - The recorder/reproducer normally operates on +24 or +28 Vdc (two
ranges, selectable at the dc to dc converter) which is applied to J6-A (hi) and J6-C (10). A special 28Vdc
input through J6-B and J6-D is routed to the tape transport for powering only the cabinet blower fan. The
input primary de power is fused by F 1 and a reverse polarity protection relay protects against accidental
reversal of power leads. The 0 Vdc line is tied directly tothe 28 volt ground bus, W2. All 28 volt return
lines are connected to this bus.
When the POWER pushbutton is depressed, +28 Vdc is applied to the DC to DC converter at A6TB1-1
(hi) and A6TB1-2 (10). The output of the power supply (A6) is +12 Vdc (on A6Wl), -12 Vdc (on A6W3),
o Vdc (on A6VV2), and +5 Vdc (+ side of C3). All return lines for the ±12 Vdc and +5 Vdc are tied (directly
or indirectly) to A6W2.
The MAIN POWER relay will ':lot become energized unless: (1) a tight tape condition exists or (2) the
STOP pushbutton is depressed. If the machine is in a slack tape condition, depressing the STOP pushbutton
bypasses the tape tension microswitches A 1S1 and A2S1, and energizes the MAl N POWE R relay which applies +28 Vdc to W1 which in turn applies +28 Vdc to the reel drive board. With power applied to the reel
drive board, the reel drive servo will attempt to find a null position, thereby pulling the tape tension arms
off their stops and closing A 1S1 and A 152. With these microswitches closed, power will be applied to the
MAl N POWE R relay and the recorder/reproducer will be ready for normal operation.
With the MAIN POWER relay energized, +28 Vdc is applied to the +28 Vdc bus W1: This bus applies
power to the voice power plug, the capstan power amplifier, through the capstan motor fuse F2 to relay
K2·4 (the TAPE DI RECTION relay), and to the reel drive board.

BULLETIN NO. 3604-;4
,

From A6, lines are routed from A6Wl. A6W2 and A6W3 to the signal electronics chassis via Pl, P2 andrl4. Power to initiate the RECORD mode must pass through the logic board. +12Vdc from A6W1 is appliU:t to the reel drive board, the capstan board, the capstan power amplifier, and the tachometer in the capstan motor. -12 Vdc from A6W.3 is applied to the capstan board and the tachometer in the capstan motor.
+5Vdc is applied through the speed select switch 53 to select certain speed dependent record circuits and
rep rodu ce ci rcu i:ts.
To meet the requirements of certain microcircuits +7Vdc, -7Vdc, +5Vdc, and -5Vdc are provided by
regulated supplies on the capstan board.
c. SYSTEM CONTROL LOGIC - The following sequence descriptions note the order of events which
occur in the machine during a change from one mode of operation to another mode, i. e. STOP to Fa RWARD, FORWARD to FAST, etc. Refer to the overall system schematic diagram to follow the sequence
of events.
The events are explained assuming a tight tape condition, POWER pushbutton depressed, and the MAIN
PO WE ~ relay energized. VVhen POWE R ,. is depressed, +28 vdc is applied, through A2S 1 and A 1S 1, to
J8-22 (logic board). In addition +28vdc is applied through S5 (5 & 6) ** and through STOP A3S2 (2 & 1),
to J7-6 (logic board). For the following discussion it will be beneficial to note that, with the above assumptions, +28 vdc is always applied to J8-22 (iog.ic) and is also applied to J7-6 (logic unless the STOP pushbutton is actually depressed).
1. SEQUENCE: STOP TO FORWARD

'*

Step 1.

With the recorder/reproducer in the STOP mode, +28 vdc is applied to the FORWARD
switch A3S1-5.

Step 2

Wlen the FORWARD pushbutton is depressed, +28 vdc is applied through J7-9 to CR2
(logic board), to the FORWARD lamp andto the coil of Kl (logic board) energizing that
relay. It is also applied through CR 1 to pin 20f the RECORD switch.

Step 3.

With K1 (logic) energized, +28 vdc is removed from the STOP lamp, and applied to the
coil of K5. K5 will not become energized until the capstan tachometer reaches a point
between 1000 and 1500 Hz which activates the transistor switch on the capstan board and
grounds the low side of K5 (logic).

Step 4.

Before K5 is energized however, +28 vdc is applied to CR23 which places the 01 RECTION
HOLDING relay K6 in the FORWARD position. This action applies +28 vdc (from K5-11)
to the OPERATE.relay Kl0 (capstan board) and to the hour meter assembly A28.

The POWER switch is alternate and remains in one·position until depressed again. STOP, RECORD, FAST. REVERSE and FORWARD are
momentary switches wh ich retu rn to their original ~osltion when pressure is released.

**

If the ENO·OF-T APE switch Is activated, this voft;age passes through Kg (12 & 4).

2

J

BULLETIN NO. 36044

Step 5.

•

With the OPE RATE relay K 10 energized, +5 vdc is applied through K 10 contacts to activate
the divide-by circuits. Other K 10 contact CI JSures switch a low potential to the low side of the
capstan motor. With this circuit activated, the countdown network and all circuits pertaining
to the capstan motor motion are activated, thus the capstan starts turning .

Step 6.

When K 1 was originally energized +28 vdc was applied, through CR 19, to pinch roller #2 (the
downstream pinch roller for forward tape movement).

Step 7.

\filth K5 energized, +28 vdc is applied from K5-6, through K3-' and K3-9, through CR 17, to
pinch roller #1.

Step 8.

With both pinch rollers energized, and with the capstan motor turning and the reel drives operating correctly, tape will move from the inner reel to the outer reel. The capstan will tu rn in
the corrc~t direction because K2 (TAPE DI RECTION relay) is deenergized.

2. SEQUENCE: STOP TO REVERSE

.

Step 1.

With the recorder/reproducer in the STOP mode, +28 volts is applied through A3S1-5 and 4,
through P2T and P2N, to pin 5 of the REVERSE pushbutton (A4S1).

Step 2.

Depressing REVERSE applies +28 volts through CR7 (logic) to the REVERSE lamp and to
the coil of K2 (logic) energizing that relay. It is also applied through CR6 to the RECORD
pushbutton.

Step 3.

With K2 (logic) energized, +28 vdc (from pin 4) is removed from the STOP lamp and is applied
as a holding voltage through CR9 to K2 (logic). This voltage will hold K2 energized until (1)
STOP is depressed or (2) FORWARD is depressed.

Step 4.

K2 (logic) also applies +28 vdc from pin 7 to the coil of TAPE MOTION relay K5 (logic).
However, K5 will not become energized until the capstan tachometer reaches a frequency
between 1000 and 1500 Hz, at which point the transistor switch on the capstan board grounds
the low side of K5's coil.

Step 5.

Before K5 is energized, +28 vdc is applied to CR24 which places K6 (DI RECTION HOLDING
relay) in the REVERSE setting.

Step 6.

K6 (logic) now performs several functions. It applies +28 vdc to the hour meter assembly,
A28, and to the coil of OPERATE relay K10 (capstan board) energizing that relay.

Step 7.

With the·OP~RATE relay K10 energized, +5 vdc is applied through K 10 contacts to activate
the divide-by circuits. Other K 10 contacts closures switch a low potential to the low side of
the capstan motor. VJith this circuit activated, the countdown network and all circuits pertaining to the capstan motor motion are activated. Thus the capstan motor starts turning.

Step 8.

When K2 (logic) was originally energized, +28 vdc was applied, through CR 16, to pinch roller
#1 (the downstream pinch roller for reverse tape motion).

lC=========.=========::=::=::===-=:::=:::=_=:===:=:=.===:J==~

3

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

Step 9.

When K5 becomes energized, +28 vdc is applied from K5·6, through K3-1 and K3-9, through
CR 18 to pinch roller #2.

Step 10. With both pinch rollers energized, the capstan motor turning and the reel drives operating
correctly, tape will move from the outer reel to the inner reel. The capstan will turn in the
correct direction because K2 (TAPE Di RECTION relay) is energized.
3. SEQUENCE: STOP TO RECORD

Step 1.

""hen both K 1 (logic) and K2 (logic) are deenergized, +28 vdc from Pl-6 is passed through
Kl (11 & 3), K2 (12 & 4), CR11 and applied to RECORD switch A4S3-2.

Step 2

When RECORD is depressed, +28 vdc is immediately applied to the RECORD lamp and to the
coil of K4 (RECORD) through Pl-7.

Step 3.

Relay K4 (logic) will remain energized because +28 vdc from Pl-6 passes from pin 9 to 5 on
K4, through K2 (2& 10) and Kl (2 & 10), and is applied to Pl-7 which energized K4 originally.

Step 4.

The circuit described in Step 3 is the holding circuit for RECORD when tape is NOT moving.
If either FAST, FORWARD or REVERSE are depressed, this circuit is immediately broken
(K 1 or K2 energized) and the R ECO R D relay K4 will become deenergized.

Step 5.

With K4 energized, +12 vdc (from P1-20) and -12 vdc (from Pl-18) are applied to the record
electron ics.

4. SEQUENCE: STOP TO FORWARD-RECORD

Step 1.

To record in the FORWARD mode, it is necessary to establish forward tape motion before
releasing the RECORD pushbutton. The sequence for establishing forward tape motion is
identical to sequence 1.

Step 2.

With tape moving in the FORWARD mode, +28 vdc is applied to the RECORD pushbutton
A4S3-2, (Step 2, STOP to FORWARD sequence).

Step 3.

Depressing the RECORD pushbutton applies +28 vdc to the RECORD lamp and also to
RECORD relay K4 (logic) through P1-7.

Step 4.

Relay K4 will remain energized because +28 vdc from Pl-6 passes from pin 9 to 5 on K4,
through deenergized K3 (2 & 10), energized K 1 (5 & 9), out on P1-4, through FORWARD
switch A3S1 (2 & 1) to REVERSE switch A4S1 (2 & 1) and to P1-7 which energized K4
originally.

Step 5.

The circuit described in Step 4 is the holding circuit for RECORD when tape is moving in the
FORWARD mode only. If either STOP, REVERSE or FAST is depressed, this circuit is
immediately broken and K4 will become deenergized.

BULLETiN NO. 3604-4

Step 6.

5.

With K4 energized, + 12 vdc (from P 1-20) and -12 vdc (from P 1-18) are app lied to -the record
electronics.
SEQUENCE: STOP TO REVERSE-RECORD

Step 1.

To record in the REVERSE mode, it is necessary to establish reverse tape motion before releasing the RECORD pushbutton. The sequence for establishing reverse tape motion is identical to sequence 2.

Step 2.

With tape moving in the REVERSE mode, +28 vdc is applied to RECORD pushbutton A4S3-2
(Step 2, STOP to REVERSE sequence).

Step 3.

Depressing the RECORD pushbutton applies +28 vdc to RECORD relay K4 (logic) through

Pl-7.

Step 4.

Relay K4 will remain energized because +28 vdc from P1-6 passes from pin 9 to 5 on K4,
through deenergized K3 (2 & 10), energized K2 (5 & 9), out on P1-4, through FORWARD
switch A3S1 (2 & 1) to REVERSE switch A4S1 (2 & 1) and to Pl-7 which energized K4
originally.

Step 5.

The circuit described in Step 4 is the holding circuit for RECORD when tape is moving in
the REVERSE operate mode only. If either STOP, FORWARD or FAST is depressed, this
circuit is immediately broken and K4 will become deenergized.

Step 6.

With K4 energized, + 12 vdc (from P 1-20) and -12 vdc (from P 1-18l are applied to the record
el ectron ics.

6.

SEQUENCE: FORWARD TO FAST·FORWARD

Step 1.

To move tape in the FAST-FORWARD mode, it is necessary to establish forward tape
motion before releasing the FAST pushbutton. The sequence for establishing forward tape
motion is identical to sequence 1.

Step 2.

With Kl (logic) energized, +28 vdc is received from K2-3, through K1 (12 & 8), out on Pl-2
and applied to FAST A4S2-2.

Step 3.

When FAST is depressed, +28 vdc is applied to the coil of K3 (logic). Relay K3 receives its
holding voltage (through pins 12 & 8) from STOP pushbutton A3S2-1, through FORWARD
switch A3S1 (5 & 4) and REVERSE switch A4S1 (5 & 4).

Step 4.

With FAST relay K3 energized, +28 vdc is removed from Pl-21 (logic) and Pl-20. This
would deenergize Kg (capstan board) which would lock out the phase lock switch from the
speed control servo. In addition a voltage is applied to the base of Q1 {logic) which locks
out tape synchronous speed control, if applicable.

Step 5.

With FAST relay K3 (logic) energized, +28 vdc (from K5-6} is removed from the anodes of
CR17 and CR18. Therefore only pinch roller #2 will remain-energized (from K1-7),

===:=:======:=: ='===========::::::J

cc=::=:

=:

5 r=

~-=: ==========:=J
~ ~\fv)~~~~~\~~
~4~llil@1[~'J~W)

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

Step 6.

Relay K3 {logic) also removes the ground from J8-13 (logic) and J9-6 (capstan board) and
appl ies +5 vdc through K3 (11 & 7) to these points. This activates the slew reference
signal which places the speed control into the FAST tape (slew) mode.

Step 7.

7.

Step 1.

With the capstan turning at a slew rate, the reel drives operating correctly and the downstream (#2) pinch roller engaged, tape will move from the inner reel to the outer reel at a
fast~slew) tape speed. It is not possible for the RECORD relay to remain energized since
the interlocking circuits in K3 (2 & 10) and K 1 (2 & 10) are open.
SEQUENCE: REVERSE TO FAST-REVERSE
To move tape in the FAST-REVERSE mode, it is necessary to establish reverse tape motion
before releasing the FAST pushbutton. The sequence for establishing reverse tape motion is
identical to sequence 2.

Step 2.

With K2 {logic) energized, +28 vdc is received from K 1-3, through K2 (12 & 8), out on Pl-2
and applied to FAST A4S2-2.

Step 3.

When FAST is depressed, +28 vdc is applied to the coil of K3 (logic). Relay K3 receives its
holding voltage (through pins 12 & 8) from STOP pushbutton A3S2-1, through FORWARD
switch A3S1 (5 & 4) and REVERSE switch A4S1 (5 & 4).

Step 4. . FAST relay K3 also removes +28 vdc from Pl-21 (logic) and Pl-20. This would deenergize
relay K9 (capstan board) which would lock out the phase lock switch from the speed control
servo. In addition, a voltage is applied to the base of Q1 (logic) which locks out tape
synchronous speed control, if appl icable.

Step 5.

With FAST relay K3 (logic) energized, +28 vdc (from K5··6) is removed from the anodes of
CR17 and CR18. Therefore, only pinch roller #1 will remain energized (from K2-7).

Step 6.

Relay K3 also removes the ground from J8-13 (logic) through ~9-6 (capstan board) and
applies +5 vdc through K3 (11 & 7) to these points. This ~ctivates the slew reference signal
which places the speed control into the FAST tape (slew) mode.

Step?-

With the capstan turning at a slew rate, the reel drives operating correctly and the downstream (#1) pinch roller engaged, tape will move from the outer reel to the inner reel at a
fast (slew) tape speed. It is not possible for the RECORD relay to remain energized since
the interlocking circuits in K3 (2 & 10) and K2 (2 & 10}are open.

8.

SEQUENCE: FORWARD TO STOP

Step 1.

When tape is moving in the forward direction and STOP is depressed, +28 vdc is momentarily
. removed from Pl-6 (logic). This removes the holding voltage (through K2-11 & 3) from the
coil of K1 (logic) and the FORWARD relay immediately deenergizes~

Step 2.

When Kl is deenergized, +28 vdc is removed from the anode of CR20. However, K5 (logic)
will remain energized due to the holding voltage from K5-6.

6

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

Step 3.

In addition, K 1 removes the voltage from OPE RATE relay K 10 (capstan board) which deenergizes and thereby removes the reference signal. With no reference signal, the capstan motor
will immediately begin stopping very quickly due to its low inertia.

Step 4.

When the tachometer frequency drops below 1000 to 1500 kHz, the switch on the capstan
board is opened which deenelgizes K5. With K5 deenergized, voltage is removed from the
two pinch rollers (from K5-6 through K3-1 & 9).

Step 5.

When the capstan stops turning and the pinch rollers released, tape movement will stop.

9.
SEQUENCE: FAST·FORWARD TO STOP - The FAST-FORWARD to STOP sequence is
identical t() sequence 8 except that FAST relay K3 (logic) is also deenergized immediately when STOP is
depressed.
When FAST relay K3 becomes deenergized, both pinch rollers become engaged for the short time it
takes for tape movement to stop.
10. SEQUENCE: REVERSE TO STOP

Step 1.

When tape is moving in the reverse direction and STOP is depressed, +28 vdc is momentarily
removed from P1-6 (logic). This removes the holding voltage (through K 1 - 3 & 11) from
the coil of K2 (logic) nnd the REVERSE relay immediately deenergizes.

Step 2.

When K2 is deenergized, +28 vdc is removed from the anode of CR21. However, K5 (logic)
will remain energized due to the holding voltage from K5-6.

Step 3.

In addition, K2 removes the voltage from OPERATE relay K 10 (capstan board) which deenergizes and thereby removes the reference signal. With no reference signal, the capstan motor
will immediately begin stopping very quickly due to its low inertia.

Step 4.

When the tachometer frequency drops below 1000 to 1500 kHz, the switch on the capstan
board is opened which deenergizes K5. With K5 deenergized, voltage is removed from the
two pinch rollers (from K5-6 through K3-1 & 9).

Step 5.

When the capstan stops turning and the pinch rollers released, tape movement will stop.

11. SEQUENCE: FAST-REVERSE TO STOP - The FAST-REVERSE to STOP sequence is identical
to the REVERSE to STOP sequence 10, except that FAST relay K3 (logic) is also deenergized immediately
when STOP is depressed.
When FAST relay K3 becomes deenergized, both pinch rollers become engaged for the short time it
takes tape movement to stop.
12. SEQUENCE: FORWARD TO REVERSE

Step 1.

When tape is moving in the forward direction and REVERSE is depressed, +28 vdc is
applied to the REVERSE lamp and to the coil of REVERSE relay K2 (logic).

Step 2.

Relay K2 breaks the interlock (11 & 3) for the holding voltage of FORWARD relay K 1 which
becomes deenergized.

c::::::===___

:::. =====::::J

7

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

Step 3.

With K 1 deenergized the tape will begin to stop.

Step 4.

Relay K2 will remain energized because K 1 is now deenergized.

Step 5.

When the tachometer frequency falls below 1000 to 1500 kHz, relay K5 will deenergize
which applies +28 vdc to K6 (logic) .
•
Tape will now begin to move in the reverse direction as explained in sequence 2.

Step 6.

13. SEQUENCE: REVERSE TO FORWARD
Step 1.

When tape is moving in the reverse direction and FORWARD is depressed, +28 vdc is
applied to the FORWARD lamp and to the coil of FORWARD relay K1 (logic).

Step 2.

Relay K 1 breaks the interlock (11 & 3) for the holding voltage of REVERSE relay K2
which becomes deenergized.

Step 3.

With K2 deenergized the tape will begin to stop.

Step 4.

Relay K 1 will remain energized because K2 is now deenergized.

Step 5.

When the tachometer frequency falls below 1000 to 1500 kHz, relay K5 will deenergize
which applies +28 vdc to K6 (logic).

Step 6.

Tape will now begin to move in the forward direction as explained in sequence 1.

14. SEQUENCE: FAST-FORWARD TO FORWARD

Step 1.

When tape is moving in the FAST-FORWARD (or slew) mode, and FORWARD is depressed,
the interlock to the FAST relay K3 (logic) is immediately broken and relay K3 deenergizes.
Also, the voltage is removed from the base of Q 1 (logic).

St'ep 2.

With the FAST relay deenergized, the slew reference will be replaced by the operate reference
and the recorder/reproducer will seek synchronous operation at the selected speed.

15. SEQUENCE: FAST-REVERSE TO REVERSE

Step 1.

. Step 2.

When tape is moving in the FAST-REVERSE mode, and REVERSE is depressed, the interlock to FAST relay K3 (logic) is immediately broken and relay K3 deenergizes. Also the
voltage is removed from the base of Q 1 (logic) .
With the FAST relay deenergized, the slew reference will be replaced by the standard operate
reference and the recorder/reproducer will seek synchronous operation at the selected speed.

16. SEQUENCE: END-Of-TAPE SENSE (also used with the optional shuttle feature)

Step 1.

When END-OF-TAPE sense switch S5 is in the IN position, the +28 vdc from A1S1C cannot
pass through S5, but must be routed through deenergized K9.

Step 2.

Whenever FORWARD, REVERSE or STOP is not actually depressed, +28 vdc is applied to
resistors R9 and R8 from P 1-1.

~~~~~~) L-C::=============::=::J-'

8

=======================:1

CC:::=

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

Step 3.

When tape is moving (1<5 energized), +28 vdc is applied to the anode of CR32.

Step 4.

When a sensing strip passes over the electrode on PU3, the electrode is momentarily grounded,
and the voltage on the base of 03 is less than the voltage on the emitter and the transistor
conducts for the short period of time when the sensing strip is on the electrode. With the
optional photo end-of-tape sense feature J8-7 (fwd) 01 J8-6 (rev) is grounded when the
associated sense detector is activated by light from the associated photo sense lamp. This
produces the same effect as the sensing strip passing over the electrode on PU3. Refer to the
Photo End-of-Tape Sense bulletin in the optional items section (tab).

Step 5.

When 03 conducts, it applies a voltage to the gate of silicon controlled rectifier CR32 which
now begins conducting. CR32 will continue to conduct (even with no voltage on the gate)
as long as +28 vdc is applied to its anode. The silicon controlled rectifier is necessary in the
circuitry because the period of time when the sensing strip passes over the electrode is insufficient to energize sense relay K9. However, since CR32 wili continue conducting, relay K9
will energize and remain energized until K5 is deenergized which removes the +28 vdc from
CR32.

Step 6.

When K9 (logic) is energized (and S5 is in the IN position) a stop command will be routed to
control logic. When tape movement stops, K5 will deenergize removing the +28 vdc from
CR32.

d. SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM - The following theory describes the overall speed control system
and its use in the precise movement of tape.
The magnetic tape is "pulled" across the record and reproduce heads by pinching the tape between a
rotating capstan and two pinch rollers. To accurately control the tape travel, the rotational speed of the
capstan must be carefully controlled. This is accomplished by one of the two following methods of servo
speed control.
CAPSTAN SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL - The primary method of controlling tape speed is called
CAPSTAN SYNCH RONOUS control. During Capstan Synchronous control, an internally generated,
crystal oscillator signal is used as a reference against which a tachometer signal (from the capstan motor) is
compared. Because the tachometer is part of the capstan motor, the frequency of the tachometer signal is
proportional to the rotational speed of the capstan. Any difference in frequency and phase between the
crystal oscillator reference and the tachometer signa! is converted into error difference signals to regulate the
capstan motor speed. During Capstan Sync the SYNC lamp on the Operators's Control Panel should be lit.
TAPE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL (OPTIONAL) - In order -to achieve greater speed control accuracy
from a recorded tape, a second method, called TAPE SYNCHRONOUS control, is available as an option.
To use this method the internal reference signal from a crystal oscillator is recorded on tape (even numbered
track) during the record process. When the tape is reproduced, this signal in lieu of the tachometer signal
is recovered from the tape and compared with the reference frequency of the crystal oscillator. Any
difference in frequency and phase is converted into error difference signals which increase or decrease the
tape speed. If the voltage level of the reproduced reference signal is insufficient or if the signal is lost due to
tape dropouts, the recorder/reproducer will instantaneously revert to Capstan Synchronous Control. During
tape sync the TAPE and SYNC lamps on the Operator's Control Panel should be lit.
[

::: :

BULLETI N NO. 3604-4

During the record time, Capstan Synchronous is used to control the speed of the tape.
The tape speed control circuits contain eight basic functional divisions as listed below with the circuit
board or subassembly containing each.
1.

Rpference Oscillator Circu its -- Capstan Board.

2.

Tachometer (Tach) Signal Circuits - Capstan Board.

3.

Tape Signal Circuits (Optional) - Tape Sync Board and Capstan Board

4.

Frequency Preparation Circuits - Capstan Board.

5.

Phas~

6.

Frequency Comparison - Capstan Board.

7.

Acceleration and Amplification Circuits - Capstan Board.

8.

Capstan Motor Circuits - Capstan Board and Capstan Power Amplifier.

Comparison Circuits - Capstan Board.

SPEED, r,.'ODE,

AND :£,"51 fY
osc
CKJS

cm'T:::-1
_.SIGNAl

II

l

TO

REEl DRIVE

ACCL

C~'~d

nUL

-*-

Acel
MW
AMP
CKTS

--=l

REF
SIGNAt

(('IMP

FROM

r-

CKTS'

TAPE
T APE SYNC

j

CAPSTAN SYNC

TACH
SIGNAL

eKTS
(STNJDAR
TACHO,METER SIGNAL

Figure 1. Speed Control System Basic Block Diagram
For discussion, refer to the Speed Control Circuits Overall Block Diagram, Figure 2.

1. REFERENCE OSCI LLATOR CIRCUITS - A 3.2 MHz crystal oscillator is used to generate the
basic reference frequency for comparison with the tachometer (or tape when used) signal. This same signal
(divided down per speed and density) is also recorded on tape when the recorder/reproducer is equipped
for the optional Tape Synchronous Control. The output of the reference oscillator is applied to a frequency
countdown network and to a frequency select gate with the output dependent upon the tape speed selected
at the Operator's Control Panel. The counted down speed dependent frequencies are applied through an
operate/fast divider select gate to the density select gate. With the DENSITY switch in the H IG H position,
~~e output of the gate will select the higher of the two inputs to make the output frequency, 400 kHz for
f20 ips.
~rrU@ffi\rt(\

C============::::J

(Q\~\\k\\I~W~\~,
~ffI)!! /1~!IMIIMI;YJ {
L1<.\l.l\llil\i.llI,,-

:I

10 [

::::-=== ::

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4
If the LOW position is selected. the input is selected to make the output frequency 200 kHz for'120 ips.
The output of this gate will be submultiples of these frequencies for lower tape speeds and is applied to the
REF connector on the Record Connector Panel to be recorded on tape for Tape Synchronous control
(optional). This output is not utilized for Capstan Synchronous control,
When a FAST mode is desired, the chain of events is slightly different. Upon depressing the FAST push•
button on the Operator's Control Panel, the 3.2 MHz oscillator signal is applied to a divide-by-twelve circuit,
activated during fast. The output frequency is 267 kHz and is applied directly to the operate select gate,
bypassing all the countdown circuitry. The output is applied to the frequency preparation circuits.
2. TACHOMETER SIGN,AL CIRCUITS - During Capstan Synchronous operation, a tachometer sig,
nal from the capstan motor is generated and gated through to the frequency preparation circuits for com,
parison against the reference oscillator signal. The frequency of the tachometer signal is porportional to
the rotational speed of the capstan motor. A slotted opque disc rotating in front of a photocell produces an
output signal which is amplified and quantized to develop a square wave within the capstan motor. The
quantized signal is inverted, and gated through to the frequency preparation circuits. When utilizing the
tape sync board, this signal is routed through the tape sync board.
The tachometer signal is also shaped to drive a switch which energizes the tape motion relay on the logic
board. Because of an R C time constant within the switch circuit, the tape motion relay does not energize
until the tachometer reaches a point somewhere between 1000 and 1500 Hz.
3. TAPE SIGNAL CIRCUnS (OPTIONAL) - The tape signal circuits are used only if the recorderl
reproducer is equipped with the optional tape sync board. The tape sync board plugs directly onto the
capstan board.
record reference signal, from the reference oscillator circuits is recorded
During the record process
on tape through a direct record channel. The frequency r.ecorded is proportional to the tape speed selected.
During the reproduce process the tape referencesignal passes through the selected preamplifier and bypasses the reproduce electronics through a jumper board. F rom the iumper board the signa! is applied to
the tape sync board via the TAPE connector.
Upon entering the tape sync board, the signal passes through an intergrating amplifier and triggers a
signal detector circuit This circuit turns the tape sync lamp on, activates the tape sync gain change on the
capstan boards, and is also app;ied to the tape/tach select gate. The output of the intergrating amplifier
also passes through a level detector and a divide-by two circuit to the tapeltach select gate. The function
of the level detector is further conditioned by the 15/16 ips thru 7 1/2 ips speed lines, when applicable.
The tapeltach select gate utiiizes three data inputs (tach signal, tape reference signal high density, and
tape reference signal low denisty), three control inputs (hi density, tape inhibit, and signal detector), and
one output The selected input (tach signal in capstan sync or tape signal- hi or low density) is routed
through to the output and on to the capstan board, conditioning and controlling the speed control system
as the tachometer signal normaUy does in the capstan sync speed control function.
4. FREQUENCY PREPARATION CIRCUITS - The reference oscillator signal, upon being counted
down by the speed dependent countdown circuits, is applied through an operate/fast divider select gate.

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

" This gate provides a divide-eight and divide-by sixteen output for tape speeds of 120 ips through 1 7/8 ips.
for a tape speed of 15/16 ips, a output of divide-by sixteen and divide-by thirty-two are provided. The
divide-by sixteen (standard speeds) or the divide-by thirty-two (15/16 ips) is applied through another
divide-by two and the operate select gate to the freq/phase lock detector and the function generator network.
Table 1 shows the reference frequencies generated for each tape speed. The oscillator reference signal is
referred to as the A" signal.
II

The tape reference signal (tape sync option) or the tachometer reference signal is either divided-by two
(120 ips only) or divided-by one (all other speeds) and applied to the freqlphase lock detector and the
function generator network.
The tape or tach signal is referred to as the "B" signal.

--

TABLE 1. REFERENCE FREQUENCIES kHz VS TAPE SpeED
Speed
(ips)
120
-60
30
15
7112
33/4
1 7/8
15/16

Osc
Ref
100 kHz
100
50
25
12.5
6.25
3.125
1.562

Tach
Ref

Tape
Hi Den

Tape
Lo Den

200 kHz
100
50
25
12.5
6.25
3.125
1.562

400kHz
200

200 kHz
100
50
25
12.5
6.25
3.125
1.562

100
50

25
12.5
6.25
3.125

5. PHASE COMPARISON CIRCUITS - The phase comparison c.ircuits are used to maintain capstan
speed once the selected speed is released.
The A and S signals are applied to the two inputs of the functi£!:!.gener~r. Th~tput of the function
generator develops four basic logic signals, consisting of AS, AS, AS and AB. The AB and the AB are applied
to two operational integrator circuits. Each of the operational integrators have the same ~ignal at the input,
except for a 1800 phase shift. The output of each is a trapezoidal wave with a 1800 phase shift. Each trapezoidal wave is held to the 0 Vdc reference by the function generator outputs AS and AS via the clamp circuits. The two signals are added together by an operational adder to develop a dc level proportional to the
phase relationship of signals A and B. Whenever a phase lock signal is received by the mode select gate, the
dc level is allowed to pass to the acceleration and amplification circuits.

6. FREQUENCY COMPARISON CIRCUITS - The frequency comparison circuits are used during
the time the frequency error between the oscillator reference signal (referred to as the A signal) and the
tape/tach signal (referred to as the B signal) is the greatest. When the A and B signals are running at the
same frequencies, the phase comparison circuits are sensed and used to maintain a constant tape speed.

~11~~C~h.=1=~=3======~

12

TAPE SPEED LINES

DENSITY
SELECT
SWITCH

J9-15
- P2-/5
.---

RECORD

REF

J9-/6
PZ-16

TO OPT.
TAPE SYNC _

+ 12VDC

I

BOARO

J/O-/3, Pf-/3

Tn
+ S vDe

.

+

Jlo-IBI P/-(B

GND

VIA JI2

GATE AT

15116 ips

---,
3.2MH,

J9-/3 PZ-f3

-12VDC

+8Y2

SPEED/FREQUENCY
COOiHDOWN

osc

I

DENS1TY
SELECT

GATE

r

FAST
';-BY

TP4

12

TI>3

~

J9-IO PZ-/O

'(

TP7
"I" FAST}
J.9-6 P2-6
"O"NORMAL F AST ....:...;-"+-'::.....::.....---6~

GATE

"S"SIGNAL

-;. SY 2

120ip'S _ _
SPEED
LINE

AT

____~________--~~:~.~FU~~~~~r;~:~$--t--

120ips

10.8
JUMPER USED WHEN
TAPE SYNC FEATURE
is NOT SUPPLIED

J9-7 PZ-7
TAC" S
GNAl=--t-=------+lINVERTER 1--&--<111-

~

J

-- - - - -

J9

'--LOGIC

I·

SW

BD.

+2BVDC

I

~

K5

EQUALIZER

DURING~D.REva F~
T::l
SIGNAL

O+_-=-J9:::-..;2~2~P.!2:..:-!:;2!'.2_----+---_fI.::A:....cI_+l'NTEAR~RpATOR
m

LEVEL

-;. BY 2

DETECTOR

GATE

INPUT

Ir-.,
I +12VDC

TAPE
SYNC LAMP

~

JI

OPERATORS
CONTROL PANEL

"O"FAST

O. R

REC

"." NORMAL MODES

}

TIMING
CONTROL

~-tJ~9-.~/6~P~2~-..;/~6-----.~~,~~.::J:/4~.'r---~L~O..;S~P~E~E~D..;C~O~N~T..;R~O~L_ _ _Ojr"

TAPE INHIBIT J9 - ZI

712:-15/16ips

KI

SPEED LINES
"OR" ED

r

TAPE SYNC BD.(OPTIONAL)

2 - Z1

-----

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

SolTELCH
"I" SYNC LOCK
"O"STOP-FAST-OUT OF SYNC

.J9-20
P2-20
TPIS
IPI2

TPI3

C~~.p~OL

1-__"':

GATE

STBLN

INVERTING
AM?

I

I

NETWO:

28VDC~/

PI-II .JIO-II
.J8-23

OPERATE
PHASE
LOCK
SW

NOTSYNC

t

K5

KIO

~
IL-Q_ _ _-'

SYNC

TP9

TPIO

'-r-------r---J

TPII

14>-::::-----.
l

AMP ANO
GAIN

r)o-28VDC

ADJ

:-----t

I

K8~REV
P/-7

SPEED FILTER
NETWORK

.JIO~-

.J10-8

T81-2
CAPSTAN
POWER
AMPUFIER

PI-6
.110-6

REEL DRIVE
SYSTEM

SPEED LINE INPUTS
120lps
15/16 ips

ITACH
.EeT

TE

.J/I

I

J

I

bl2
II

:ny
-lSi

CAPSTAN BO.

~
Figure 2. Speed Control Circuits Block Diagram

c======:============:=============~

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

\M1en the FWD pushbutton is depressed on the Operator's Control Panel and tape starts to move, the B
signal starts to increase in frequency. From the output of the frequency preparation circuits, the increasing
B signal is applied to the freq/phase detector circuit. In like manner, the A signal is applied also to the
freq/phase detector circuit.
Whe1n the B signal has reached a frequency approximately equal to the A reference signal, the frequency
detector enables the mode select gate to accept the de voltage from the PHASE COMPARISON circuits.
This function also provides a logic 1 level to the SQUELCH output during sync lock.
7. ACCELERATION AND AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS - The acceleration and amplifier circuits are used
to retard speed changes of the capstan motor during periods of starting and stopping. This allows time for
the reel drive motors to gain sufficient angular velocity and avoids spilling or breaking tape. The reel drive
acceleration circuits (FWD and REV) decrease and then slowly increase the dc output voltage of the acceleration network until the reel drive motors have reached proper operating speed. The output of the acceleration network is appl ied to an emitter follower, the capstan power amplifier, and then the capstan motor.
e. REEL DRIVE - This recorder/reproducer's reel drive system incorporates dual hubs on a coaxial
spindle. Each hub is a part of a complete reel drive servo system including a DC motor driven spindle, a
tape tension sensing arm with a photocell assembly and a DC servo amplifier located on the reel drive board.
Also located on the reel drive board are special features including a dynamic brake in event of a power
failure, an acceleration control for forward and reverse, (routed to the speed control system) and an
acceleration program power mode to stop mode. The entire reel drive servo provides a complete system
which maintains essentially constant tape tension across the heads under all conditions of operation. In
addition it provides features for prevention of breaking tape, tape spillage, and possible damage to the reel
drive motors.
In a slack tape or no tape condition the tape tension arms are held at their extreme rest positions by
their spring systems. For the upper tension arm (associated with the outer reel) the extreme rest position
is to the left toward the side of the main transport casting. For the lower tension arm (associated with the
inner reel) the extreme rest position is down toward the bottom of the main transport casting. \Nhen the
tension arms are at their extreme rest position they activate m icrosw itches which disable the recorder/reproducer from normal operation. This is to ensure that in the event of a broken tape, empty reels, or an
extreme slack tape condition the recorder/reproducer will not continue to run.
A vane, attached to each tape tension arm, moves between the lamp and the photocell on the photocell
assembly. The geometry of the photocell and lamp is such that when the vane is centered, half of the photocell is shaded and half is illuminated. This vane varies the amount of light obtained by the photocell thus
varying the output current' With the photocell completely shaded the current output would be zero and
with the photocell completely illuminated the output would be maximum. As the vane moves from its
centered position it indicates either slack tape or tight tape. Slack tape allows the tension arm and vane to
move toward its extreme rest position and tight tape forces it to move off center in the opposite direction.
The degree of slack tape or tight tape determines the displacement of vane movement off center.
The reel drive system is classified single ended since each reel drive hub can be driven in one direction
only. In the forward mode the outer reel is driven clockwise while the inner reel free wheels (actually there

·_=.=::=:=::=:::=====.=========.::1::1

c::::::=::::__

15

======

Cl

BU LLETI N NO. 3604-4

is a slight voltage applied to the inner reel to provide proper tension). In the reverse mode the inner reel is
Criven counterclockwise while the outer reel free wheels (with the slight drag).
The following discussion will pertain to the FORWARD mode of operation. With a tight tape condition
on the upper tension arm the vane would shade the photocell causing a decrease in current from it. With
this decrease in Current to the reel drive motor, its speed would tend to decrease thus correcting the tight
tape condition and strive to center the vane. The inner reel is forced to freewheel by a tight tape condition
on the lower tape tension arm which allows very little current to the inner reel drive motor. This tight tape
condition is caused by the capstan drive moving tape in opposition of the inner reels tendency to run
counterclockwise. This slightly tight tape condition is always present (in the forward mode) allowing the
inner reel to free wheel and turn only when pulled by tape. If slack tape should occur at this lower tension
arm, the vane would move allowing more light to the photocell producing more current. This increase in
current to the inner reel drive motor would cause it to have a greater tendency to turn counterclockwise
thus giving it a greater drag and take up the slack. With the slack taken up the vane would return to near
its midposition ·and the inner reel would again be free wheeling.
MAINTENANCE

a. GENERAL - This information consists of maintenance data (circuit description, test data and possibly
maintenance adjustments, parts list, and diagrams) for the circuit boards and subassemblies used in the tape
transport. Refer to the wiring diagrams and the transport overall schematic for information and location
of particular points called out in these maintenance procedures.

b. MODE CONTROL

1. LOGIC BOARD CIRCUITS
(a) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION - The following list describes the function of each relay on the logic

board.
RELAY

FUNCTION

K1

Establishes forward tape motion; provides interlock
for reverse, record and fast.

K2

Establishes reverse tape motion; provides interlock
for forward, record and fast.

K3

Establishes fast tape motion if either K 1 or K2 is
energized; provides interlock for record, pinch rolls
and reference signals.

K4

Applies ±12 Vdc to the record electronics during the
record mode.

K5

Determines if tape is moving or not moving; provides
interlock for tape direction relay, end-of-tape sense,
pinch rolls.

==

BULLETIN NO. 3604A

RELAY (CONT.)

FUNCTION (CONT.)

KG

Establishes which direction tape will move.

K9

Actuates stop mode when energized by sense circuitry.

K10

Selects proper sense detector for forward or reverse
tape sense.

(b) TEST DATA

Step 1.

With POWER removed, place the logic board on its extender board and ensure the following
voltage indications are present at the indicated pin during the proper mode. J7 is the corresponding jack for logic board plug, P 1, as J8 is for plug, P2. Connect a dc voltmeter between
system ground, TP2 (power and control connector panel) and each indicated plug pi!"' number.
Ensure POWER is applied, tape is threaded properly and STOP mode is first depressed.

PLUG PIN NO.

MODE

Pl-5
Pl-6
Pl-l0
P1-15
Pl-16
P2-8
P2-9
P2-14
P2-15
P2-l6
P2-l8
P2-22
Pl-8
Pl-9

STOP
- STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
-FORWARD
FORWARD

Pl-21
P2-7
P2-ll
P2-12
P2-17
Pl-14

FORWARD
FORWARD
FORWARD
FORWARD
FORWARD
REVERSE

Pl-17
P2-6
P2-20
Pl-' .
Pl-2

=.

....c__

REVERSE
REVERSE
REVERSE
FAST
FAST

FUNCTION
28 Vdc Return
Stop Initiate
Record Initiate Power
28 Vdc Return
Stop Lamp Power
Stop Initiate Power
Stop or FAST
+5 Vdc
+5 Vde
+5 Vde
12 Vdc Return
+28 Vde
Forward Power
Forward I nitiate pushbutton in and do not
release
Pinch Roll Activate
Forward EOT Sense
PR NO.1 Control
PR NO.2 Control
Operate @ 28 V de Level
Reverse Initiate pushbutton in and do not
release
Reverse Lamp and Hold
Reverse EOT Sense
Reverse Hold
FAST Holding
FAST Initiate Power

VOLTAGE
OVdc
+28 Vdc
+28 Vdc
OVdc
+28 Vdc
+28 Vdc
+28 Vdc
+5 Vdc
+5 Vdc
+5 Vdc
OVdc
+28 Vdc
+28 Vdc
+28 Vdc
+28
+28
+28
+28
+28

Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc

+28
+28
+28
+28
+28
+28

Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc

BULLETI N NO. 3604-4

£lUG PIN NO.
(CaNT.)

MODE
(CONT.)

Pl-3

FAST

P2-13
Pl-4
Pl-7

FAST
RECORD
RECORD

Pl-18
Pl-20
Pl-22
Pl-23

RECORD
RECORD
RECORD
RECORD

VOLTAGE
(CONT.)

FUNCTION
(COr'JT.)
FAST Light Power and FAST
Initiate
Fast @ 28 Vdc Level
Record Relay Holding Power
Record Holding and Record Ught
Power
-12 Vdc
+12 Vdc
-12 Vdc Record
+12 Vdc Record

+28 Vdc
+28 Vdc
+28 Vdc
+28 Vdc
-12 Vdc
+12 Vdc
-12 Vdc
+12 Vdc

Step 2.

To check the tape direction relay K2 (not on the logic board) depress FWD and ensure
approximately +28 Vdc at terminal board TB4-2. Depress REVERSE and ensure approximately +28 Vdc at TB4-1.

Step 3.

The capstan motor may be checked as follows:
(1) Remove POWER, unplug K2, and ensure a 3 ohm or approximate reading between pins
1 and 8 of K2 relay socket. Replace K2 vvhen finished.
(2) Disconnect the lead to TB4-2 and connect a dc ammeter between this lead and TB4-2
Apply POWER, depress STOP and FWD, and ensure an approximate reading of 2.5 to 3
amps. If this current is excessive, check the pinch roller pressure as detailed in the checks
and adjustments under maintenance in the Operator's Data bulletin. Replace the proper
lead when finished.
(3) Complete (2) above using TB4-1 and REV mode. Replace the proper lead when finished.
(4) The use of a stethoscope or similar instrument may aid in detecting bad capstan motor
bearings as the capstan is turning (FWD or REV, slow speed).

Step 4.

End-of-Tape Sense Checkout
NOTE

Ensure the metallic marker are properly placed
on each end of the tape and the tape is threaded
properly.
(1) Ensure the EOT switch is set to the IN position, and POWER is applied.

(2) Depress STOP, FORWARD, and FAST, in that sequence.
(3) The recorder/reproducer should automatically revert to STOP mode prior to the inner
reel becoming completely empty of tape. There should be approximately 60 to 100 feet,
(approximately 1/8 inch tape wrap) of tape left on the inner reel.

cc==================~~

18

:

:::J

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

(4)' Depress REVERSE and FAST.
(5) The Recorder/Reproducer should automatically revert to STOP mode prior to the outer
reel becoming completely empty of tape. There should be approximately 60 to 100 feet
(approximately 1/8 inch tape wrap) of tape left on the outer reel.
(6) If satisfactory results are not obtained in the previous (1) through (5) refer to the following test and adjustments.
(a) Gain access to the logic board, right rear of recorder/reproducer, by removing the top
and rear access panels. Place the logic board on its extender.
(b) Ensure tape is threaded properly, apply POWER, and depress STOP and FORWARD.
Ensure the EOT switch is set to the I N position.
(c) Connect various resistors, ranging in value from 22 K ohm to 27 K ohm, between logic
board pin J8-7 and system ground. Ensure STOP mode is activated with the application
of one of these values. Ensure with a YOM, the presence of 12 to 14 Vdc atJ8-7 when
the recorder/reproducer reverts to STOP mode. This ensures the logic board sensitivity
adjustment is approximately set to a satisfactory level for either forward or reverse.
Slight adjustment of sensitivity adjust, R 12 may be required to bring the sense circuitry
firing level within the above resistance ranges, providing the 12 to 14 Vdc.
NOTE
When the optional Photo-End-Of- Tape Sense
feature is supplied, refer to the appropriate
bulletin in the optional items sections.
(c) PARTS LIST

Logic Board 835785
510142-001
898406
See Note
896458

K8
K9
K10
P1
P2
01
02
Rl
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7

See Note
896458
896458
See Note
See Note
896458
896458
846164

19 C

See Note
853515-003
855130-004
853518
853518
853037
852738
198200-102
198200-102
198200-123
198200-822
198200-222
198200-102
198200-470

I$~II~)

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4
l.ogic Board 835785 (Co·nt.)
CR33

896458

CR34

896458

CR35

See Note
See Note
853515-003

198200-103

R8
R9
R10
R 11
R12

See Note
329151-007

thru

XK1

853516

K5
K6

thru
843788

K7

See Note

CR36

K1

198200-331
198200-223

XK5
XK9

853516

NOTE

These components comprise the shuttle kit (835792)
C2
CR25

691391-016

CR28
CR29

896458

896458

CR36
R11

691111-823

896458

K7

855130-004

896458
K8
855130-004
CR35
896458
(d) DIAGRAMS- For schematic diagram of the logic board refer to the transport overall schematic.
2. SHUTTLE CIRCUITS (optional) - Refer to bulletin 3629 in the optional items section.
C. SPEED CONTROL
1. CAPSTAN BOARD
(a) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
INPUTS
Power
+12 Vdc
-12 Vdc
12 Vdc Common
28 Vdc Common
+5 Vdc
Speed Lines
Ips
120
Ips
60
ips
30
ips
15
ips
7 1/2
ips
33/4
Ips
1 7/8
Ips
15/16
Servo Signals
Tachometer
Tape Reference - HI
Lo
Acceleration Control
Motion Bias
Motion Bias
Reel Drive Forward
Reel Drive Reverse
Capstan Motor Feed

back
Status and Control
Operate-28 Vdc Level
Fast-5 Vdc level
Reverse-28 Vee Level
Pinch Roll Activate
28 Vdc Level

OUTPUTS

"'Pi··U
"-13
Pl-20.P2-10, 11, 12
·Pl-4,5
1'2-13,14
P2.-4
P2-5
P1-22

1'1-23
P2-1
P1-21
P2:-3
P2-2
P2-7
P2:-22
Pl'!-23
Pl-t
Pl-11
P1-6
Pl-S

PI-9
P1-3
P2-ti
Pt-2

Power
Lamp Supply (Tachometer) +5 Vdc
Lamp Supply (Reel Drive)
Status and Control
Phase Lock or Squelch
Sync Lanl!> (Contact Closure to Ground)
Tape Sync
Capstan Motion
Signal
Servo Error and Servo Control
Reference (Record)
Tachometer
Tape Sync Board Provisions
Power
+t2Vdc
-12 Vdc
+5 Vdc
Supply Common
Status and Control
Tape Inhibit
Hi-Density
Low Speed Group
Tape Sync
Signal
Tachometer In
Tape Signal In Hi
Lo
Tach/Tape Output

Pl-15
P1-14
P2-20
Pl·12
Pl-16, P2·19
P2-8

pl-e
P2-16
P2-9

J7
J8
J6
J5
J13

J12
J14

J9
J-l0
A
B

J1t

F1.·10

::

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4
(1) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS· Q23, CR21. and associated circuitry provide +10 Vdc at
P1·14 (reel drive photo-cell lamp voltage) and +5 Vdc at Pl-15 (tachometer lamp voltage). Both voltages
are produced from the +12 Vdc input to the capstan board.
(2) REFERENCE OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS· This portion of the capstan board consists of
crystal oscillator A 1, frequency countdown circuit A2, and divide-by-twelve circuit A4.
One output of the crystal oscillator, operating at 3.2 MHz, is applied to the frequency countdown
circuit (normal tape speeds) at A2-9. The output of this circuit, at A2-5, is a submultiple of 3.2 MHz, dependent (proportional) on tape speed. The speed line input pins to A2 are 4 (1 7/8 ips), 1 (3 3/4 ips),
14 (7 1/2 ips), 15 (15 ips.) 2 (30 ips), 13 (120 ips), and 3 (60 ips). When a tape speed is selected, +5 Vdc is
applied to the proper input of A2; all other speed line inputs to A2 will be grounded. The particular output
of A2 is applied to the Frequency Preparation circuits for further processing.
The other output of the crystal oscillator is applied to fast divide-by-twelve gate A4, at pin 14. This
circuit provides a divided-by-twelve output at A4-8, when activated by a logic 0 level at A4-6 and 7. This
logic 0 level is present from AS-11 due to the logic 1 level applied to P2-6 during Fast mode: The divided
output is applied to the frequency preparation circuits
further processing, allowing the recorder/reproducer to rapidly move tape.
(3) FREQUENCY PREPARATION CIRCUITS - These circuits consist of divide-by and gating
circuits A3, A5, A6, A7, AS, A9, A 10, and A 11.
The divided frequency (during normal tape speed) from A2 is applied to divide-by circuit A3, at pin
14. This circuit is enabled by a logic 0 level at A3-2 and 3, present from P2-6 during any normal operating
mode. A3, during tape speeds 120 - 1 7/S ips, provides a divide-by-eight output at A3-S and a divide-bysixteen output at A3-11. During a tape speed of 15/16 ips, a divide-by-sixteen output is provided at A3-S
and a divide-·by-thirty-two output at A3-11.
The various divided outputs of A3 are provided by divide-by-two A5 and gate A6. A5, activated by
the 15/16 ips speed Iine, controls the degree of A3 division by dividing-by two the frequency at A3-12
prior to A3-1. Gate A6, du ring 120 - 1 7/8 ips tape speeds, lowers the degree of A3 division by providing
no division from A3-12 to A3-1.
Both A3 outputs, A3-8 and A3-11, are appl ied to density select gate A 7, yvithonly one output, A3-11,
being applied to divide-by-two A9 and gate A 10.
A7, functioning as a density select gate, provides either a Hldensity frequency (400 kHz at 120 ips),
submultiples at lower speeds or a LO density frequency (200 kHz at 120 ips), submultiples of lower speeds,
for recording on tape (optional tape sync method of speed control). With a logic 1 level, from the HI
position of the density switch, applied to P2-15, NAND gate A7~12, 13,11 is enabled. NAND gate A7-3
produces a logic 0 level from the logic 1 levels Dt pins A7-2 and 3 (from P2-15). This logic 0 level, when
applied to A7-4, inhibites that NAND gate, thus preventing the signal at A3-11 from passing. The signal at
A3-S passes through NAND gates A7-13, 11, 10,8, to the reference output at P2-16. With a logic 0 level
applied to P2-15 from the LO position of the density switch, NAND gate, A7-4, 5, 6 is enabled and NAND
gate, A7-12, 13, 11, is inhibited. Thus the signal at A3-8 passes through NAND gates A7-5, 6, 9, 8 to the
reference output at P2-16.
I

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

The single output at A3-11 is applied to a divide-by-two circuit at A9-3 and a gate at A 10-2.
At 120 ips, the div ide-by-two is activated by a logic 1 level from A8-G. Th is is due to a logic 1 level
from P2-4 NANDED with a logic 0 level at P2-6 to produce a logic 0 level at /\S-3. This logic 0 level produces a logic 1 lf1vel at AS-4, 5,6, activating A9-3, and inhibiting N.A.ND gate A 10-1,2, 3. With this NAND
gate inhibited the frequency at A 10-2 passes no further (while at 120 ips). The divided output of A9, at
pin 6, passes through enabled A 10-4, 5, 6, to operate/fast select gate A 11.
At speeds other than 120 ips the divide-by-two circuit A9-3 is not activated and the signal from A3-11
passes through enabled NAN D gates A 10-2, 3, 4, 6, to A 11. A 10-1, 2, 3, is enabled by a logic 1 level from
A8-3, produced by NANDING a logic 1 level from AS-11 with a logic 0 level from P2-4. A 10-4,5,6, is
enabled by the logic 1 level produced by A9-G during its inactive state.
At A 11, the signal applied to pin 2 is passed through enabled NAN J gates A 11-1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, to
TP5 and the Frequency Comparison Circuits/Phase comparison circuits. A 11-1,2,3 is enabled by a logic 1
level to Al1-1.This level is present via energized operate relay Kl0. A logic 1 level, enabling All-8, 9,10,
is produced by a logic 1 level to A11-13 (via Kl0) and a logic 0 level to A11-12 (from inactive A4).
(4) TACHOMETER SIGNAL CIRCUITS - These circuits consist of partial gates A8 and A 10
and one-half of a divide-by-two circuit A9.

The tachometer signal from the capstan motor is applied to the board at pin P2-7 and is inverted by
,(\8-9, 10, 11. The signal is then appl ied to a tape sync board connecotr, J 10, and to a tape motor detector
lif'tNitch.
The signal applied to J 10 may control the tape/tach select gate (selects either the tach signal or the
tape signal, refer to tape signal circuits) on the tape sync board (optional feature), when supplied. When
the tape sync board is not supplied, the signa! at J lOis jumpered to J 11 and applied to divide-by-circuit
A9, at pin 11. This circuit functions as a divide-by-twocircuit only at 120 ips. The divided output is gated
through A 10-9 and 8 to the phase comparison/frequency comparison circu its (A 12, A 13, A 14, etc) . At all
speeds other than 120 ips, the divide-by-two circuit is disabled and the tachometer signal is gated through
A 10-13 and 11 (no frequency division) to the phase comparison/frequency comparison circuits.
The tape motion detector switch consists of 021,022, and associated circuitry. This switch circuit
simply detects when the tachometer circuit is between 1000 and 1500 Hz. At this point 022 conducts
allowing a path to ground for the low side of tape motion relay K5. With K5 energized, the recorder/reproducer's mode control circuitry is assured that tape is moving.
(5) TAPE SIGNAL CI RCUITS (optional) - Refer to the tape sync board circuits in later portions
of th is speed control section.
(6) PHASE COMPARISON CIRCUITS (referto the waveforms in the test data section) - These
circuits consist of function generator gates A 13 and A 14, constant cu rrent generators 03 through 010,
clamp c ircu its Q 11 and 012, and operational intergrators A 17 and A lS.

::::

:

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

The following discussion refers to the oscillator reference signal as the A" signal and the tape or
tachometer reference signal as the "B" signal.
II

The two signals, A and B, are applied to the function generator; with four resultant outputs. The A
signal is appl ied to A 13-·'0, 12, 13 and A 14-4, with the B signal applied to A 13-9, 1, 2 and A 14-1. The A
and B'signals are NANDED to produce AS at A13-8. Each A and B signal is NAND ED separately to pro---;::".:£:r.duce A at A 13-11 and B at A 13-3. The A and Bare NANDED to produce AB at A 13-6. AS is produced at
A14-3 by NANDING A an~, and AS is produced at A14-6 by NANDIf~ A and S. AS is produced at
A 14-8 by inverting AS and AS is produced at A 14-11 by inverting AB. AS and AS, in conjunction with
constant current drivers, provide the charging currents required by operational intergrators A 17 and A 18.
AS and-AB, in conjunction with contant current drivers 07 through 010, provide the discharging currents
required by operational intergrators A 17 and A 18. Each signal, when applied to either A 17-2 or A 18-2, is
intergrated using the selected speed dependent capacitor, C3 through C14, resulting in a trapezoidal wave
output at A 17-6 or A 18-6. The selected capacitor determines the charg~ime and thus the rise angle and
the dc voltage level reached before the charging time is shut-off by the AS input signal (A 17) circuit. The
~[(A 17 circuit) signa! discharges the capacitor proportional to the charge rate. AS with clamp 011 and
ArX with 012 is used to clamp the outputs to a 0 level until the beginning of the next trapezoidal wave.
This 0 level is also adjustable by R40 (A 18) and R43 (A7).
The Two trapezoidal waveforms, 1800 out of phase, are summed through potentiometer R45 and inverted and amplified by A20 to develop a dc level proportional to the phase relationship of the A and B
signals. Gain adjustments R52 and R50 vary the gain of A20. R52 is used alone in the tape sync mode,
with R50 and R52 used together in the capstan sync mode.
The dc voltage level is applied to the mode gate circuitry through resistors R70 and R62. When a
phase lock condition is attained as described in the later frequency comparison circuit paragraph, transistor
Q14 is "turned off" and the de voltage is amplified at A21. The output is applied to a stablization filter
network, energized relay K 10 and an emitter follower circu it to the capstan power amp Iifier.
(7) FREqUENCY COMPARISON CIRCUITS - These circuits consist of frequency/phase lock
detector A 12, optional amplifier A 19, select gating circu its Q 13 through Q 16, phase lock switch Q 19 and

A 15, and gate A 16.
The A and B signals from TP5 and TP6 are applied to A 12-1 and 3, respectively. When FWD is depressed on the Operators Control Panel and tape starts to move, the B signal begins to increase in frequency.
With the B frequency lower than A (frequency coming up to speed), the output at A 12-13 goes to a logic
o level. This signal, when applied through A 19, provides negative puises at TP12. These pulse, when applied
through A21, etc., to the capstan, increase tape speed. When the B signal frequency increases past the A
signal frequency (over speed), the output at A 12-2 goes to a logic 0 level. This signal, when inverted by A 19,
provides positive pulses at TP12. These pulses, when applied through A21, etc., to the capstan, decrease
tape speed.
These de levels produce capstan motion until a phase lock condition
mode gate circu it selects the de level from the phase comparison circu its.

i~

obtained. At this point the

BU LLETIN NO. 3604-4

The mode gate circu it is controlled by Q 19, A 15, and A 16, Q 19 and A 15 accept the AB and A"B 5igiflals from the function generator (TP7 and 8). A logic 1 level is produced at A 15-7 when the A and B signal match, producing phase lock. R94 is provided for adjustment of the phase lock point. This level is
NANDED, at A16-2 and 1, with the logic lleve! from A8-11 (present during all modes except FAST), producing a logic O~evel to 018 preventing conduction. This action produces +5 Vdc to P2-20 {squelch) inhibiting the servo squelch function to the F M reproduce bds (outputs will not be squelched during phase
lock). Squelch switch S1, when depressed, places a continuous logic 0 level to the base of 0.18. This allows
an FM reproduce board output during STOP or other non-phase lock modes.
The logic 0 level at A 16-3 is also NANDED by A 16-4,5,6, to produce a logic 1 level at A 16-6. This
logic 1 level, present during phase lock, is applied to 015 causing conduction of 0. 15, 0. 16, and 0. 13, along
with inhibiting 0. 14. With 0. 13 conducting, the output of the inverting amplifier at A 19-6 is shorted to
ground. With 0.14 "off" the output of the phase comparison circuits, at A20-6, is allowed to control cap·
stan motion via the amplification and acceleration circuits.
The logic 1 level output at A 16-6 is also applied to the base of 0.20, causing conduction. This action
energizes Kg causing the capstan sync lamp to lite.
(8) AMPLIFICATION AND ACCELERATION CIRCUfTS - The input to A21 at pin 2, whether

from A 19 or A20, is inverted and appl ied through the stablizatiofi network, consisting of C18, C19, R65,
R66, R67, and R68, to relay K 1O. When K10 is energized, this de tevel is applied through emitter follower
0.17 and P1-8 to the capstan power amplifier and capstan motor.
The acceleration control circuits consist of C26, C27, and related components. In a STOP mode,
capacitors C26 and C27 are charged with +28 volts via the capstan motor feedback from the capstan power
amp I ifier. Upon depressing the FWD or REV pushbuttons, the +28 volts instantaneously drops and is .
coupled to the base of transistor, 0.17, to reduce the output at the emitter. As capacitor C26 discharges,
transistor, 017 is allowed to conduct as the frequency and phase comparison circuits require.
The reel drive circuits perform a similar action through capacitor C27 when tape motion begins as
does the capstan. Th is action is necessary to retard speed changes of the capstan motor to allow time for
the reel drive motors to gain sufficient angular velocity so that tape spilling does not occur.
(b) TEST DATA

Step 1.

Place the capstan board on its extender, apply power, and depress STOP. Enusre with an
oscilloscope, or voltmeter, the presence of the following approximate indications between
the indicated point and TP4 (10), during the proper mode. Refer to the capstan board component location diagram for location of pins and testpoints.
NOTE
A logic 1 level is considered +3.7Vdc ±1.3 Vdc and a logic
o level is considered +0.3 Vdc ±O.3 Vdc.

=

BULLETIN NO. 36044
(1) POVVER AND CONTROL
INDICATION POINT

INDICATION

MODE

TP1

STOP

+12 Vdc approx.

TP2

STOP

+5 Vdc approx.

TP30

STOP

-12 Vdc approx.

Pl-15

STOP

+5 Vdc approx.

Pl-14

STOP

+10 Vdc approx.

Pl-3

+28 Vdc approx.

FWD or REV

Pl-2

+28 Vdc approx.

REV

P2-15

STOP (density set to HI)

+5 Vdc approx.

P2-15

STOP (density set to LO)

o Vdc approx.

P2-4

STOP - tape speed 120 ips.

+5 Vdc approx.*

P2-5

STOP - tape speed 60 ips.

Pl-22

STOP- tape speed 30 ips.

+5 Vdc approx. *
*
+5 Vdc approx. *

Pl-23

STOP - tape speed 15 ips.

+5 Vdc approx.*

P2-l

STOP - tape speed 7 1/2 ips.

+5 Vdc approx. *

Pl-21

STOP - tape speed 3 3/4 ips.

+5 Vde approx. *

P2-3

STOP - tape speed 1 7/8 ips.

+5 Vdc approx. *

P2-2

STOP - tape speed 15/16 ips.

+5 Vde approx. *

**

* With each individual speed line activated, all other speed lines should be grounded.
**Optional Speed.
(2) REFERENCE OSCILLATOR AND FREQUENCY PREPARATION CIRCUITS

INDICATION POINT

MODE

INDICATION

P2-6

FWD orREV

TP5

FWD (switching through speeds)

Logic 0 level

SPEED (ips)

FREQ.(kHz)

120

100

60

100

30

50

15

25

71/2

12.5

3 3/4

6.25

1 7/8

3.125

15/16

1.562

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4
INDICATION POINT (CONT.)

INDICATION

MODE

FWD (switching through speeds,
either density)
SPEED (ips)

P2-16

FREQ. (kHz)

HI

LO

120

400

200

60

200

100

30

100

50

15

50

25

7 1/2

25

12.5

33/4

12.5

1 718

15/16

6.250

6.25

3.125

3.125

1.562

P2-6

FAST

logic 1 level

TP5

FAST

267 kHz

(3) TACHOMETER REFERENCE CIRCUITS
INDICATION POINT

INDICATION

MODE

P2-7

STOP (turning capstan by hand)

a squarewave (output
of tach on capstan
motor)

P2-7

FWD (any speed)

a well defined squarewave (adjustable by
potentiometer on capstan)

P2-8

FWD or REV

a Vdc approx.

P2-9

FWD (switching through speeds)

same as P2-16 in previous paragraph (2),
except 120 ips is 200
kHz

TP6

FWD (switching through speeds)

same as TP5 in previous paragraph (2),

P2-8

FWD

OVdc

(4) FREQUENCY/PHASE COMPARISON CIRCUITS
NOTE

Adjustment per the checkout and adjustments in the maintenance
section of the Operator's Data bulletin should a/ways be attempted
prior to trying to obtain these indications.

: ::

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

Depress FWD and move tape at 33/4 ips. Ensure, with an oscilloscope, the foliowing waveforms, or
approximates, between the indicated point (hi) and TP4 (Io). All waveforms are at a frequency of approximately 6.25 kHz.

INDICATION POINT

INDICATION

TP5 A

TP6 S

I I

A13-11

y;:

A13-3 B
I

A14-6 AS
A14-3 AS

lJ

I I
I I

U

I I

A14-8

-1J

LI

U

*

u-U

I I
.A.s -Jl--++-

A14-11 AS

H
I I

-A13-6 AS
A13-8 AS
0.4 Vdc

TP9

o Vdc

TP10

o Vdc

0.4 Vdc

I I
--til ~ 20 J1 sec.
r I

* These indicated waveforms are at logic 1 levels (+3.7 Vdc ±1.3 Vdc) and Logic 0
Levels (+0.3 Vdc ±0.3 Vdc).

c

:=

-

27 r==:

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

CAPSTAN BOARD 836248
Al
A2
A3.
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
Al0
A 11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17

510118-002
859520-053
859520-029
859520-028
859520-020
859520-001
510376-036
859520-001
859520-020
859520-001
859520-001
510387
859520-001
859520-001
510339-002
859520-001
510240-002

thru
A21
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
Cl0
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23

1iJ ~((Wil!1>
'\(\\\~\'
'\1\ \ \\
I

I!;:/

859959-002
329157-001
691391-008
691391-009
691391-033
859775-021
859959-002
859959-002
859959-002

859775-017
859775-017
854555-026
854555-026
854555-014
854555-014
854555-010
854555-010
276212-450
276212-450
276212-200
276212-200
198816-621
198816-621
198816-561
198816-561
854555-116
691391-011
854555-116
691686-027
854555-127
854555-127
859775-021

J5
J14
K1
K6
K7
K8
Kl0

C41

859959-002

C42

859959-002

CRl

844510

thru

510388-001
855130-004

thru
MP
Pl

859959-002

510388-002

thru

C39
C40

836268

thru

thru

P2
01

854220 (22 used)
853518
853518
854540

thru
06
07

854539

thru

CR4
CR5

~m)E ~&«~~
c==:
Ii
Ch.
1 8-73
~~

3

22K
CR2
lN753A

NSION ASSY
.114-23
2BV

MOUNTED ON HEATS1NK--

C4

R6

HETUR,N
f'ROMW2

r - - - -

I

RIO

~

CR5
!N4Y37

RI2

+

C2
1.0
15V
R3
21K

,

CW
R7
3.3K

+

I

+--_____-t__

-'P::;/-,,/B~

GAIN

cw
C5
2.2
35~

R9
4.1K

.,.

RIO

2.0

2.0

21W

21W

TO

1 ~g~~~~~ATION
FOnWAAO

./14-21

R_;"~

I2.RIVE BOARD AI4

Figure 7. Reel Drive System Overall Schematic
and Board Component Location

c=================_==:======::=_=_=======::~~ 45

BULLETI N NO. 3604-4

PARTS REMOVABLE/REPLACEMENT DATA· This section contains information to aid in the removal/
replacement of certain mechanical and electromechanical parts pertinent to the tape transport. F'1eference
may be made to the rear of this bulletin for mechanical parts listing.
a.•CABINET REMOVAL

Step 1.

Remove the side panels on the upper left and right sides of the cabinet. The panel on the
right side simply pulls loose and is lifted out. The panel on the left is released by a fastener
and is I ifted out.

Step 2.

Open the side doors by unscrewing the panel fasteners and pulling open.

Step 3.

Remove the fuse located on the Power and Control Connector Panel,

Step 4.

With a Phillips screwdriver, remove the seven screws on the left and right edges of the front
of the transport and the four screws at the rear of the transport (one at each rear corner).

Step 5.

Slide the cabinet back gently and remove while firmly holding the transport.
NOTE

Much of the maintenance, cleaning, board removal, etc., may be accomplished
by removing only the rear and top access panels of the cabinet. For certain assemblies and overall maintenance, the removal of the entire cabinet may be
necessary.
b. BOARD AND REPLACEMENT - To remove any mode control, speed control, reel drive, or other
transport associated board or subassembly, ALWAYS ENSURE POWER IS OFF. Rocking of the board
against its jack, may be necessary to start movement of the board from its jack. To replace the board, align
the guide pins of the board with the associated guides on the board jack. Reference may be made to the
General Information Bulletin photo's concerning board locations.
c. CAPSTAN MOTOR ASSEMBLY
1. CAPSTAN MOTOR REPLACEMENT

Step 1.

Remove the cabinet (or remove the top and rear access panels) capstan board front door,
and both reels, including tape.

Step 2.

Discon_nect the lead harness to the capstan motor. Note the orientation and terminal connection of each wire.

Step 3.

Lay the entire transport face down.

Step 4.

Remove the three mounting screws holding the motor assembly to the tape transport. Note
the location of each shim between the motor mounting plate and the tape transport. Do
not disturb these shims.

,

'"

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

Step 5.

Remove the four mounting screws holding the mounting plate to the face of the motor. Remove the mounting plate from the motor and install the mounting plate on the face of the
new capstan motor using the same four screws.

Step 6.

Insert the capstan motor into position and use the three mounting screws, removed in Step
4/ to tighten in place. Ensure the sh ims are in the same position. Tape will not track if the
shims are not properly located.

Step 7.

Connect the lead harness to the terminals noted in Step 2. Refer to figure 8 various motor
wiring.

Step 8.

Reinstall the capstan board.

Step 9.

Thread a tape on the recorder/reproducer and place it in an OPERATE mode to determine
if the tape will track. If tape does not, recheck the tocation of the shims.

Step 10.

Reinstall the cabinet (or access panels) and front door.

"....,

COR

~

TERMINAL

TO
BALDWIN b857362}
WIRE COL R

TB2-3

BLACK

BLACK

BLACK

TB2-4

RED

WHITE

WHITE

TB2-5

GRAY

GRAY

GRAY

TB2-6

YELLOW

WHITE

RED

TB2-7

PURPLE

BLACK

BLACK

TBl-5

'ORANGE

RED

RED

DRC (835800)
SEQUENTIAL (857363)
WIRE COLOR
WIRE COLOR

- - -LAMP

---

,.....

TACH

':r'
CAPSTAN
MOTOR
ASSEMBLY
A2l

-

TBl-6

BLUE

GREEN

GREEN

TBl-7

WHITE

BLACK

BLACK

TBl-8
TBl-4

BROWN
GRAY

WHITE
GRAY

WHITE
GRAY

Figure 8. Capstan Motor Wiring Variations

48 cr'============================~)'

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4
2. CAPSTAN MOTOR BRUSH REPLACEMENT

Step 1.

Gain access to the Capstan motor and remove the four brush retaining screws. Refer to
figure 9.

Step 2.

With a small screwdriver work the end of each brush and tension spring loose, and remove.

Step 3.

Insert each new brush and tension spring, ensuring they are positioned with the concave surface aligned with the armature.

Step 4.

Align the tension spring and metal tip completely inside the brush holder and replace the
brush retaining screws.

TACHOMETER LAMP
MOUNTING SCREW

Figure 9. Capstan Motor, Disassembled
3. CAPSTAN MOTOR TACHOMETER LAMP REPLACEMENT

Step 1.

Gain access to the Capstan motor and remove the two screws securing the metal cover to the
motor end opposite the capstan. 51 ide the cover off, gaining access to the inner components.
'CAUTION

Exercise extreme caution when sliding the tachometer leads
through the grommet in the metal cover.

Step 2

Remove the tachometer lamp mounting screw, with an Allen wrench, and remove the lamp
assembly, including leads, from the mounting position.

49

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

Step 3.

Insert the new lamp assembly into the mounting position and replace the mounting screw.
Do not tighten.

Step 4.

Mon itor, with an oscilloscope, the output of the capstan motor tachometer at TB 1-6.

Step 5.

Apply POWER and, with tape properly threaded, depress STOP and FORWARD. Prior to
completely tightening the tachometer Lamp mounting, position the mounting to provide
maximum tachometer output amplitude, as measured with the oscilloscope.

Step 6.

Remove POWER and replace the metal cover, ensuring all leads and grommets are positioned
properly.

d. PINCH ROLLER ASSEMBLY
1. PINCH ROLLER AND BEARING REPLACEMENT (refer to figure 10)

Step 1.

Remove the head cover and the screw securing the pinch roller.

Step 2

Slide the pinch roller assembly from the pinch roller shaft. Remove the spacer and retaining
ring from inside of the roller assembly and remove the bearing. Discard the pinch roller ball
bearing, if worn.

Step 3.

Insert the bearing into the end of the pinch roller that has the recessed notch for the retaining ring. Insert the retaining ring so the retaining ring clips DO NOT touch the bearing
shield. The stamped numbers on the retaining ring are to face the bearing shield.

Step 4.

Slide the pinch roller onto the shaft and insert the spacer - small diameter - towards the
bearing. Replace the securing screw.
GUIDE

_~~_ ::tJ_~l~R
WASHER SECURING
SCREW

SHAFT
ASSEMBLY

RETAINING
RING

ROLLER
ASSEMBLY

BEARING

Figure 10. Shaft and Pinch Roller Assembly

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

2. PINCH ROLLER SOLENOID Rt;PLACEMENT (refer to figure 11)
Step 1.

Remove the cabinet or the top and rear access panels.

Step 2.

Remove the capstan board, terminal boardTB2, and tag and disconnect all leads from TB2.

Step 3.

Disconnect the lever assemblies from their pivot arms by loosening the locking nut next to
the elongated nut, and turning the adjustment tape (the entire threaded rod turns) counterclockwise.

Step 4.

Remove the four screws (two on each side of the solenoids) holding the solenoid mounting
bracket to the transport, and move the entire assembly free.

Step 5.

With the assembly free, remove the retaining ring holding the pivot arm to the bracket. With
this removed the arm assembly should slide away from the solenoid.

Step 6.

Remove the four screws holding the solenoid and slide it free of the entire bracket.

Step 7.

Place the new solenoid in position and replace the four mounting screws;

Step 8.

Place the lever assembly back into bracket and replace .~he retaining ring.

Step 9.

Replace the entire solenoid mounting bracket and secure it to the transport with the four
mounting screws removed in Step 5.

Step 10.

Remove tags, reconnect the solenoid leads, and replace terminal board TB2 and the capstan .
. NOTE,
The pinch roller pressure adjustment procedures in the checks
and adjustments section of the Operators Data bulJetin must
be following after replacing either or both'solenoids.
l

l

RIGHT PINCH ROLLER
FINAL ADJUSTMENT

LEFT PINCH.
ROLLER SOLENOID
TERMINAL _ _ __
BOARD TB2
PIVOT ARMS
RIGHT PINCH
ROLLER SOLENOID
LEFT PINCH ROLLER
FINAL ADJUSTMENT

Figure 11. Pinch Roller Solenoid ,Mounting Details

C=::==:=:=================:J1 51

=============::::::JI

C=:=!

~Iii~~

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

e. REEL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
1. TENSION ARM SPRING REPLACEMENT (refer to figure 12)

Step 1.

F;emove the cover from the tension arm assembly.

Step 2

Remove the spring securing screw, with a small Phillips screwdriver, while holding the
multi-leaf spring with needle nose pliers.

l

NOTE

Use extreme care when screw is completely removed. Spring will relax causing screw to possible fly free of assembly.
Step 3.

Remove old spring and place new spring in relaxed position. With screw replaced and
partially tightened, stretch spring into correct position. Completely tighten screw.

Step 4.

'Replace the tension arm assembly cover.

2. PHOTOCELL ASSEMBL Y REPLACEMENT (refer to figure 12)

Step 1.

Remove cover from tension arm assembly.

Step 2.

Note, tag and unsolder the four leads connected to the photocell assembly.

Step 3.

Remove the one adjustment screw and lift the photocell assembly out.

Step 4.

Install the new photocell assembly with the adjustment screw removed in Step 3.

Step 5.

Align the photocell assembly by lining the two screws on the assembly with the center of
tension arm hub.

Step 6.

Replace tension arm assembly cover.
,
3. MICROSWITCH REPLACEMENT (refer to figure 12)

Step 1.

Remove the tape tension arm cover and remove the two screws that hold the microswitch
in position.

Step 2.

Unsolder the wires from the microswitch.

Step 3.

Solder the wires onto the new microswitch and remount in position.

Step 4.

Tighten the two screws and ensure that the microswitch is activated when the tension arm
is at its extreme rest position.

-.

::

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

PHOTOCELL
AND LAMP
ASSEMBLY

'~-""'y'-'-,;'7_

:'i;t-;;'--'-""";"';;'--':7-

TENSION ARM WITH
TAPE GUIDE ROLLER

M IC ROSWITCH

Figure 12. Tension Arm and Photocell Assembly
f. INERTIA DAMPENING ROLLER AND BEARING REPLACEMENT (refer to figure 13)

Step 1.

Remove the head cover.

Step 2.

Remove the two screws at the base of the roller and remove the roller. Do not lose the two
wavy washers behind the roller shaft.

Step 3.

If the C!omplete roller assembly is being replaced, reinstall the two wavy washers behind the
shaft assembly and reinstall the roller using the screws removed.

Step 4.

To replace the bearings, remove the retaining ring and washer and any spacers supplied.

Step 5.

Slide the roller off the shaft. Remove the worn bearings and replace with a new set as was
removed.

Step 6.

Reinstall the washer, spacers and retaining ring removed in Step 4.

Step 7.

Reinstall the inertia roller using the two wavy washers removed in

S~ep

2.

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

BE.A.RING

BEARING

ROLLER
ASSEMBLY
•

ROLLER
BASE

Figure 13. Inertia Roller

g. RECORD AND REPRODUCE HEA.D ASSEMBLIES R EPL;().CEMENT (refer to figure 14)
1. RECORD HEAD REPLACEMENT AND ALIGNMENT

Step 1.

Remove the head cover. Remove the head shield located between the reproduce and record
heads.

Step 2.

Remove the two head mounting screws, located between the upper and lower head stacks.
CAUTION

Do not touch the jack screws at the base of the head on the head
mounting pad.

Step 3.

Unplug the head lead harness from connector and remove head from recorder/reproducer.

Step 4.

Mount the new record head using the screws removed in Step 2. Be sure to place the record
head tight against t~e head alignment guide block.

Step 5.

Plug the head lead harness into the connector.
CAUTION

Handle the head lead harness with care to prevent damage to the
leads at the head.

54

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4
NOTE
The following steps are provided for head alignment when required.

REPRODUCE
HEADS

INERTIA
ROLLER
AZIMUTH
ADJUSTMENTS

PREAMP
BOARD(S)

RECORD
HEADS

EMITTER
FOLLOWER
BOARDS

HEAD
MOUNTING
SCREWS
REPRODUCE
HEADS

PINCH
ROLLER
ASSYS

Figure 14. Tape Head Mounting Details

Step 6.

Select the two outside tracks (opposite ends) on the same head stack.

Step 7.

Connect a signal generator, set at 1.0 vrms, to the inputs of both tracks at the input connector on the Record Connector Panel. Use properly cal ibrated direct record boards, refer to
the Direct Record Bulletin. Install jumper boards in the reproduce chassis for the correct
channels.

Step 8.

Connect a dual trace oscilloscope to the output BN.C connectors on the Reproduce Connector Panel for the proper channels.

Step 9.

Thread tape on the recorder/reproducer and place the Tape Speed Selector to the 60 ips
position.

Step 10.

Depress the POWER, STOP, RECORD and FORWARD pushbuttons.

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

Step 11. Sweep the generator over 10 kHz to 100 kHz for wideband heads or 10 kHz to 40 kHz for
intermediate band heads and observe the signals on the oscilloscope.

Step

If the time relationship is not correct, adjust the two outside jack screws on the mounting
pad slightly, until the two signals coincide.
J

CAUTION

The head mounting pads are prealigned at the factory and should only
be changed with extreme care and only when necessary.

Step 13. Repeat the above procedures with the opposite record head stack, striving for a compromise
between the two stacks. Compromise being the position of the head which provides the
best possible signal time relationships for both head stacks.

Step 14.

Remove power and test equipment.

(b) REPRODUCE HEAD REPLACEMENT AND ALIGNMENT

Step 1.

Remove the head cover. Remove the head shield located between the record and reproduce
heads.

Step 2.

Unplug the preamplifier board(s) from their connector{s) (newer models). Older models
require unpluging the head lead harness from the connector and the preamp power leads
from the preamp power supply.

Step 3.

Remove the two head mounting screws located between the upper and lower head stacks.
Carefully remove the head assembly including the attached preamp assembly (Wideband
only).

Step 4.

Normally reproduce heads and preamps are both replaced as one assembly. If this is not the
case the preamp assemblies must be disconnected from the old heads and connected to the
new head.

Step 5.

Install the new reproduce heads, including the preamp assemblies, with the two screws removed in Step 3. Be sure to place the reproduce head tight against the head alignment
blocks. Plug the preamplifier board(s) into their connector(s) (newer models) or plug the
head lead harness into its connector (older models).
CAUTION

VVith the reproduce head assembly removed the head mounting pads
and jack screws are visible and accessible. These are aligned at the
factory and are not to be tzimpered with.
NOTE

The following steps will correctly align the heads if required.

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

Step 6.

Select the two outside tracks (opposite ends) on the same head stack.

Step 7.

Thread tape on the recorder/reproducer.

Step 8.

Connect a signal generator, set a 1.0 vrmSj to the inputs of both tracks at the input connector on the Record Connector Panel. Refer to the previous Step 7 in record head alignment.

Step 9.

Connect a dual track oscilloscope to the output BNC connectors on the Reproduce Connector Panel for the proper channels.

Step 10. Place the TAPE SPEED SELECTOR in the 60 ips position.
Step 11. Sweep the generator over 10 kHz to 100 kHz for Wideband heads or 10 kHz to 40 kHz for
intermediate band heads and observe the signals on the oscilloscope.
Step 12

If the time relationship is not correct,. for wide band heads, adjust the two azimuth adjustment screws located between the reproduce head stacks, slightly until the two signals coincide. For intermediate band heads adjust the two outside jack screws on the mounting pad,
slightly until the signals coincide.

Step 13.

Repeat the above proced.ures with the opposite head stack, striving for a compromist between the two stacks. Compromise being the position of the head which provides the best
possible signal time relationships for both head stacks.

Step 14. (Wideband only). Apply 1.0 vrms signal at ,- MHz individually to each of the four outside
tracks of each stack. Monitor individually and adjust azimuth for peak out of each channel.
Strive for compromise between all fOur channels.
Step 15.

Remove the test equipment.

h. TAPE WIDTH CHANGE
1. ONE INCH TO ONE-HALF INCH CHANGE

r

Step 1.

Loosen the allen screws on the outside collar of the guide roller shafts. Slide the collar in
to measure one-half inch from the inside collar and tighten the allen screws. Remove the
pinch rollers and their spacers (behind the pinch rollers).

Step 2

Place the pinch rollers back on their shafts and

Step 3.

Loosen the allen screws on the outside end of the tape tension arm. Remove the one inch
guide rollers and replace with new one half inch guide rollers.

Step 4.

Insert the three stops into theholes located 1200 apart on the reel drive hub to accommodate the one-half inch tape reels.

Step 5.

Replace the one inch record and reproduce heads with new one-half inch heads, as described
in record and reproduce head assemblies procedures.

57

pl~ce

the spacers on the outside.

BU LLETI N NO. 3604-4
2. ON°E-HALF INCH TO ONE INCH CHANGE

Step 1.

Loosen the allen screws on the outside collar of the guide roller shafts. Slide the collar out
to measure one inch from the inside collar and tighten the allen screws.

Step 2.

R,emove the pinch rollers and their spacers (outside). Place the spacers on their shafts and
replace the pinch rollers (spacers behind pinch rollers).

Step 3.

Loosen the allen screws on the outside end of the tape tension arm. Remove the one-half
inch guide rollers and replace with new one inch guide rollers.

Step 4.

Remove the three stops located 1200 apart on the reel drive hubs to accomodate the one
inch tape reels.

Step 5.

Replace the onCL-half inch record and reproduce heads with new one inch heads as described
in the record and reproduce head assemblies replacement procedures.

i. ASSEMBLY REFERENCE DESIGNATION AND MECHANICAL PARTS LIST
1. ASSEMBLY NUMBERS - The following is a list of the standard basic assembly numbers. All
of the listed assemblies may not be present on anyone machine.
Unit - Transport

Al

Tension Arm Assembly (lower)
Photocell & Lamp Assembly

A2
Al

Tension Arm Assembly (upper)
Photocell & Lamp Assembly

A3

Switch Assembly (Forvvard,
Stop, Thread)

Al

A4

Switch Assembly (Reverse,
Fast, Record)

A5

Capstan Power Amplifier

A6
Al

DC to DC Converter Assembly
DC to DC Converter Board

A7

Preamp Power Supply

A8

Capstan Motor Assembly

A9

Reel Drive Motor and Hub

A10

Logic Board

A12

Capstan A Board

A13

Tape Sync Board

A14

Ree! Drive Board

A15

Record Connector Panel*

A16

Reproduce Connettor Panel *

A17

Power and Control Connector Panel

A18
Al-A7
or
Al-A 14

Preamp Chassis
Preampl ifiers

A19
Al-A14

Record Chassis
Direct and/or FM Record Boards
Bias Board
Voice Record Board

° A15
A16
A17

Record Connector Board

.. Connector Panel refers to the BNC panels used for si!]nal and power connections. Connector Board refers to the etched circuit board on which
the printed circuit board jacks are mou !'ted.

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4

Unit 1 - Transport (Cont.)
A20
Al-A14
A16
~17
A18

Reproduce Chassis
Director FM 3 sp. or 7 Sf).
Reproduce Boards
Voice Reproduce Board
Reproduce Connector Board
Phase Equalizer Board

A2l

Accessory Kit (Extender Boards,
Grease, etc.)

A22

Voice Kit

A26

FM Density Change Kit

Unit 2 - Power Supply
Al
Al
A2
A2

Regulator Module/Bridge Assembly
Regulator Module
Bridge Network
Control Amplifier Board

Unit 3 - Auxiliary Chassis
Al-A 14
A15
A16

Direct and/or F M 3 sp. or 7 sp.
Reproduce Boards
Connector Board
Connector Panel

Unit 4 - Remote Control Panel
2. MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS - The following list contains selected mechanical parts
listed by name anq cross referenced to the Sangamo part number.
Description

Sangamo Part No.

Record Head Assy

See Head Sheet

Reproduce Head Assy

See Head Sheet

Tension Arm Assy (Parts of) Lower

857225
300699-018
808561
855864
300027
855851
855876
857232
300699-018
808561
856629
300027
855868
855876

Main Hub Securing "E" Ring
Washer
Vane
Bearing
Bushing
Spring
Tension Arm Assy (Parts of) Upper
Main Hub Securing HE" Ring
Washer
Vane
Bearing
Bushing
Spring

1" Tension Arm (upper or lower) Roller
Assy Complete (1" Tape Kit)
Shaft
Cap
Roller
Bearing
Spacer
W:!~her

855879
855856
855858
855857
657506
880429
852987

Description

Sangamo Pai"t No.

1/2" Tension Arm (upper or lower) roller
Assy Complete (1/2" Tape Kit)
856458
856455
Shaft
856456
Cap
Roller
856454
Bearing
657506
Spacer
856457
Washer
852987
Shaft and Pinch Roller Assy (parts of) 857096
Guide Collars
855839
Set Screw
899628
Pinch Roller Assy
835018
Bearing
897174
Retaining Ring
655920
Spacer
857328
Cap Roller
857131
Pinch Roller Splenoid
857094
Inertia Dampening Roller Complete 855003-002
Bearing
846745
\/\asher
855010-008
Grip Ring
850942
Roller Assy
855004-002
Reel Drive
Inner Hub

853451

BULLETIN NO. 3604-4
Outer Hub

856373

Footage Counter Roller

857239

Bearing
. Snap Ring

657506
850942

"0" Ring
Footage Counter Meter

835008·001

Front Door Cover

836061

Capstan Motor "D.R.C."
Brushes

Tach

Lamp Assy

857098
835800
867624
836534

Capstan Motor "Baldwin"

857362

Brushes

836443

Tach Lamp Assy

836442

Capstan Motor "Sequential"

Brushes
Tach Lamp Assy

857363
867624 or 855218-001
867615

DIAGRAMS

The following is a list of transport diagrams contained at the rear of this bulletin.
Remote Control Shorting Plug Wiring Diagram
Remote Control Panel and Cable Wiring Diagram
Record and Reproduce Head Wiring Diagrams
Transport Wiring Diagram Sheets 1 and 2
Transport Overall Schematic *

*The Transport Overall Schematic may be located in the pocket at the rear of the
manual instead of the rear of this bulletin.

Remote Control Shorting Plug
Plug P1 complete 857260
Plug P1 (not wired) 854536-005

@

0
G)

(0

CD

.

@

(i)

®
0
®

PI
(MATES WITH AI7JI)

Remote Control Shorting Plug Wiring Diagram

(

:

:=

Unit 4 Remote Contra! Panel
857085 - Hand Held Model
857209 - Chassis Mounted Mode!
857222 - Mounted in Speak-Amp Enclosure
Jl
Al
A1DS1
A1DS2
A2
A2DS1
A2DS2

854536-003
~53539
898743
898743
853538
898743
898743

JI
NOTE'
THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLICABLE
FOR: (I) HAND HELD REMOTE., (2) CHASSIS
MOUNTED REMOTE,OR (3) REMOTE IN THE
SPEAKER - AMPLIFIER ENCLOSURE.

-51

,..--51

...,2

XDSIA (

I

03

XDSIB

r--

S2

XDS2A

C

o~ 2'

it

XDS2B

-

-

S3

XDS3A

C:

b o26

c~

o~ ~'tXDS3B

XDS3A (

-r-XDS3B

~l

o5~

-"-:;:--

!II~JIH
LJIF

AI

A2

Remote Control Panel and Interconnecting Cable
Wiring Diagram

=

8570840TTL
- 8517152

Remote Control Interconnecting Cable 857084
P 1 854536-005
P2 854537-003

~-----

P?

~0
B

y --------O.!~1

G

C.

8

BL
BK

8K

BK

y
® rM---

0.

y
R

®---~0- r---~~
R

I

BK

@--- ~---

~G)
M

®--.

w

BK

B

~~
£

®

jR)

-0

RR

w

'W'

6)

R

~
r

81(

0

0

~-~ f--~--@--

CONNECTOR

o~

~t -@

® ~---JM
_
®-

0

f0

G

13K

@

PI

Q

BI(
B)(

--

P-

.B

V

T

I

(])

®

sr4,J'"37-Q03

@
@

<0
®

(£)

•

®
®
@

C-ONNEC- TO R

85"f53b-005

i

X

X

N

V

::

0


"

<.>

""

<.>

0::
f-

0::
f-

<[

<[

" " " u" "~



0

"

u

0:
....

f-

<[

"


7 Channel ( % inch )

NOTE
To obtain the head part number for the machine this man
accompanied, refer to the head characteristics sheet locat.
in the front of this manual.

x
N

.,.x
'"«
U

II::

l-

i'

:x-

i:

<0-

eo

Q

'"rr«

x

U

t-

<.:>
4:

e:

I-

"

~
rr

.f-

n'"u

«

It:

l-

I

s:

'"rr~

I-

u

ILl

rr

ttl
ILl

u

g

CHANNEL
NO. 14

CHANNEL

NO.2
VOICE
CHANNEL A

t

PI

~SANGAMO

PART NO.

TRANSPORT
SIDE

VOICE
CHANNEL B

x

"rr
«
U

f-

.:1:

i:

Of)

10

'"rr
:cl

"

l-

~
rr

t-

.x

i:

'"
"a::u«
f-

i'

.:1:

!2

'"

u
«
oc

l-

"

u

-13

~

54-3

.s34·"
~-u.-.

Sit MrE

-clS-!'$'

S.JI-S

US-7A
t05J_,
A Gc.J(+

'----=PI-.

'-----¥'

p"-I<

' -_ _ _~·.,J4-R

' - - - - - - KOSI
L--------Jm-~

. PI--H

(u"."

t.t FT

)

II IDA_ SPEc 1079

0Ab~-------- £3-3

=~'>7/lff>l~iR<:-';;-;;;<---- t

1-1
No7"l!::
,. A I IS

SHowH

,.

ARoUND

2. 5' AND AS50CIATEb
KIT

FA ON'" OF Til AN s,olir
!tWA" VIE.W.
A'''' HAt. BUH

LO(.ATE DON ""'H~

PANE/...

TUR,.&D

NO.

,or
"'-0

c.oNNE.c..T/O~S.

SHoW' WIRING.

WfRJIIC IS F'ART

OF

SHUTTLE

8357"Z.

"TAPE

'.H$~

S5"7l.41

A

Pi:.
AtATES

WITH A200ll

or

!'tAt CII'AS.Sl.S

o

5311-3

---tQ;)liii\..L- 53A - 1

Main Transport Wiring Diagram, Sheet 1

C::::=::=========:::::J~~8~~)
Sh •

836250-1 TTL

Unit 1

M~in

Transport

CR1
CR4
CR5
OSl
OS2

E1
thfu
E3
J1
J3
J4

J5
J6

8964['8
891JA-58
896453
510377
510317
871885

854537-005
855977
854537-00~

843724

853623

54

855107

R1
TBl
TB2
TB3
TB4
XF1
XF2
XK2
Al

~11'1f

e 5"4-

'StfO~r'NG­

5"83

8 H977

54
85S 107
D~N

5/1"'1

691975008
859174,011

82¥926
856221
855221
853657
853657
857004
857004
,897634

POW'£R" COl'TP>oL.
c..oNN.£C--roA _ __
P..'I_N£ L 84-.5~_~~:- ___ _

897581
- 853615-{)07

896190
899250
83S055-001

812299
812299
8i2385

851225
89BS07

85;,]232
898807

A2Al

855'874

A2A1R3
A5
A6

836259

"A29

~L...L'G-

855:'156

855874
198200-471

A9

"'''''1'£5

853538

A1A1
A1A1R4
A2
A2S1

AS

I,

856256

A1Sl

A7

~::~'"

II

835~51

85HJ20

K2
l1
L2
P1

RtCORD
CONNECTOR

835461
857317
853539

854549-001

J14

A\S

85102.0

89'>655
8913656
855644
857005 [

B1

F1
F2
J9
J10

--~

510141-001
891634
851241
857055

A15J17

C1

'I

830077-003
856221
855721
853623

J7
J8
K1
K3
M1
P2
PU3
S3
thru
S6
TP1
TP2
W1
VV2
XOS1
XOS2
XM1
A3
A30S1 thru A30S3
A4
A40S1 thru A4DS3

fr

J17

J ,}-/6

t00200-471

835630, See Bulletin
854538-001
.. 8J5!'!OO
851363

8S6427
835571

* Present only with optional Photo End-of-Tape
Sense feature,
"OPTIONS: 857362; 857363

NOTE. :

LooP

IN r::..Aru.. £

IU.,iD£O

II£~E.

NoTE. :
1 AI-I..

,

~
""

~

WIP,£ IS ltG-A. SPf.o:::. Z.lBS" UNL. • .50S
o-rHEH'r,'/SE
/NO/CArED
"AID
liS. FO/..J.(J'W~: COAX IS RrO.-J9~/U SP.fc.. Z.~50 £X·CFPT AS
IHDJC.,,-rED
IN NOTe II.
M .. !. ""'-.,.II'Yr~D
SH/~LDJ:.D
wJlH IS sP.ec. t.HiS i WJJ'\E
GAGE As
I"o1.1.ows:
2.. ""UU: '-WIS,£D SjJ!J./"'DI.D A£D 9-GR£E.H /s ZOGA·
z.1'tl~T£O
SHIH.OJi.O IS Z4- "'/t. l. W/.AE TW/ST£D S)IIii.t..DE.D

:t<.:,.:/'fs

...

;t

l. AJ..1.

"1

t.~~~

=-

...

AJAJ HAS BEEN TURJI£lJ

'~"

~..

s:

~

>

,.

...'"

C

L~
;?~

."

WI ,Wi.. "'A!5 ,,1\£
II/fEA K DOWN

PAR, NO.

S.Ej£
~

.

"''''
"'...9 ~
"'''''"
.....

.

"EfD

.'0

1

JC~.r

JN4-3SS"

B

WIRING

UN.(..£SS

oTII£" wISE

o!>

~\o

"'"

Q:

o f S"'~£n
B£L.OW FoR SPEED loIN£.
£1 fEZ. "ND J/O.

SPEED
Sf-LEer
,,"0 J.ps
it

L.INE

Q~10 ~i-ooz.

J~

I

-s

r

!/ -I

z.

ll-l.
f J- 3
E. 1.- 3

vlo-eZ
JIO- Z3

H-Z.

,}10-2/'---

1

4

~-

CONNECTiONS.

n. tl.l.
}NPI(..A'TED

/::Rr ~';.N~:~ ..~Z- ~1f~~/J~~iN'£~IDE

=~~c.~:;

souMc.E

NO.

0,," ~

./jJ.ii-r·

iABlo-E

f.£Tw£''- II'

"'" ~"
"" :::
'"" ~
'"......."
Ie I:;;

;;J,r~£1'1

INsu1.ArEO FAoM -rill: TRA»S fcP.l·
FoR PP.OP.EA INSUl~A'TORS.

8'lf;,. 45'8·

8. tl' ~~O"Tft

::\

'~T.
:~ I~

ItAE

NO.

FRoM ,H£ ILf A".
9. Sl'EC. slJ,E£T FOP' PAAr NO·

~

:-v• ...L-J

OleDES

AROUND TO SJK.)W
I'M",

$££

~

~<

U

J1.JJ81J'JJIO!JI4 ~~f.

1. AL.L

-JI

~-J

SIDE

AP.J. ,MOtfIlO,'T£D WJ"TH BLA<"K "t.Z (i,A WJJll SPEC.· zz..es.
4- AI 15 UX:.ATED ON TilE FRONT OF TRANSPORT FIiNEL SflOWN IN CUT AIV;~r ;'IEW •
3.SJIJ£J.DS

=:J

,,,-

coMPON£IJ-rS
,-RE Y'EW.~D FAD"" W!lIINc,..
ANO
WH~P.E
orHE./{W1SE
INDIGAT£D.

"l13,RJ

S£LEf:.. ToR
D'ltt.
C.ONNE<.,loH S

.-'5ii]

DIAL

__.

I

11-0 I P-::.

~.
7 0.i.,.S- 001j
J9- 4

~J3-5

J'!;J- 1

ASSY.

--':!!£- 2 2

I

_._~

.)/1)- Z 3

J

I

,)9-1

1

~--t~
~~=i.
~-=£..-.J
1
..
')

II).WHERE
WJ1IiJNG-

Q~.

II.

AISoll?

1.5

TN( fUCORD

PHo'ToEL.£C.-r1<.. END of -rAPE SE,N5E·,5 iN, SUPPLJ£D,
sj4ouL.lJ 11£ liED
8A"K }or LltMP 1- PHOTo 5£NSif ENDS·

WIRED

...
...."

AND

CONNECTOR

CO.... x SPEC. 2JS!I

LEFT

lZ. THE. WLRe:. ~eFe:~~ce:.D

Q

UNATTAC}I£IJ ON THIS ASS!'
AS ~Af ,W

836250-1 TT L

85"70~4

J3
CAFS TAN !30AfW

LI
flNt.H

lioLL.

NO. I

JIO
CAPS iAN BOARD

Nor, :
Al

IS Loc/tTZO

oN "T'J;1.

'Aa,..,-

or ,1l,\N5i'cRr fANt-.L SH"WN 1\1
c.u, AwAY V/lW. At-AI HA~ }JtPN
,uJ'J N£D .Al\ouND TO 5Ho'N W}~JN(P
CoN N£c.rJQr.ls.

A

c:::

UPPER TEN.Sti)N ASSY

IIL

O~VO .. T.5
________
_

o
T/t1'1!:
St.NS£

pos r
Ai!. 9

~~

,-I VI

,

I

)~:
__ -1

Transport Overall Schematic

,.

::

BULLETIN NO. 3653-1

RECORD CHASSIS

GENERAL
This bulletin contains information pertaining to the record chassis employed with this recorder/reproducer. The record chassis houses all the record electronics utilized with this recorder/reproducer. Also provisions are normally made for housing of the voice or edge track record board and bias oscillator board.
Due to certain circuit component requirements on the record boards, +12 Vdc input to the chassis must
be applied to the boards after -12 Vdc is applied. This is accomplished with the use of a time delay relay
circuit, K 1.
A printed circuit board, with jacks mounted, provide the appropriate wiring for each record board. The
input signal connections are provided by BNC connectors on the record connector panel.
OPERATING DATA
a. CONTROLS

z-

No effective controls are located on this chassis.

b. BOARD PLACEMENT - Standard board arrangement should conform to Figure 1.

.

Ch. 1

Ch. 2

Ch. 8

Ch.9 Ch. 10 Ch. 11 Ch. 12 Ch. 13 Ch. 14

Ch. 3

Ch. 4 Ch. 5

Ch.6

Cil. 7

BIAS

Voice
or
Edge
Track

Figure 1. Board Placement Diagram, Front View

I.

,------

/\ 19 Hecorcl Chassis 835135
Jl
897633
J2
843734
K1
855130-002
XK1
835327
A 1917 Record Conrjector Board (upper & lower) 856999
C1
851139-007
thru
C4
896477
C5

thru
C18

Jl

855894

thru

C'"
~5

CONIIECTOR -P;,7JVEL

L ________________ _

J16

85"7076

/1/5

Record Connector Panel
Jl
855971
thru
J16
J17
Not Used
J18
843734 (used only with monitor kit, 835460)

NOTES:
1.

All references off A 15J 18
are prefixed with A 19A 17.

(

I

0

#OT£:

835"327

XKI

fiLL REFERENCES OFF c/1"J2!
PI?£FIXED WITH /i'/9/i'I1.

J4-Z3
J fI- i!.3

J4-1

J4
<14-9
<111- 9

f

XKI fiRE

Ie.

BK

_0-cJJI-J

V

I

I
I
!
I

+/1'V

P5.
'GAlL)
.

J 1

e :1
Y-11

rGA'L4-

C/8t

/

C/9

.1-i-cn

oluF

I __. . .
PI_I ~>-=a:J~_-4t-_-I
)-av

rr/,(,.
nJ I/)

/ur

,_o/_Qr

+I,ZV

:!: @ TPI

_

-!.'''lV
A-

BULLETIN NO. 3609-1

eR2.

TP3 .81115 TtllVE

/?7
L/

~~------~#'~/-4P~/6
)P/-15 TO II£RLJ

IOO..A..

10

C7
7,s,PF'

12:/2 :/2.

/OUH

____

~r---------~----~c~

.

lI

.o~

oO UF
'

/f21

H20

-L!
CIS
~OUrr---~'-------------O---~
150-,,-

Cf4

...-----+-----------4___---------I~+-----l
!l.Z//F
9 RE.COR£>
RDdUST

H2.5

~>&-------...---r;r--lI-'---0N'v.----e1>---'--T--n-)~---4)P/-.2

:~~

HI5
4/-'70-,,-

PI

R23

ell
1- 56//F

-1-70........

_

'@
Ir~

TO VLI
METER

- NEe

-

LEV

elL
HI7
/2.X

/SOUF +

- . Figure 3. Direct Record Board,
Schematic Diagram

9

BULLETIN NO. 3643·1

FM RECORD
GENERAL

This bulletin contains information on the FM record board operating and servicing procedures. The information consists of characteristics, operating data, theory of operation, maintenance, parts list, anel
diagrams.
The FM record board is utilized to frequency modulate the carrier frequency with the input data signal,
amplify it, and apply it to the tape record head. The carrier frequency is automatically selected by the
TAPE SPEED SELECTOR, on the Operator's Control Panel, for each individual tape speed.

•

Figure 1. FM Record Board

c========================:=:'~

1 C

-

::

HULLETIN NO. 3643-1
J

QIB

FM record boards are located in the record chassis and are easily accessible from the front of the
!llachine.
CHARACTERISTICS
Nomina! I nput Level
•
Power Requirements

1.0 vrrns
+12 Vdc ± .1 Vdc @ 36 ma
-12 V de ± .1 Vde @ 33 rna
+5 Vdc ±.5 Vdc@ 127 rna
Input Signal Attenuation Levels (RANGE switch) . . . .2 to 1.5 Vrms

I nput I rnpedance .

. ,

1.5 to 10 Vrms
TEST (internal grounded input)
20 K ohm nominal
(others available)

. . • . . . . .

Re-Record Input Level (pre-modulated signal)

i
I

~,--------....----

! l/\PE SPEED

!

TTL Compatible

TABLE 1. FM FREQUENCY RESPONSE

._-----....-------'----...---------...,--------

+ DEVIATION

IPS

( .:. ,_, _ _- - ' - - _ - L - .

CENTER
FREQUENCY
kHz

-DEVIATION

.

0........-__•. ______ _

,

+40% kHz
fO

!

120

151.2

60
30

15
71/2
3 3/4
1 7/8

15/16

120
60
30
15
7 1/2
3 3/4
1 7/8
15/16

tRIG LOW BAND
108

Dc to 10
'Dc to 5
Dc to 2.t)

+40% kHz

IRIG INTERMEDIATE
BAND

-40% kHz

216
108
54
27
13.5
6.75
3.375
1.688

CC=======================~J

2

Dc to 20

33.4
16.2
8.1
4.02
2.02
1.01
.507

302.4
- 151.2
75.6
37.8
18.9
9.42
4.725
2.35

·---'1...,--------·---·'1I

64.8

54
27
13.5
6.75
3.375
1.688
.844

129.6
- 64.8
33.4
16.2
8.1
4.02
2.02
1.01

-_'col

FREQUE~~: RANGEl

-40% kHz

75.6
37.8
18.9
9.42
4.725
2.35
1.17

,!I

Dc to 1
Dc to
Dcto.312
Dc to .156

.1-

Dc to 40
Dc to 20
Dc to 10
Dc to 5
Dc to 2.5
Dc to 1.2b
Dc to .625
Dcto.312

'--1
I

BULLETIN NO. 3643·'
-TABLE 1. FM FREQUENCY RESPONSE (CONT)
..

+40010 kHz
120
) 60
30
15
7 1/2
33/4
1 7/8

120
60
30
15
71/2
33/4
1 7/8

432
216
108
54
27
13.5
6.75

604.8
302.4
151.2
75.6
37.8
18.9
9.42
+30% kHz

-40% kHz

IRIG WIDEBAND GROUP 1

IRIG WIDEBAND GROUP II

1170
585
292.5
146.25
73.13
36.56
18.29

900
450
225
112.5
56.25
28.125
14.06

260.2
125.6
64.8
33.4
16.2
8.1
4.02

Dc
Dc
Dc
Dc
Dc
Dc
Dc

to
to
to
to
to
to
to

80
40
20
10
5
2.5
1.25

Dc
Dc
Dc
Dc
Dc
Dc
Dc

to 500
to 250
to 125
to 62.5
to 31.25
to 15.6
to 7.8

-30% kHz
630
315
157.5
78.75
39.38
19.69
9.84

OPERATING DATA
a. CONTROLS - The following Table 2 lists those controls and adjustments employed on the FM record board. These controls are vital in respect to optimum performance in FM recording. For complete
maintenance and calibration procedures refer to the maintenance section of this bulletin.

:

::

3 C": ::.: :::

BULLETIN NO. 3643·1

r---------~----------------·--------------------------------------------------__,

tt)

TABLE 2. FM RECOHD CONTROLS & ADJUSTMENTS

~_J--------------------------------------~------------------------------------.~

CONTROLS

4:"

LOCATION AND FUNCTION

RANGE switch

Located on the front of the board, it selects
the input voltage range levels of 0.2 to 1.5 Vrms,
1.5 to 10 Vrms and TEST (grounded internal
input)

IN adj control

Located on the front of the board, it determ ines
the level of the data signal passing to the first
amplification stage and VCO. This allows adjustment of the desired modulation (0 to 40%) over
an input range 1623

o INPUT

R61·/.
~""''-'_'V'A/'--

-liND

PI-12

+ R35
cw

o BLACK

PI-\!_

+

BALANCE

+6.2VDC

CRt

/000.0..

R1 1':'_

1K

IOCOn..

R9 I':'.

--~CARRIER
6450.0.
RII
FREQ.

OSClllATOlI

8+ son

-G.2VDC

+G.2VDC

-4-CW IK

.01 Uf R31
HOll

-IZVDC
R3

IK

PI ·1

r--- - - - - - - - - - - - - S2 RfQR,:..E.:..CO_R....:D_ _ _ _-+---+~Y:_!__i...,.._=~n

:
SfGNAc..IN

PI-3

I

S

1

~_

3 1

.!.

R41'>
SEE ~
NOTEI:i;:-

. i
r--+_._E~ .------!~4EI
~ ~+.5VOC

R-+

Q

b

,SI<
I~.

i1

1

5.
""
1
·_-------------______ 1
4

R34
+12YD(:--1>---N'Io~---~--4---!

27011

tW

RI7
4.71(

RI5

.

+5VPC--+---,

(3

_2-":>6

PI-5

PHa
1"1-22

z :
I
N~iE'

,PHD 1

~.!:.€=.;ED~6-_----------__{

H~AOHI~PH6

1..

. PI_10~nD5~-------_------­

PH4- SPE.f 04- ~PEtP3
PHO
PI-B ( 5PElD 2.

T

RIB
CR2

680.0.

HEAD LO

""------"7 PI-IS

RI9

4.7K

5PEED_
1 _ __
(-----_c

~

...._..,;.;R"'2~'-;-:-7"""_......--_t--'u

1'70n.t W

RIG

220I'_
...L

-IZVDC

NOTES:

1. Optional input impedance.

C.17
8 t<>PF

~t~h

2N4124

IN914

PI -6

-I

Z
Z
0
W

m
~
CfJ
~

TP4

I/~
~~"i

~~~

!jIll

.1$8

18

:;,,,
~~:q
~~ <::

J5""

'i

~

l.. I"I

~

c::J>

C\)
8SG.1

a 1"'007

~

1111

ll>

'""
~--~---)
[

.JI
.
I

' II
0,

r
i

I

II

III

I

II

,

,,

~[::-~=--:~=I,'",-=-~....:=b-==-=?=3
f-'
f
.

'------------,

!}--c _ _ _ _ -

C0

il'll~1
~I
1:1'-'1

IIIli,1 1 I

!11'I-J8f----\~-,
1 B~
L~~L'~-~l
V/6111
_f{ , ,

- - -!:',' ,:!?:~,=-I\-,-'--==-- -==:-. 3
I'l I v,~'-~
::=::.-~""\\-::;rc~;if__:::e

I

i

ii'',.

it"
\':1

i:J

IIII

,
III
\:1,

ell,

+ '-'-W/SV

c:..

rl ~
l!:\

r~~

+._!£J,

7,dF/;5 ,

-- ---~<"A.~.. _.

_

_. __

11II

I

iii"'1
!,l,I:
"II

.1

~

ILl

IL ~J~JJ~::
00";:' I
rl rl rtrri
~

O~::IJT"

1

~

r~99~

OUrPiJr3

-

I

firl-rfrl

OiJTPUTIO

-11,1 fl~~'

~

1

IIII

is

~,
~
.

I~~
I ()
Itl~>c,'l

I

I

I

I

l'

INPUT:?

INPi/T I

INPUT 3

<-

~'"

--...;..

c:>

1

I

J~"2)J/6 ~J/5
I~P/jI

is

~J!! ~J/o

11

/NPiJT

nltl>:;'
(s

H",

\)

JI2

~

H",
11

,e .,,_,~ _ ,J~Plh·~,?

J3

If1
I~"~
<-

.);; .......

()

1

I



.

J~) J/3

00

0

NOTE:
I.

3. JI8 IINO R.ssOCI~Tf:D WIft.ING IS Pllli!T OF KIT
8310069

Auxiliary Reproduce Chassis Wiring Diagram

BULLETIN NO,3647-'

FM REPRODUCE

GENERAL
The Frequency Modulation (F M) reproduce board is used for reproducing frequency modulated data
previously recorded on magnetic tape. The board, located in the reproduce chassis and possibly the auxiliary reproduce chassis (one board per FM channel), accepts the recovered FM data from the reproduce
head and tape, via the preamplifiers, and equalizes, demodulates, filters and amplifies this data for application to the board output and customer's equipment. Information contained in the bulletin consists of
general, characteristics, operating data, theory of operation, maintenance, parts list, and diagrams.

Figure 1. FM Reproduce Board
Variations incorporated on this board consist of four bandwidth possibilities, operation at any three
tape speeds out of a possible seven, and an optional FM Re-Record feature. These variations are described
in the following paragraphs.

c:==:=====:====-========.: .==.

\/\ll~rrtl]F( i? rr
cQ\~\~\)\)\ \~\\\\\f\\

==:=: : 1:). 1 C(======::::=====::=::::J:J ij@lfi@Mtw&J

=::==::=:="

BULLETIN NO. 3647-1

-

TABLE 1. FM FREQUENCY RESPONSE

.APESPEED

+ DEVIATION

IPS

• +40010 kHz
120
60
30
15
71/2
3 3/4
1 7/8
15/16

151.2
75.6
37.8
18.9
9.42
4.725
2.35
1.17
+4~1o

...
!II

120
60
30
15
7 1/2
33/4
1 7/8
15/16

kHz

302.4
151.2
75.6
37.8
18.9
9.42
4.725
2.35

CENTER
FREQUENCY
kHz

- DEVIATION

IRIG LOW BAND
108
54
27
13.5
6.75
3.375
1.688
. 844

FBEQUENCY RANGE
kHz

-40% kHz
64.8
33.4
16.2
8.1
4.02
'2.02
1.01
.507

Dc to 20
Dc to 10
Dc to 5
Dc to 2.5
Dc to 1.25
Dc to .625
Dc to .312
Dc to .. 156 .

IRIG 1~~~DME'DIATE_40% kHz
216
108
54
27
13.5
6.75
3.375
1.688

129.6
64.8
33.4
16.2
8.1
4.02
2.02
1.01

Dc to 40
Dc to 20
Dc to 10
Dc to 5
Dc to 2.5
Dc to 1.25
Dc to .625
Dc to .312

+40% kHz tRIG WIDEBAND GROUP 1-40% kHz
120
60
30
15
7 1/2
33/4
1 7/8

604.8
302.4
151.2 75.6
37.8
18.9
9.42
+30% kHz

C

120
60
30
15
71/2
3 3/4
1 7/8

1170
585
292.5
146.25
73.13
36.56
18.29

432
216
108
54
27
13.5
6.75

260.2
125.6
64.8
33.4
16.2
8.·1
4.02

tRIG

WIDEBAND GROUPI
900
450
225
112.5
56.25
28.125
14.06

2

Dc to 80
Octo 40
Dc to 20
Dc to 10
Dc to 5
Dc to 2.5
Dc to 1.25

-30% kHz
630
315
157.5
78.75
39.38
19.69
9.84

Dc to 500
Dc to 250
Dc to 125
Dc to 62.5
Dc to 31.25
Dc. to 15.6
Dc to 7.8

BULLETIN

NO.

3647-1

a. BANDWIDTHS - Low, Intermediate, Wideband I, and Wide band II are the four bandwidth selections
available. The desired bandwidth is usually determined by the frequency of the signal to be reproduced.
Refer to table 1 for correlation of bandwidths to speeds, carrier frequencies, and deviation frequencies.
Bandwidth selection components consist of equalizers, filters, and four circuit components (three capacitors·and 1 inductor). Refer to table 3 and figures 2, 4, 5, and 6.
b. OPERATING SPEEDS - A speed line matrix and the three speed dependent filter networks govern
wh ich three reproduce speeds are accomodated on the FM reproduce board. The optional F M 4-7 Speed
Expander board (bulletin 3648-1) is required when all seven reproduce speeds are desired. Refer to figures
2, 5 and 6.
c. FM RE-RECORD FEATURE - (optional) - This optional feature provides for routing the modulated
signal directly to the board output 0 R through the demodulating, detecting, and amplifier circuits to the
board output.

RECORDER SPEED
7
l

FItTER NO.1
HI _

-----,
t SPEED 1 I

0
W
f
S
T
CI,

fM EQUAliZER
LOCATIONS

' - _ _ _ _ .1

r----------,

L~~_:.:~_~j

EOUAlIlfR IDENTifiCATION
SPEED
BAND
COLOR
BAR
DOT
BRN BRN
120
lOW
INT
60
REO REO
WBI
ORN ORN
30
W811
15
YEl YEl
GR!iI
7 III
BlU 3 3/4
VIO
1 718

GRY

6

5

"

3

2
H
I
I;

H

t
S
0

Q

r.;/ / / v1
0

Tp

~.,.,

't>"

Ii'

~

fL3
ORN

fL2
RED

HI
BAlI

fIl TER SHECT
CONTACTS

/
FIL T ER SHECT LIliES

DUTY CYCLE

15/16

CONNECTIONS AND fll HR lOCATlllliIS
SHOWN WITH DASHED LINES AIID BOXES
ARE USED Iii 1 SPEED SYSHI!1

@
OSCILLATOR

DUTY CYCLE
FILTER NO 2
H2

FilTER 110. 3
FL3

r----'
I SPEED 2 I

,-----...,

L.. _ _ _ _ -J

t SPEEO 3

L.. _ _ _

I

~

e

l£VH DEl

CONNECTIONS AND FilTER lDCATIOIS
SHOWN WITH DOTTED LINES AND 1I0XES
ARE USED IN A TYPICAL 3 SHED
SYSTEM. IllUSTRATED IS A SYSTEII
USING 60. 7 112 & I 111 1'$

Figure 2. Variation Locations and Matrix Lines

BULLETIN NO. 3647-1
...cHARACTERISTICS
Frequency Response
Speeds. . . . . .
Power Requirements

Output Level
Output Impedance

See Table 1
Three-Selectable
+12V de at 70ma. max.
-12Vdc at 100ma. m8X.
+5Vdc at 150ma. max.
Adjustable, 1Vrrns nominal
75 ohms, unbalanced to ground
with SCPo

OPERATING DATA
a. BANDWIDTH AND SPEED VARIATIONS - Figure 2 details the various filter select lines, equ81izer
locations and identifications, and filter locations and identifications.
b. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS t\ND INDICATORS

TABLE 2. FM REPRODUCE BOARD CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
CONTROL OR INDICATOR

LOCATION AND FUNCTION

ZE ROadjust control

Located on the front panel. This control is
used to adjust the output amplifier to obtain
OVdc out, with only the carrier frequency present at the input.

OUTPUT adjust control

Located on the front panel. This control is
used to adjust the level of the output signal.

RE-RECORD switch (optional)

Located on the front panel. Provides selection
of signal form at the board output. ON provides a modulated carrier at the board output
(BNC) for re-recording purposes. OFF provides the standard output of a detected and
filtered signal.

SQUE LCH indicator

Located on the front panel. Indicates, when
lit, the board output is squelched (output
signal is not present) by lack of proper servo
control speed or lack of carrier.

LEVEL DETECTOR DUTY CYCLE adjust control

located on the side of the board. This control is used to balance the inputs to the input
level detector stages.

ascI LLATOR DUTY CYCLE adjust control

Located on the side of the board. This control is used to adjust the duty cycle (symmetry)
of the oscillator.

4~1

II

BULLETIN NO.
C.

!-.'j

OPERATING PROCEDURES

1. PRE-OPERATiNG CHECKS AND CONSIDERATIONS - Prior to reproducing FM data with the
F M reproduce boards, observe the following checks.
(a} Ensure the speed dependent matrix jumpers are positioned properly for those three speeds desired. Refer to figure 2.
(b) Ensure the FM reproduce boards contain the desired speed and bandwidth dependent equalizers, filters, and timing components. Refer to figures 2, 5, and 6.
(c) Ensure the FM reproduce boards are properly located in the reproduce chassis or auxiliary reproduce chassis, for the desired tracks. Also, if used, ensu re the F M 4-7 speed expander boards
are properly positioned (refer to the expander board bulletin). Refer to the head characteristics
sheet, front of manual, where board serial numbers are correlated to track numbers as originally
positioned at the factory.
(d) Ensure all output connections are made to the associated BNC connectors on the reproduce
connector panel.
(e) If the RE-RECORD switch (optional) is supplied, ensure it is positioned properly. If the FM
reproduce board is being used for re-recording purposes, ensure the output is connected properly
for recording on another channel.
(f) Ensure the FM reproduce boards are properly adjusted. Operator adjustments consist of the

ZERO adj. and the OUTPUT adj., as detailed in the following paragraphs. Overall adjustments
concerning the two previous adjustments and the duty cycle adjustments of the oscillator and
the input detectors are detailed in the maintenance section of this bulletin.
NOTE

The Servo Squelch switch must be set to the NORMAL
position to utilize the Servo Squelch feature. (Output
signal is squelched when the recorder/reproducer speed
control has not established a stable accurate tape speed).
2. OPERATING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS - The following adjustment procedures require use
of a digital voltmeter and an FM record board. The Sangamo Calibrator unit, part number 836352, provides all adjustment capability in one package.
(a) ZERO ADJUST - The following procedures are provided for adjustment of the FM reproduce
ZERO adj., !.Ising a calibrated FM record board (VCO calibrated) of the same bandwidth. If an
FM record board is not available refer to the maintenance section of this bulletin where complete calibration is performed by supplying a voltage input: Special equipment is required for
complete calibration.

Step 1.

Connect a jumper from the FM record board VCO (yellow) testpoint to the FM reproduce
board IN (yellow) testpoint. Ensure the FM record board RANGE switch to set to the TEST
position.

Step 2.

Set the tape speed to one of the desired speeds, apply POWER, depress RECORD, and set
the Servo Squelch s\'vitch to the TEST position.

c:====:=::===:=:==:======-====:3)

5

.. ~~~~(\U~~\(,~~.
CI======-=-='-=====::=:=:=:::J::J
~!n).iid))fIJ(I!
. J'lti~i!D
11:l1!j,(ll/r/'!YI v
l.l-.2-2. Each logic -1 level input to A2 produces a logic 1 leve! output
with a longer time duration.
The pulse output at A2-8 (clamp) removes the clear signal from A3a, at A3a-13, and activates the oscilfa~?r circuit by causing Q6 to be biased to cut off. With 06 not conducting the effective short between the
~mitter and base of 07 is removed, allowing Q7, 08, C16, C17, R32, R33, and R54 to function as an oscillator circuit.

~.~ )~.r.\"\I.\'·'CC========'=====::==::::J::J
~.~\~V:\.~
fill! r,l//J/JI1t0! Iv}
I.1liL\\!Jllilll\f5'"
;\\nU11!1))i!C'I" III

6

CC:=========:=======:====::=._=.===:::::::J

BULLETIN NO. 3647·1

r----------------~

I
I
I

INPUT

SIGNAL
fROM

I

I
I

I
I

(

PREAMPS
AND
TAPE

I

TAPE

SPEED
LINES
SPEED
LINES

~~~~lCH{-------------------.---------------------------.--J

SIGNAL

l

)

SELECTED
TAPE SPEED

~,

I
I

----

I

--~
TO INPUT

I

--~--FILTERED

OF fM 4-7
SPEED EXPANDER

• L

t

'

'---=-___ J

OUTPUT OF
FM 4·7 SPEED

EXPANDER Bd.

- - - - - - Indicatesvariabte wiring provided without FM RE:.RECORD
KIT {part no. 8362561.
-

Figure 3.

- - ,- -

-

Indicates variclble wiring provided with FM RE·RECOAD
KIT (part no. B36256)'

FM Reproduce Board Block Diagram

CC=================~=-=:=::======__
==:=:=:===:=:::J 7

OUTPUT
SIGNAL

BULLETIN NO. 364tl

The oscillator output connected to the emitter of 05 causes 05 to further conduct with each successive
-conduction of 07 and 08. Each conductIon of 05 momentarily inhibites the conduction of 04. This
action produces a logic 1 level of short duration on the clock line to A4, at A4-9, and A3a, at A3a-l1.
Binary rate n;ultiplier A4 functions asa positive edge clock triggered divide-by-device, controlled by the
seven speed line inputs, the clock signal, and the strobe and enable input. The speed line inputs select the
divide-by function of A4 as follows: 120 ips::=";- " 60 ips = -;- 2, 30 ips ==..;- 4, 15 ips::= -;- 8, 7 1/2 ips::= -;- 16,
33/4 ips = -;- 32, and 1 7/8 ips::= ..;- 64.
The~

output of A4, at A4-5, (7 1/2 ips providing the -;- 16 function will be used for this explanation) remains at a logic 1 level until the trailing edge of the sixteenth clock pulse. At the leading edge of the seventeenth clock pulse the logic 0 level ~ output) is applied to the 0 input of the demOdulator flip-flop A3a, at
A3a-12. This action would produce a logic 1 level on the Q output of A3a, at A3a-9 and a logic 0 level at
the Q output, at A3a-8. The logic 0 leve; on the 0 output of A3a would deactivate the strobe and enable
inputs of A4 causing the r output to rerum to a logic 1 level. This 0 output is also differentiated by CS and
applied to the reset input of A2, at A2-5. A2 is now reset causing the oscillator to stop and a clear signal to
be applied to A3a, holding the 0 and Q outputs to their present states. This present condition would remain
until A2 is again set causing the sequence to function.
The Q output of A3a, at A3a-9, is applied to a constant current generator, consisting of Q 18, C R10, and
associated circuitry. 010 and assodatedcircuitryfunction as a switch, conditioning the signal prior to
appl ication to the 018.
The output of 018 is applied to the three JFET's, Q19 through Q20. This signa! is also available at P4-15
for application to the optional expander board. With all speed lines grounded, except the selected speed,
the associated control transistor Q17, Q22, or Q23 will not conduct. Thus the associated JFET will not
conduct, eliminating that particular filter. With +5 Vdc on the selected speed line the associated control
trar,:>istor will conduct removing
negative voltage from the associated JF ET. This action causes the
.:r=ET to conduct, allowing the output at 018 to pass through the associated speed dependent filter to the
next stage. This voltage at th_e filter inputs is either positive or zero, causing the filter output to be positive.
The next stage consists of operational amplifier A6, the input at AS-4. The filtered outputs of the expander board are also applied at this point, from P4-20. AS functions to provide 0 Vdc output when only
the carrier frequency is present at the input. Potentiometer R62, ZERO adjust, is used to achieve this output by adjusting the negative offset current to the summing junction of A6.
The output of AS, at AS-l1, is appfied through a low pass filter network, consisting of L 1 and C 15, to
potentiometer R49, OUTPUT adjust. R49 adjusts the signal level passing through the power amplifier,
consisting of 09 and Q13 through Q16, to the board output at P4-18 (hi) and P4-17 (10).

.=

:::=:::3

BULLETIN NO. 3647-1
b. SQUELCH - Two squelch systems are utilized with this FM reproduce board. "Servo" squelch, dependent on the recorder/reproducer speed control accuracy. and "carrier" squelch, dependent on the input
signal level, are the two types.
"Servo" squelch is controlled by a speed control signal applied to board pin P4-7. When the recorder/reproducer's speed control system is not "phase and frequency locked" to the crystal oscillator reference, a
•
logic 0 level is applied to all FM reproduce board pins P4~7. This level when applied to the preset input of
squelch flip-flop A3b, at A3b-4, causes the 0 output, at A3b-5, to go to a logic 1 level. 011 and 012 will
now conduct shorting the output signal, at the base of 09, to ground. The logic 0 level at theQ output
grounds the cathode of light emitting diode, eR8, causing it to become illuminated indicating the board
output is squelched.
A "Servo" squelch disable switch, located on the recorder/reproducer, is provided for disabling the
squelch line at P4-7, for test and calibration purposes.
When a logic 1 level becomes present at P4-7, by the speed control system lock condition, the Q and-Q
outputs of A3b will remain in the squelch state. The squelch condition will be released wh~n the second
squelch method requirements are fulfilled as described in the following paragraphs.
When the signal inputs to the level detectors are of sufficient amplitude, a logic 1 level will be produced
~y the EXCLUSIVE OR output at A 1-8. This will set flip-flop A2, allow the oscillator to run, allow A4 to
function, and allow A3a to function. At the end of the f,irst timing period; the Q output of A3a will go to
a logic 1 level causing the 0 output of A3b to go to a logic 0 level. Q 11 and Q 12 will not conduct thus removing the short between the base of 09 and ground. The squelch lamp (CR8) will not be illuminated due
to the logic 1 level at the 0 output of A3b.
The input signal sensitivity levels are determined by the signal amplitudes effect on LD2 (level detector
2). LD2 is less sensitive than LD1, thus with a loss of signal or low signal input, the output of LD2 will go
to and remain at a logic 1 level. LDl will continue to change st~te by the application of the low level signal
or noise. This action by both level detectorS will produce an output at A 1-8, containing logic 1 level pulses
of a longer time duration. A2, the oscillator circuit A4, and A3a will all function. However, these functions
create a conditio~by which a logic 1 level at A 1-8 will be present at the D input of A3b, at A3b-2, at the
same instant the 0 output of A3a goes to a logic level. This action clocks the squelch flip-flop at A3b-4,
producing a logic 1 level at the 0 output of A3b. 011 and 012 will now conduct shorting the base of
09 to ground. The squelch lamp will also become illuminated, indicating the-output is squelched.

c. FM RE-RECORD - The optional re-record feature functions by routing the modulated signal from the
level detector outputs through emitter follower 03 to the board -outputs. The demodulated output signal is
still available at TP2 when utilizing the re-record feature. The re-record switch simply selects between a
modulated or demodulated output.
MAINTENANCE
The maintenance section contains-information to properly test and calibrate the FM reproduce board.
Refer to the theory of operation section schematic diagram (figure 6), and waveforms (figure 6), for detail-circuit operation.

9

BULLETIN NO. 3647-1

a. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
HP Model 400E VTVM or equivalent
Tektronix 531 Oscilloscope or equivalent
IEC F51 Function Generator or equivalent
HP Model 310 Wave Analyzer or equivalent
General Radio 1130-A Frequency Counter or equivalent
Fluke 8100 Digital Multimeter or equivalent
b. TEST AND CALIBRATION - Refer to the operator's data section of this bulletin for minor operating
checks and adjustments prior to completing the following procedures.

Step 1.

With the FM reproduce board removed from the recorderireproducer and its shield removed,
visually inspect if for loose connections or mountings, dented, misshaped or biCken components, foreign material and signs of overheating. Check the board for the proper equalizers,
equalizer positions, proper filters, filter position, speed matrix connections, and bandwidth
variable components.

Step 2.

Mount the board on its extender, in the reproduce chassis, (shield removed) and apply
POWER.

Step 3.

Ensure the presence of the following approximate voltages between TP3 (GND) and the indicated point.

+ Side of C13

+ Side of C20
- Side of C24

+5 Vdc
+12 Vdc
-12 Vdc

Step 4.

Connect a sine wave generator, AC VTVM, and frequency counter between the IN (yellow)
testpoint, TPl and GND (blackj testpoint, TP3. Set the generator level at.5 to 1 Vrms as
monitored with the AC VTVM. Set the generator frequency for the correct frequency per
tape speed and bandwidth, as listed in table 1. Monitor frequency with the frequency
counter.

Step 5.

Ensure the "Servo Squelch" switch is set to the TEST position (tape movement will not be
required for a board output), POWER is applied, STOP depressed, and the RE-RECORD
switch, (if applicable) is OFF.

Step 6.

Set tape speed to 30 ips and monitor wi~h an oscilloscope the collector of transistor Q4. Adjust potentiometer R 54, oscillator duty cycle adjust, as necessary to provide equal time intervals between the pulses.

Step 7.

Select the highest desired tape speed and change the generator accordingly to produce the
proper carrier frequency for the speed selected.

Step 8.

Adjust R49, OUTPUT adjust, fully clockwise.

Step 9.

Monitor the OUTPUT (red) testpoint, TP2, with a digital dc voltmeter, and ensure a reading
of 0 Vdc ±5 MVdc. Adjust R6.2, ZERO adjust, as necessary to obtain the 0 Vdc reading.

BULLETIN NO. 3647·1
Step

1a

Connect a wave analyzer between the OUTPUT (red) testpoint, TP2, and the GND (black)
testpoirnt, TP3. Adjust the wave analyzer'for the carrier frequency applied to the board.
While observing the indicator on the wave analyzer, adjust potentiometer R7, level detector
duty cycle adjust, as necessary to produce a minimum reading.

Step 11. Change the generator frequency to the plus % deviation, per table 1. While monitoring the
OUTPUT (red) testpoint, TP2, with a digital dc voltmeter, adjust potentiometer R49, OUTPUT adlust for a 1.5 Vdc reading.
Step 12. Change the generator frequency to the minus % deviation and ensure a reading of 1.5 Vdc
±15 MVdc is present.
Step 13. Repeat steps 10 through 13 for those speeds desired. Compromising adjustments may be
performed to make entire board performance more satisfactory. The potentiometer on the
filter trnit may be slightly adjusted to obtain the 0 Vdc output at the lowest speed.
Step 14. With the plus % deviation input, position the "Servo Squelch" switch to the NORMAL
positioo{No tape movement). Ensure the board output is squelched (drops to 0 Vdc ±50
MVdc) and the squelch indicator lamp is lit. Sweep input frequency to minus % deviation
and ensure output remains the same.
Step 15. Place the "Servo Squelch" switch to the TEST position and remove the generator input at
the IN testpoint. Ensure the output signal is squelched (drops to 0 Vdc ±50 MVdc) and the
squelch indicator lamp is lit.
Step 16.

Repeat steps 1 through 16 for all FM reproduce boards, as desired or required.
PARTS LIST
FM Reproduce Board 836154-(*

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Cl
C2
C3

859520-001
Cl1
859520-001
C12
859520-020
C13
859520-053
C14
510339
C15
510128
thru
859775-009
C17
896475
C18
859775-021
C19
C4
329157-001
C20
C5
859775-017
C21
C6
844115
C22
C7
844115
C23
C8
859775-010
C24
C9
859775-013
C25
C10
329157-001
C26
. *See table 3 for dash number description.

I

329157-001
Not Used
859775-021
329157-001
See Table 3

510114-020
510116-025
859775-017
329157-001
Not Used
845258
859775-017
510116-027
510058-003

-

C27
C28
C29
C30
CR1
CR2
CR3
CR4
CR5
CR6
CR7
CR8
CR9
CR10
. CR11
CR12

11

Ch. 2 6-73

898330
329157-001
329157-001
859775-017
853531
844510
844510
852475-018
852475-024
844510
853531·
510345
844510
852475-014
844510
844510

1~I~i~~
~

BULLETIN NO. 3647-1
PARTS LIST
FM Reproduce Board 836154· (* ) (Cant.)
R39

L1

See Table 3

R6

198200-102

198200-512

Pl

855981-001

R7

329151-006

R40

198200-102

thru

R8

198200-222

R41

198200-221

P3
P4

R9

198200-154

Fl42

198200·102

853518

R10

R43

198200-103

01

854540

198200-182
198200-472

R44

853530-254

02

854540

198200-471

03*

854539

04

510360

05
06
07
08
09
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
thru
021
022
023
Rl
R2
R3
R4
R5

510360

R 11 *
R12
R13
R14
R15

510364

R16

198200-561

R49

510164-008

510360

R17

198200-361

R50

198200-102

510360

R18

198200-124

R51

198200-271 .

859970

R19

198200-471

R52*

198200-151

510360

R20

198200-471

R53

198200-470

854540
854539
859970
854539
854539

R21
R22
R23
R24
R25

R54

854540
854540

R26

198200-391
198200-181
198200-561
198200-472
198200-223
853530-108

**
510336

198200-222

R45

198200-105

R46

198200-472

198200-561

R47

853530-147

198200-271

R48

853530-212

R60

R28

198200-103
198200-562

329151-007
198200-472
198200-223
198200-472
198200-223
198200-101
198200-563

R61

198200-622

R29

198200-221

R62

510164-008

R30

198200-221

R63

R31
R32
R33
R34

198200-331

R64

198200-273
198200-271

853530-254
853530-254

R65
R66***

198200-151
198200-222

198200-332

R67***

198200-222

R35

198200-102

R68***

. 198200-222

198200-102

S1*

198200-222

R36
R37

198200-472

R38

198200-271

854540
854540
198200-471
198200-562
198200-471

R27

R55
R56
R57
R58
R59

510399-001

198200-103

FM Re-Record Kit 836256
03

854539

R52

198200-151

Rl1

198200-472

S1

855432-001

* Part of optional Re-Record Kit 836256.

** May be either 510364 (MPS 3640) or 854540 (2N4126).
*** These resistors always used with Linear phase filters.
:::

::: "===:1

BULLETiN NO. 3647·1

-_ .

..

TABLE 3.

--

PARTS LIST VARIATIONS

cn

L1

Band-

Carrier
Frequency

C15

001

Basic Board

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

002

900 kHz

27 PF
835341-031

32 PF
835341-023

32 PF
835341-023

836242-001
1500,uh
835242-002

W.B.I

1500l1h
836242-002

I ntermediate

1500f.lh
836242-002

lcow

836154-

•

C16

width

003

432 kHz

150 PF
835341-029

70 PF
835341-027

70 PF
835341-027

004

216 kHz

150 PF
835341-029

130 PF
835341-028

130 PF
835341-028

330l1h

,

I

Not Used

W.B. II

005

108 kHz

150 PF
835341-029

270 PF
835341-030

270PF
835341·030

006

450 kHz

27 PF

70PF

70PF

330ph

W.B.II

835341-031

835341-027
..

835341·027

836242-001

(60 ips

560 PF

560PF

150quh

Low

835341·032

836242·002

(60 ips

150 PF

54 kHz

007

835341-032

835341·029

top speed)

to () s()Oed \

TABLE 4. EQUALIZER PARTS LIST
I NTERM£DIAT£

BAND

/.8K

'82

1·8t<

182

1.81<.

Illl

i
R3

8361:40-

;:::0

I

LI
VAL:

5-:-<:0

I VA

CI
•

SECO

Cz.
V"'iL.

SEcO

R2.
VAL.

SE"co

R3
V,QL.

SECo

RI
vAt... SECO

Q/! Fe
ryr.'c sE"c.o ,K.Hi!

I;;.~~~,:,;,",c,

~ "'iXiT-

BULLETIN NO. 3647-1
~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _'_'_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _• _ _ _M'W
__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
••'_________
U_U_._ _ _ _ _ _
n ________
" _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _

.-O___~-_-_T-A_B..,..L-E-5-._F_rl_T_E_'R_A_N_D_ErQ,_U_A_L_I_Z_E_R_P_A_R_T_S_L...,ISrT_._._~,
SPEED IPS

-

FREQ.

HFLAT AM? FILTER PART NO.

LINEAR PHASE
FILTER PART NO.

miG INTERMEDIATE BAND

J

60
30
15
7112
3 3/4

1118
* 15/16

40
20

kHz

277272-002
277272-003
277272-004
277272-005
277272-006
277272-007
271272-008
271272-009

10
5
2.5
1.25
.625
.312

EQUAL ::::~ PART NO.

-

"-'-'

120

_ _"____
" _ _ _",

277181-002
277181·003
277181·004
277181-005
277181·006
277181·007
277181-008
277181·009

83::::-+0-001
83:::::'!().002

--

83;:: .: -+ 0- 003
83:: ::: .! 0-004
83:::: .':-!:O-OO5
83.c:~O-006

83;: '::':'l}·007
836 :-+0-008

IRIG WIDEBAND GROUP I
120
60
30
15

7 1/2
(33/4
~

80 kHz
40
20
10

5
2.5

1 7/8. ___.L-______
1.25
____

~

277272-001
- 271272-002
277272-003
271272-004
271272-005
277272-006
277272-007
____________

~

277181-001
277181-002
277181-003
277181-004
277181·005
277181·006
277181·007
______________

836 z-~ 0-009
836:'.';0-010
836:~0-011

~

836 0-012
836:::.!0-013
836:-H}.014
_________
83e:::-W-015
,___________

tRIG WIDEBAND GROUP II
~------~------------r-------------.--------------.-----------_,

120
60
30

500 kHz
250

125

15
7 1/2
3 3/4

67.5
31.25
15.6

1 7/8

7.8

277273-001
277273-002

_____

8362~0·016

8362-!'O-017

271273-003
271273-004
271273-005
271273-006
271273-007

8362~O-018

8362~O-019
8362~O-020

8362~O·021
8362~O-022

LOW BAND
120
60
30
15
71/2

3 3/4

l()

1 7/8

20 kHz
10

5
2.5
1.25
0.625
0.312

217272-003
277272-004
271272-005
277272-006

2T1272-oo7
271272-008
277272-009

277181-003
277181-004
277181-005
277181-006
277181-007
277181-008
277181-009

8362~0023

8362':'0-024
8362-+0025
8362~0026

836240·027
8362~0028
8362~0029

~

.~

BULLETIN NO. 3647-1

OVTPVT

SAl!

DOT

Figure 4. FM Equalizer Schmetic Diagram and Component Location

U
I

I

I
I
I

-.q)

Q.

o

OWPUT

1

"

,.'.
..

T~"
•• 0
. OUT"UT

R

,s~
"
>9

t•

FL-3

n

."

/."..:~-\
Q

.'

l':''''\

\ - ,~, I

\ U )

U- U- ,-------LC_-----:..!--'-____'_-_-~__________'-_-_/____.____________

__I

~.
Figure 5. FM Reproduce Board Component location

15

.

.

83624G-OTTl-S 836154-5-lTL'

~~~~~~~
ijR~@@~~

----.---....

~

N-20( F"ROI'1 E)tP4NDER

- - ( :qr-~'--{
r-------------------_'~~--~. .

WAVEFORM A.

Typical output of level detector 1 (L01).

WAVEFORM B.

Typical output of level detector 2 (L02).

WAVEFORM C.

The exclusive 0 R of LO 1 and L02.

WAVEFORM O.

Negative pulses of approximately 50 N sec.

WAVEFORM E.

Positive edge of CLAMP pulse, caused by nega-

r-------------------"

,----------------------,
--------------,~
~.

spreD
:t4-'U.~'.-+--H++-++H,(E)
HIGHE.ST

tive edge of waveform O.
WAVEFORM F.

Clock generator pulses, produced as long as

-...

CLAMP is high.
WAVEFORM G.

Rate multiplier~output.

SPEED
2

WAVEFORM H & I With waveform G high when a clock pulse occurs,

_

E!,L!§'R_2.._ _

the Q output at A3a-9 will go high and the Q
output at A3a-8 will go low. This activates the

"'4"~

SPEED 3

strobe enable inputs of A4. If waveform G is low

....
C&

when the leading edge of the clock pulse occurs,
Q will go low and Q will go high.
WAVEFORMJ.
WAVEFORM K.

" ... ~ SPEED4

Servo squelch signal.
With waveform J high and waveform C low, this
signal will go low when waveform I goes high.,
This action removes the squelch from the board.

P4·S

I

f"~

SPEED 5

270lt-

~

With waveform J high and waveform C high, this

.l~_

signal will go high when waveform I goes high,
thus squelching the board output.
WAVEFORM L.

L

....-8 ( SPEED S

This signal produced by waveform I causing
waveform E to go low, stopping the generator.

'_I9E StEED !..----~I_+f2l
LOWE~T

.. AS.

INPUT

B"$.~

:. ",-10

~~"'+----1H

INPUT'U~
A11

D

~3,r--'r-'Ir-,r~r-~r~r-------------~r-~r~~------~

•

A28

F

A3 11 -I1W-...1W.l..-JJJ.U._....JJUll-...!W.l..-.lIJIL. ..lll"--____________--'UlI1..--1lIU-..lillL-_---1lIlL-llllL---1l'llL ,

"

jUo.s..J

•. Ala"

"'-'''-----------------'

LOW

C

"4-'~

"

P4-. E C3.J:

4cl,u~T

C4

..

1

~:r

"I-OIUFf

cu':'''',,;f'
;'5\1'

L..._________ ~~----.rL

~~

P4-r foE_________

L,
Pot-II

P4-Jz..

!:=:1

-,2.

V

"t1::
-:

TYPICAL £OUAL1l£,R

U!ff'

C.I"'~H·

BULLETIN NO. 3647-'

..,..- +5V
~J3

J:" .r

+J..

I/F

___+---(,;ljs D··I"
.--+---4,

ZJ;-~i)S

WIOI:SI1TER. M,NO

6.2 K
198200-822
8ZK
198200-B~2

8.21<
198200-822

12 t<
27K
198200-:273 198200-123
27 K
12K
198200-273 1982oo-{23

'31./4 IPS
"'loceAND :r
1"'/6 1Pi
~Jl!l.!-jJL
i~Q IPS
'" I DE B~N D
60 IPS
\JIDEB"'NI> I;t
30 IPS

WIOEBAWP J!
15 11'5

R7
2. 0-,,-

RS

10 K
82 JL.
198200-273 198200-103 198200-820 51011'3-011
2D..r..
82.n..
27k
10K
1'8200-273 198200-103 198200-820 510113-011
10 K
:z.0.n.
82 .....
OMIT
/98200-103 19B200 .. SRO 510113-011
oS OJ>10k
47.,...
OMIT
198200-103 198200-470 844993
50......
10K
4'7.JlOMIT
138200-10, 198200-4'70 844993

\.IID.,SANPI

,,!L...

R3

OMIT
271<

10/(

198200-10'
10K
198200-103
10K
1198200-<03

9.2'"

198200-!lU
B2J<

198~~
I!!k

198200-273 ":111200-/21
~7k
I~ 1\
196200-;n, 198200- / 23
101(
OMIT
136200-103
OMIT
OMII
OMIT

1'!>~~OKo.,O'

10 II"
198:200-103
8-2K
19S2oo-gn
8·2 k

OMIT

I!!B"oo..S22

OMIT

198U>O-lo3

OMIT

10 k
IO~

199200-103

IOO-A-

JUMPfR 84499410O..n..

JVMPtR

84-4994
IOO...n..
844994IOO..n..

JUMPER
J!JMPE"R

J UI1 PER

i

84+994100-,,_

RS

R9

CI

C3

C2

5K
20.1>.
400PF"
62 PF"
329151-009 329'51-002 197212- 4-00 1972/2-062
51<
:20~
240 PF"
SOOPf
329151-009 3291SI-002 1982 4 9-600 197212-240
iooo Pf
20 ......
:2. K
OMIT
32~15"I-o"8 329151-002
I091'8f,-ooa
I K
.0039""20-,,OM I i
3291SI-OD7 32915'-002
S9'.BG-oU
500_n _
:z.O.n..
.015uF
OMIT
329151-006 329151-002
.91.8.-'>12
500J'L

20J>...

3"9151.006132~15~O02
500...n....
20...n...

32.1!115H)01! 329151-002
200-11..,
Zo..n..
3291SI-005 329151-002
20~
51<.

32<.1151-009 32':1151-002
51(

20 ......

OMIT
OMIT

.015UF
691!>9E-0!J!

OMIT
OMIT

69/~_~-c34

LI

1000 UH
lur/3SV
4- 7vrl 10V
5104Z"",-025 859775-"'''' 853587-020
IUF"/35V
1000UH
4 T ur/lOy

a53581-02_~

5/o4?-Q-Q'115 B597'7S-o~I

IUF"/35V

47u./IOV

1000 v\-!

5/D4Z'l-oZS 85977s-otl 853 5 p~r=~.'!.o

OMIT

IUF"/35V
5I012Q-02<;

OMIT

OM!T

.033uF

C5

C4

OMIT

OMIT

OMIT

.OC!,\u.69168.-055

OMIT

1,~~r:t8lC

47PF
197212-047

OM IT

820P,

o

..

EQUALIZER PARTS LISTING

82 p,

47u,

100(.' UH

/lOV

S5~17S...oZI

853597-020

lu,/:3;\1

47v;/IOV
/000 UH
S,04Z'1-oz5 8S1!1775-otl B53Se'T-",,"~
lur!3sv
47vvllOV 3$'00 UH

l5-i04;'9'::CDI e59775-~~~~~~~
IVF/35V

47ul·-/!OV
B200UH
859775-02.1 8!:3S"g1-04o
47/J,/IOV
/ VFf35V
2000VH
510429-02' 85977,-c;01
~U"/15V
.2Z VF"
51042~-D2<;

1if;~~

510117-025 85971;:-0' ~

85lS97-00~

.?2ur
1".6">/"-'1 I 470 UI-!
510:l7-02S BSC)7'75- (\~2i SS')S8f'j;.OO!
.22
4.1 U .. /,5V I 1000 VI-!

u.

329151-009 329151-002 198:249-820 /91212-082OM IT
20...1151<.
ISOPr
OMIT
OMIT
32915;-00'" 329151-002
1972.Ui'-ISO
5/0117-02.0 8S9775-01( 185:l~~
100..1'\.
."22U>/!l5 ....
4.,ur/15"
/OOOUH
21<
,OJ>..
6S0P"
JUMPER 844994- 329151-008 32915"H>03
OMIT
OMIT
859775-016859775-011
135356':'-020
19824"'-66
,OO27uF
50.r...
.Olvr
IOO~
II<
.'2.2" .. 1"35V 14-.7 VFII5V! 1000U"
OMIT
JlIMP!!! 844994
6" 1686-02< 3Z91S'J..ocu 859'775-00$ 85971S-oq '8S3~~
32'!>15H::~ ;:!_2~151-003
100 ........
500.n....
.:22 u~/3>y 4., VF/I1-001
l291SI-009 32915HXl2 19!U"'9-82.D 1912 1::/-050
JOD..(L
1000 VI-!
20Jl5k
75 PI"
.22".4.1 "Vli5"
JUMPER
OMIT
OMIT
844994
329151-009 32'1115HX>2
854528-075
510117· 020 959175-011 953587-<>2.
330
iOO..n..
21<
50 .......
.22U.-/35v 4-" v./ISV IOOOV~
JVMPI"I!
01"\ IT
1972i2'UO OMIT
8"'''' 9!il4 . J!,~151-~ 3291SHWl
Q5~115.·"itP.~5'T15~~* 85358'1'
,"'=
It<
50..0.:
:OOtfl:
'If~uH
:01
.2." ,:;-..
JUMPtR
OMIT
329151-007 321?J15~001
6"'I6SI1-c.:11l 329157-001 1859775- 00) S5977!i-g.g.
JUMPE"R

844994-

100 .....
844994

i

?;~~~~r;W

19f2~~.

p,

8~f;'94

JUMPtR

100';"

844994
100 .....

JlIMP£R

8q.4-SSq.

JUMP!R

844994

J U I1PCR

WOO.n.

IOO~

9~4-

v,'

Soo./\.

100 .....

32915"1-006 3291S1-00~
200-,,IOO.J'L.
329151-005 329151-004
OMIT
OMIT

20 ......

32.915/-<:.02
20

J'-

3291~I-002

.c'£lI.u.

.OOS!iu~

OMIT

69/611<;-024 510116- O'f I

OMIT

,;'SIUG-02! 5/olIe-041

.02:eU~

.0&20,-

OMIT

OMIT

OHIT

OMIT

i

'7" .; 4:"iur-Jlii'v

.2. '2 t)(:"13Sv

4,.'~

urI 15Y

~~-~
IOQOUH

8S'1TS-DOl 859715-0 11 85351J~
_2. 2

u./~v

4.1 V::"!.15V

10DouH

859775-003 859715-0'1 85'587- 0 20

OMlr

.2? url'.1I5~i 4:W'-/"'''1
859175-003 859715-01j

OM/T

IUF/3,V ,~, ... 7 UF!'OV!
859775-00 859775-011 • OM IT

OMIT

w

(j)

.j::.
-'

330~

-[!D- + I C'3 I ~oo°J'f"
..fRiO'l._
... .,O~
8:2K1JTP4/ -illJ- - - - - - - - -.. .
r:---=
o 0

TPI'---+....
'I'~lLO\J

r-Ir
III
0""

0:

II)

Inld

0

WJ
1>1«

1.01 -

(1)0
Id

"'0

0..:::0

W ....

ci~

elll
1.1-

...I

W"

0

0:

"'101
ON

I./J-

1.1..1
0.."

1110

(1)5

W

1.1

ILj

W

0

0::

0

'" III
a "I

1.01-

L&I ....

cr.
NW
ON

WW ....

0

«
-w
ON

W::i
1.01"

Ill::>
0

a."
1115

a..::>

III

Id

Id

4. 4

"'0

~..

PI

TP2--_h
RE'O

TP3

---+-....

CI

aLAe!\.

23

.

Jl

22UF

Pl-IO

HI±..

P 1- 9

>------

PI-3

>- SPE

PI-4 r-?P~
PI-5 ) S PE

PI-8

a3G08!
-001

-002

.

(..8

47uf rov
~2.

Uf 2Sv

PART NO.

r2 PE

REMARKS

8SS77S-021 INTE:RMEDIATE
855775"-0.17 WIOE8AND

PI-19~
>-PI-I >-PI-II >-PH!3

PI-12

>---

BULLETIN NO. 3641-1

------,

IsmD

I CRI

--

~

SPEED LINE I

•..

: CR2

+12V

'>

.

R2E>
I k:

+

I2.V

R21

SPEED LINE 2

220~

+12V

+12V

- --,
SPEED 3
CI

1I

L2

2

-=r~~
C2
'TOP.

J_

I
Q4

EOUALIZER
,
_ _ _ ~_-i

::24J:24
,PO! OliTPUT

-:=

IO~

Cf4
5GUF

RI
If{

R2.3

JO../\..

3

-) PI-IS

+

._____-+ ___-....:"-1 f-....--./'Nv-- -12 V
SPEED LINE

22U •

I

'-_~

+12V

+ CI2

4~5

..A-



-_._~

... 12V

__

I

I

-:=

Figure 6_

Direct Reproduce Board Schematic
Diagram and Component Location

11

cP,\(\\~~~U@.\\f\~,
CC===============:::Jl
,f)J)fl)!i).IiIFJfi)/!A),UW
836083-3TT L-S
'

BULLETIN NO. 3639-1

,------,

-I

I
. C10*·8.2Vdc

C9*

To All Other
Transistors on same
Emitter Follower Board

To
Reproduce
Board

'--~IlfI'-1I!1-M~

Ct*

I

I
.Head
Channel

I

I

EMITTER FOLLOWER BOARD

+6.2Vdc

I
I

I
V

/\
/

/

/

\
/

" Jo

"

PREAMPLIFIER BOARD

r

\

/
\

~

/\
/

\
\

/

/

' ,/

'l/

",

/

,
/"

\/

I
\

I
\~

*THESE COMPONENTS USED ONCE
PER BOARD, FOR ALL CIRCUITS
ON THAT BOARD.

Figure 2. Typical Channel Schematic

-:J 6

C:::=-======== ___

=:J

o_ _ _

BULLETIN 1'40.3639-1

r;--------

,*

i C-8.:*E3~
I ____ _
L
PI

R

At.
2HdW

~~'2 219

;11

~_-~~.-<

J

z +6.0v

+c2
/1JF/35V

~

~--e'---+--<:TIO -

8.2 v

;r 1\

Q2
ZIJ3407

JI'l..

* Used for laboratory model (preamp power supply part no. 836017)

Figure 3. Preamp Power Supply, SchematicOiagram
and Component Location

CC:=:=:==========-==:========:==_w===:=:~====:J

<

BULLETIN NO. 3639-1

-8.~VA

12.1

IOO-'L

EZl)

E3

EI

~

E4 "
£7 v
EIO

£:35

~

E.13 "

Ell

EIG"

E;19o---

-<> EI7

E41

EZ8

1:18

E~I

E42.

E34
E37

E,47

f:-40

£:43
E46

BOARD
PART NO.

E:2.1

E4S

DESCRIPTION

COMPONENTS USED

835856-001

4 ckts

010, all, Q14, and 015

835856·002

7 ckts

03,06,07,010, 011; 014, and 015

835856-003

8 ckts

02,03,06, 07,010, all, 014, and 015

835856-004

14 ckts

01 through 014

835856-005

16 ckts

Q1 through 016

Figure 4. Emitter Follower Board, Schematic
and Wiring Diagram

HOTE:

ALL T'RANS'STORS

£{

lief! ZNSOS7

E2.

SEE: TR8/"E

£:3 >-

m

t;;:TC.H SiDE
... III A~ A'!o M A5 A{,
118 Irt FlIO
COMPONENT SIDE - 8 ' a~ 83 54 85 6i> fS1 8889 BIO

E4>-

PIEIS >-

BOARD PART NO.

DESCRIPTION
PIAG >-

835886-001

Contains 7 circuits by the omission
of those components enclosed in
the dotted lines.

835886-002

Contains 8 circuits by the use of
those compon~nts enclosed in the
dotted lines.

PIBI
PI 82.
PIS3

>>>-

P/a4>P/5S>-

PIS'"

>-

PIB? >PIBB >PIB9 >PI BIO>-

BULLETIN NO. 3639-1

-8.2V

-B.t\l

-s.zv
QIO

Q2.

2 NS087

ZN5087
~6

-tt-PIAI

2NS087

_'V'"'V-_ PI A3

E.S

Ell

62/8

51:310

47..n..

47.n..

47.D...

£5
4.7K

RI7
4.71(

4.7K

R~S

+

E6~

I

e,,"

47

_NFO

+6.0'1

+6.oV

+6.0V

-s.zv

-s.'2V

-S.2V

Q8
2NS087

-_"",fV'-_ PI A 2.

2N5087

E7 >-_...f-I

-_J\AfV'-_

(13 >--e-H

.ale.

PI A9

47-'1..

£Z3

RII

4.71<

4.7/(

E8'l

E14'l

+C&.ov

+&.OV
SEE TRBLE:

IR5 >--

ell.

.01 /IIFD

I +I

Y

CIZ-

'+6.0V

soVI!c.e-

r- -

-S.lV

~E./G

AG

>>----I.--rt--4hl--.sOyec£"
B.'2.V
C9 "
C/O
.01 NFl>

'.'BI~

--r

T

+T

<1.7 ~J:>
.3SV

Q/O
2N5087

_""'-fV'-_ PI A7

E9 >--.-H

1.8""
Ie,7
ISS

r~fo~

I
l EIS

I

244

47
_NFl>

1-

I

Q/G

QIS
2NS087

I

21115087

R'48

PlAID

£47

I E141
+
".7K
I.
I -= 3-~~ I~
-=
~ __ ~_-_---4~-_--=-+-~~~~
NFl)

I
I
I

~A

I

I es

- - - -,

~K

I

182

183
184
1&5

I
I

4:1 MFO •
.35V

~

-':-8.1.V -

I

_,

:I
J

Figure 5. Preamplifier Board, Schematic and
Wiring Diagram (7-8 channel
14-16 channel)

c=============================~J 9 'r

,

835886-0TTL-S

I~~~~%~~

~l[liRlil&@r~j}jl

--8.211'

I'
11

Q9

Q2.

'ZN,~

,.,5087

E:I

E~

"PIIII

g.b

47"'-

'Ol~

~5

4.7K

+

£Z1.

>--1

+ ".Qi(

--8.2V

BOARD PART NO.

DESCRIPTION

Ii:
.3

QIl
2N :SO.i:

Q4'N.';O'i'il

Contains 14 circuits by the omission

835953·001

1:.3

IZ.IZ

R9
4:l.ll..

of lhose components enclosed in the

dotted .lines.

E4-~

Contains 16 circuits by the use of
th~ components enclosed in the
--

Ell

4.1K

>---1

m11l

J..+
RIO

3-31{

835953·002

~PIIlZ.

47-<2...
1211

leG

~

47
-::-MFD

+".01(

-e.zv

dotted lines.

!!

QI.3

Q6

2"'"

ZN5087

ela

E 13

PlA3

>--i'

1

47..1-50 87

E7

gZ447P-£J~

RZJ

So"": 47.iL

1081-

RZZ

3-3K

eZ3
4.7K.

=t

IC4
-=-~l{)

r---- -I

PIAA

I EIS>--,

I

I
I
I
I

I
+ <0-0 V

QI:

z",y;

IL

J

E~ll
-

I

____

BULLETIN NO. 3639-1

- N_O'TE:

-IT---I-'11r-c -zo-"""ov

-S.h

-8.2\/'

ql8

Q2~

2N508?

2"5087

E25

PZAI

R54

PI AS :>:>---c-,..

.0IMFO

PZAI

R7S

47.11-

1i!7.3

RS3

1<75

5.b1< 47n..

4.7K

-I-

£2"1

R1~

:l.3Y..

PIAG

>
Gl7

47n..
1<77

.OIMFD

4.1k

C2..30

''!.
-::-MFO

.0IMfO

- +".0'1

-8.1V

P2fJfO

>

c.'l.,
•01 "'FD

Q20
2N5087
leG,O

fEZ7

P2A'L

y'

I -::-!
T

4.1 MFD.
,5SV
~E:I>-----1I---!I-+"-ov
+- e'2.4·

I 47C

+".oy

ALl. TRPI-JS!$7"Of!!.S
A.reE: 2N6087.

y

4.7 "IF£>.

30V

1 -: - 1
T

+T

~

~E5?'

L--8.ZV
C22.
4.7MFD
.35V

P2A8

47..n..

P/52

PIBI.
PIS:'

~59

4.il(

E28

P'B<\PIBS
PIB€>

-I-

J

est.

.5.31(

PIB7

1°4-

PIB8
PIS9

47
-::-MFO

PIBIO

>--

+."-01/

P'ZSI.

-8.2'>'

,---_-8.I:V

Q22

q30

2\.\5057

2"1S087

Ee9

~--""A~F2113

P2SZ
P283

PZ84

?l8S

P2/!,(,

PZA~

P287
PUiS

1<90

41n..
Rgs

eD

P289
PUIO

e89
4.1K

S •.,K

+

J

£88

3·3v..

e1s
I 4'7

.".MFO

._---- ----- J;!44
3.3K

+r...O\/'

-----,
-8 ..U

QUe,
ZNS087

. , . . - - - _ -8.2"

I

r-----------------,
I

.

I

I
I
I

I
I

1i:91.

-1I.tll

I

Q31

:

ZNS087

ZN5087

~

I £3\
I
I

£15>-

I

3·3K

I

PlIlIO I

R9-j
I
I
:

I
I

J.

I
I

-=

+MV

:

S!£Ec~L;:::~ -- ~~~r:~~~reamplifier Board, Schematic and Wiring
Diagram (28 channel, 32 channel)

:

:

:

11

.
~%:\~V.@~~~f
C==:===============::J:J
:)~\iWll!T7lu) j~\ I~I
835953-0TT L-S

!I}Jli{(Iill@(l~1Y'

E\

ONE INCH - 14 TRACK, WITH EDGE A & B, REPRODUCE LEAD INTERCONNECTIONS
Emitter Follower
Channel
No.
1

Emitter Follower

Board, Item 4, Inputs
Position A

Positio~

E26

Board, Item 4, Outputs
B

.

Position A

Position B

Preamplifier
Board, Item 5, Inputs
Position A

Position B

E6

E7
E27

El

E.8

[9
3

E5

E6

E5

5

E32

E33

E9

7

Ell

E12

E13

9

E38

E39

E3

11

E17

E18

E7

13

E44

E45

El1

B

E23

E24

E15

2

E26

E27

E3

4

E5

E6

E7

6

E32

E33

Ell

8

Ell

E12

El

10

E38

E39

E5

12

E17

E18

E9

14

E4;4

E45

E13

A

E23

E24

EIO
Ell

El2
£13
EI4
[IS

EJ3 Of4~,
(; E4 ~

E15

BULLETIN NO, 3639-1.

A

POSITION

: - - _ C - - i - - - =......

r HI

..--II-t-----IN PUT SIDE

~---+--

@

@ oE27

0(27

W3';E26
0

nl
0

£28(";E2b

ES

EbO';a
oE33

Ell

' E 12 O'~
OE39
EI

g

tri

':£4~

+

'\

l!~ + L.RJ -J- -++(CJ )+

I

\LPOSITION

A

0
H,C> £4

OE33
(:£32-

0

Ell
EI20 GO
EIO

oD'3

"(38

Ell'}

EI~ E~

[43

0

EB,j'ri
..nS:~40 _@

I-

E.37

')E 38

£17,)
3 OE45 EI~P EF

E;,

0

nl
D

GE32

Fb7

OUTPUT SIDE.

®

oE4:;
(;E44

E23,ni

E2.4 0

~+{fTI}-+i'_..J

---Ultu·

COMIII'ONII!.N7'SID&

=

TRPE "'t"iI:4VEi

AI

R4
RS

Ii
D

:z

..

COIofPONENT$1Dt!' ~ 83.59.5.3
INSGIIa" WJ....:s FlCOlII 01'f'0SI7W SIIJE

AS

i
PORTABLE MODEL ONLY

n
i

BULLETIN NO. 3639-1

..
HERD

HI

RI
P.ZEZ

o
o.....§}--+a

litES

l3

ZI
ZS

"-

AZEi!9
A'lEa

7

17

2

AZEZ6.

~

JO

AZ£!tt.

,-{i"<§}--!-I/

A'lE:.1I

'4

,-.""9--1- IS

112£35

18

19

Azel4
r-At.e.38

Z3

27

zz

AZE!?

26

AU41
r--Al'£ZO

r-

At £44

f--. ".23

-.30-

- --@

---AtE'? ...

=-~~~~~~~-~

COMPONENT $IOS

"",r ~4£S.-+;;::::::::;---:l+-;=",

.

/14£1

""'
...._to

....,

....

.........,
.....
'''10
• 5E.'J

oIJsC"/o

'17"
117E:Z•

.47£10

\i--

•.41E' ..lL..._

A2

..7Clt/SIDE

A3

E,7CH.$.J0£

LABORATORY MODEL ONL V

Figure 9. One Inch, 28/32 Track
Reproduce Interconnections

:
836000-3 TTL

BULLETIN NO. 3638-1

REGULATED AC TO DC POWER SUPPLY
GENJiRAL
This bulletin contains complete information on the optional ac to dc power supply unit Contained are
characteristics, operating procedures, theory of operation, maintenance and adjustment procedures, parts
list, and diagrams.
This power supply unit contains the capability of producing, with good regulation, +28 Vdc, from a 110
or 220 Vac source of 47-63 Hz. * The supply being completely solid state in design is composed of one removeable circuit board and one module (heat sink). Proper fusing, reset capabilities, POWER indicator lamp
and ON/OFF POWER switch are all conveniently located on the front panel of the unit. The unit may be
installed in any convenient location but is normally placed beneath the recorder/reproducer tape transport.
A five conductor cable, employing the proper connectors, is provided for installation between the power
supply and the transport +28 Vdc is ran separately from the power supply to the transport for the blower
fan. A power cord is provided for connection between a convenience outlet and the power supply unit.
Refer to the I NSTAlLATION

au LLETI N for information concerning the connection and installation

of this unit.
CHARACTER ISTICS
Input Voltage .

110 Vac or 220 Vac at
47-63 Hz*

Input Current

0-10 amps rms

Temperature

· 5°C to 50°C

Output Voltage

• 28 V dc ± .1 V dc

Output Current

· 0-20 amps continuous

OPERATING PROCEDURES
8.

CONTROLS - The following table 1 lists those operator controls employed with the power supply

unit. For adjustment procedures refer to the maintenance section of this bulletin.
~

TABLE 1. CONTROLS AND ADJUSTMENTS
CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS

LOCATION AND FUNCTION

ON/OFF POWER switch (S'/)

Located on the front- panel of the
unit it controls the application of
·primary power to the entire power
supply.

(Up is ON down is OFF)

C(:===========================:====~I
1
* Mod kit (835496) available for operation from 47-400 Hz.

BULLETIN NO. 3638-1
TABLE 1. CONTROLS AND ADJUSTMENTS (CONT')
CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS

LOCATION AND FUNCTION

Reset Switch (S2)

Located on the front panel of the
unit it provides for reestablishing
the output voltage after the overload protector has detected an
overload condition and the regulator ceases to develop an output.

•

b.
FUSING - The following table 2 lists those fuses employed by their circuit designation, rating
and function. All fuses are mounted on the front of the unit and are easily accessable for checking and
changing.
CAUTION
. Never replace a fuse with one of a higher rating unless
continued operation of the equipment is more important than probable damage. If a fuse burns out immediately after replacement do not replace it a second
time until the fault is located and has been corrected.
TABLE 2. POWER SUPPLY FUSE fUNCTIONS
FUSE
F1

RATING (amp)

FUNCTION

PART NO.

ABC-lOA
(110 V input)

Primary Power

859774-008

ABC-5A
(220 V input)
F2

859774-005

ABC-20A

+28 volt

859774-011

THEORY OF OPERATION
GENERAL - The entire unit consists of an ON/OFF POWER switch Sl, cooling fan, power transformer, bridge rectifier, one regulator module (A2) and one regulator board (A 1). Refer to figures 1 and 2 for
schematic and wiring diagrams. Proper fusing is employed at the input and output oftlie power transformer.
Upon rectification by a full wave bridge a filter network is employed. Power input to the unit is obtained
through J3 and output through J2. +28 Vdc is ran separately to the transport for powering only the transport
blower fan.
.
8.

b. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION - The primary power is applied through Fl and Sl to the primary winding
of power transformer T 1 and to lamp DS 1. The output of the secondary ·winding is rectified by a full-wave
rectifier, on regulator module A2, consisting of diodes A2CR 1 thru A2CR4. The dc output of the rectifier is
filtered by capacitors C 1 and C2 and applied, through fuse F2, to the regulator circuit on regulator board A 1
and to the reset switch.
The voltage regulator circuits on A 1 consist of differential amplifiers A 101 and A 102, regulator A 103
and series regulator A 104. The differential amplifier will provide an output at the collector of A 1Q2

6%\\\J\\~%%\Th
ij~~«[&&(~~LYJ ================::::J:J
Cl

2

j

BULLETiN NO. 3638-1
that is representative of the diHerence between the voltages applied to the bases of transistors A 102 and
A1Q1. The voltage at the base of A102 is set by A1R6 and A1CRl connected across the regulated output. Another voltage divider, consisting of resistors A 1 R9, A 1 R 10 and A 1 R 11, is connected across the
regulated output. The voltage at the base of transistor A 10 1 is set by potentiometer A 1 R 10. When the
power supply is operating normally, the voltage at the bases of differential amplifier A 101 and A 102 will
be equrJl.
Should the output of the regulator vary, a portion of the voltage change will appear at the base of AlA 1.
The voltage at the base of transistor A 102 varies slightly with the output change but not to the extent as
the base of transistor A 1Q 1, due to CR 1. The difference in voltage at the two bases is amplified and directly coupled from the collector of A 102 to the base of series driver A 103. The emitter of A 103 regulates
series regulator A 104 and thus regulates the amount of conduction by each of the series-parallel regulators,
A201 through A206, on the regulator module, A2. This brings the regulated output back to its proper
level.
When a high load or short condition is sensed the output of the regulator goes to zero due to the short
circuit protection feature. During this period the bases of differential amplifier A 101 and A 102 return
to 0 Vdc. When the reset switch, 52, is depressed, regulator board pin H is connected to pin J, discharging
capacitor, C 1. When 52 is released p in A is again connected to pin J applying a positive pu lse to the base
of A 102. The base of A101
goes positive due to the time delay of A lC2. This action establishes the
normal operation of the regulator, producing the proper the proper output voltage.
MAINTENANCE

a.

EOUIPMENT REQUIRED
Tektronix 503 Oscilloscope or Equiv.
Fluke 2800-A Digital Voltmeter or Equiv.

b.
ADJUSTMENTS - These procedures are to be followed for adjustment of the +28 Vdc supply
output. Prior to adjustment, the supply output may be checked at the power and control connector panel,
at the right side of the recorder/reproducer.

Step 1.

Ensure the front panel ring is removed and the chassis and front panel are slid out of the
unit cabinet. Ensure the proper fuses are in place, the proper ac and de cables are connected,
and T1 is wired properly for the proper input voltage (See figures 1 and 2).

Step 2.

Position the ON/OFF POWER switch at the front of the unit, to the ON (up) position.

Step 3.

. Connect a-digital voltmeter between A lTP3 (hi) and A lTP2 (on printed circuit board at rear

of power supply).

Step 4.
c.

Adjust A 1 R10 (on printed circuit board) for a +28 Vdc ±.1 Vdc reading on the voltmeter.

TEST

Step 1.

With all power off visually inspect the power supply (caninet removed), printed circuit board,
and module for loose connections or mountings, dented misshaped, missing, or broken compo-

C:=====:="============::~==='=:===========:~=J 3

BULLETIN NO. 3638-1
nents, foreign material, and signs of overheating.

Step 2.

Check continuity as follows:

HI

La

J2-A

J2C

READING
1K ohms or greater

t

Step 3.

Apply POWER, and in sequence ensure the presence of the following approximate readings
at the indicated points.

Step 4.

HI

La

READING

T1 pin 8

T1 pin 9

34 Vac ±2 Vac

+ side of Cl

- side of Cl

44 Vdc ±2 Vdc

A1TP2

A1TP3

+28 Vdc

A1TP1

A1TP3

+21 Vdc

A1TP5

A1TP3

+21 Vdc

A1TP4

A1TP3

-17 Vdc

A1TP6

. A 1TP3

-16 Vdc

Connect oscilloscope between A lTP3 (hi) and A 1TP2 (Io) and ensure ac ripple is less than
100 mVp-p.
PARTS LIST
Power Supply 28 Vdc 835564

Unit #2 - Power Supply
*B1
C1
C2
DSl

C3
C4
CRl

MPl
MP2
Q1

822087

859774-011

691975-035

J2

836077-004

T1
XFl

510225

J3

854725

XF2

812299
812299

03
04

852738
853533
851271

R7
R8

198200-122
198200-122

R9

198200-272

853531

Rl
R2

691112-220
198200-103

329151-006
198200-103

854220
(for 03)

R3
R4

198200-221

Rl0
Rn
R12

855913

847825
(for 04

R5

TP1
thru

835887-007

28 V Regulator Board A 1
Cl
C2

Sl
S2

** F 1
835564
F2
858820-001
J1
691975-035

02

847013
898235
851139-008
851139-016

R6

851264
270445

835563

691112-102
844164
198200-272

198200-470

TP6

852738

• Uses 854549-001 if 47 ·400 Hz Mod Kit 835496 Is used .
•• 110 V input uses a 10 amp fuse, part no. 859774·008
~_
V jOR'Jt
USes
q 5 emp fuse, E~n !.Jp· 859774-005
..
__
.,_________
::J 4

.

c:

::

==-

J

BULLETIN NO. 3638-1
PARTS LIST (CONT')
28 V Regulator Module A2 835560
CRl
thru

835558
853507

825575

MP2
01
thru
06

Rl

897583

835558

thru
R6

859759

CR4
El
thru
E12
MP1

47-440 Hz Input Mod kit 835496
Batac
B1

r

854538-001
854549·001

5

r--------- --- -------------1
II

I

RI

I
I

.IJL JW

Ai!.

I

I

<>1

40'-51

I

I

6.5" .... 0

I

Ai!.

I
I

I

I
I

I
I
I

I
I

I
I
I

J 3-1

Jr~

-,

~(-------------------

I-

I
I

I I
I I

"- ......

I I
I

BI

I I
I I
I I

FA"

+

crl F~

I

"- .....

....

1

~3,.so0t1F

.sov

+

I

I
I

I

I I
I !
I I
I I

I

4----I

I r
I I

POWf-A

ZOR

C2.

23,SOOt./F

.soV

I I
I I
I I

rl;~

I'

-W-;;:-;'

rO/

':..~U,:/~.V:~c.

r----;--=--=--=--=-=~=_€L_ ~
I

- - - -----'I

----r - - -

~ -~

cR3

LC

-001

//~

,0£

Ai
835S'h3

,

\ ,0:

J

~~/

B-SSSS7-o07

) 01,)1

~-----JZ-I!.

,-----J,-C

.. .t
Z.7D 44S

.

...'"

..... ,.
......
.!..!.J..

.!.

'"

u

..~ .,.,

~

~

m
4-,4":)-001
'WJRE. AS SHOWN IN DoT"T£D I-INJE:S.
oPLAAr/oH
usE 10AMP 8S"!')77-4--oo9.
OPERATION
USE 5}.MP 13SS774--o0S.

...

~# tj

DSI
81Z.L99

~

. WfA,£

tOGA.

®

@

.

51

8 ...... 087

Figure 2. Power Supply
Wiring Diagram

(

9

BULLETIN NO. 3637-1

DC TO DC CONVERTER

GENERAL
J

This bulletin contains complete information on the de to de converter assembly, A6. Contained are
characteristics, operating procedures, theory of operation, maintenance and adjustment procedures, parts
list, and diagrams.
The primary function of this assembly is to convert the +24 Vdc or +28 Vdc (two ranges) input to the
recorder/reproducer into regulated outputs of ±12 Vdc and +5 Vdc.
The entire assembly consists ofa transformer, filter and bridge rectifier networks, and two printed circuit boards; regulator board and driver board. The assembly, especially the printed circuit boards, are
aceessable by opening the left side door of the recorder/reproducer.
CHARACTERISTICS
+24 Vdc range ±2 Vdc
+28 Vdc range ±2 Vdc
both at 8 amps max.

Input . . . .

Output
12 Vdc.

12±.1 Vdc at 4 amp max.

5 Vdc .

5±.25 Vdc at 3 amp max.

OPERATING PROCEDURES
CONTROLS - The only operator co~trol is the inp.ut voltage range switch at the lower portion of
the assembly, accessable by opening the left side door of the recorder/reproducer. With +28 Vdc input to
the recorder/reproducer this switch should be set to the 28 volt position and with +24 Vdc input it should
be set to the 24 volt position. For adjustment procedures, refer to the maintenance section of this bulletin.

a.

CAUTION
When switching input voltage ranges always remove power.
b.
FUSING - The only fuse encorporated with this assembly is F 1, located below the input voltage
range switch at the lower portion of the assembly. F 1, an AGX-8A (part no. 510279-004), fuses the input
voltage to the entire assembly. Note, a spare fuse is found in the spare fuse holder at the top of the assembly.
THEORY OF OPERATION

a.
GENERAL - The entire de to de converter assembly, A6, consists of the regulator board A2
(835682), driver board A 1 (835684i, range switch S 1, output transformer T 1, bridge rectifier assemblies.
CR 1 and CR2, and filter networks of L 1 through L3 and C1 through C3. Briefly the converter functions

:: :

BULLETIN NO. 3637-1
by changing the input dc voltage to ac and applying it through a step-down transformer and driver circuits
to rectifiers and filters, producing an output of ±12 Vdc and +5 Vdc.
CI RCUIT DESCRIPTION - The input dc voltage is applied through TB 1-1 (hi) and fuse F 1 to
b.
regulator board A2, at P1-C and D. This voltage is applied to a multivibrator circuit consisting of A2Q1
and A202, and associated circuitry. The multivibrator output, a square wave with its symmetry adjustable
by potentiometer A2R6, is applied through emitter followers A203 and A204 to a push-pull amplifier,
A205 and A206. This circuit amplifies the square wave to present an output from the regulator board,
P1-A and B, of approximately 27V POp. This square wave output is applied to the driver board, A 1, through
P1-K and L, to step-down transformer A 1T1. The outputs at the secondary windings of A 1T1 are applied
to push-pull amplifiers A 101 and A 102, and A 103 and A 104. The amplified output of the driver board,
at P1-E and F, is applied to the primary ofT1. One secondary ofT1 is rectified and filtered to provide +12
Vdc at W1 and -12 Vdc at W3. The other secondary is rectified, filtered, and divided to provide +5 Vdc at
the + si de of C3.
The regulator capability of the converter is provided by reference amplifier A208 and associated circuitry. The reference amplifier, A208, will provide an output at the collector that is representative of the
change in the output of the bridge, CR 1, or the dc output of the converter. The change is sensed by
resistors R 13, R 16 and R 17 which develop the voltage at the base of A2Q8. R 16, output voltage adjust,
is used to vary the voltage applied to the base of A208, thus varying the output from the converter.
Should the output of the regulator vary due to load, A208 and associated circuitry senses the variation
and amplifies the difference. The amplified difference is applied to the base of A2Q7, regulator driver,
and either aids or hinders its conduction. The output of A2Q7 determines the amount of conduction by
4105 and A 106, controlling the amount of voltage drop across these transistors. This effectively controls
'the voltage to the primary of T 1 and the output of the converter.
MAINTENANCE
a.

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Tektronix 503 Oscilloscope or Equiv.
Fluke 8100-A Digital Voltmeter or Equiv.

b.

ADJUSTM ENT

Step 1.

Ensure all power is off. Open the left side door of the recorder/reproducer and locate the dc
to dc converter assembly.

Step 2.

Place the regulator board on its extender, ensure the range switch is positioned properly
according to the input Voltage, and apply POWER.

Step 3.

Monitor, with an oscilloscope, the collectors of transistors A201 and A202, and adjust balance potentiometer R6 for the best possible square wave (least ripple).

Step 4.

Connect a dc voltmeter to W1 (hi) and W2 (10) (terminals W 1, 2, and 3 are located at the top
of the assembly across from the spare fuse and are arranged in descending order, W3 at the
top). Adjust output voltage adj, R 16, for a reading of 12 Vdc ±.1 Vdc.

c================~ 2

BULLETIN NO. 3637-'

Step 5.

Connect a de voltmeter to W2 (hi) and W3 (10), reading negative voltage, and ensure'3 reading
of -12 Vdc ±.1 Vde.

Step 6.

Connect a de voltmeter to W2 (10) and the + side of C3, and ensure a reading of +5 Vde
±.25 Vde.

C.

J

TEST

Step 1.

With all power off visually inspect the de to dc converter assembly and each associated printed
circui~ board for loose connections or mountings, dented, misshaped, missing or brolten
components, foreign material, and signs of overheating.

Step 2.

Tag and remove all output connections from Wl, W2, W3, and C3(+); and check continuity
as follows:
READING
LO
HI
1 K ohm or greater
TB1-2
TB1-'
1 K ohm or greater
W2
Wl
3 K ohm or greater
W3
W2
10 K ohm or greater
W2
+ side of C3

Step 3.

Replace the output connections to W1, W2, W3, and C3(+}; and place the regulator board,
A2 (pin 835682), on its extender. Apply POWER and, in sequence, ensure the presence of
the foll.owing approximate readings at the indicated points.

HI

READING

LO

TP3

TPl

input voltage of approx imately +24 Vde or +28 Vdc.

TP2

TPl

6.25 Vdc

Step 4.

Remove POWER and place the driver board, A 1 (pIn 835684}, on its extender.

Step 5.

Apply POWER and ensure the following approximate readings.
HI

LO

READING

TP7

TP5

48 V Pop square wave

TP8

TP5

48 V pop square wave

TPl

TP5

28 V p-p square wave

TP4

TP5

3 V pop irregular waveform
with possible spikes to 28 V.

TP6

TP5

Nearly 0 Vde under continuousload

TP2

TP5

28 V POp square wave

TP3

TP5

28 V p-p

squa~e

wave

:oJ 3

Ch.l 9·73

BULLETIN NO. 3637·1

Step 6.

Monitor the output voltages as foli:'''''s and ensure ripple does not exceed 40 mVp-p for the
12 V outputs and 20 mVp·p for tr-? :: '/ output. Refer to step 4, under b. adjustments, and
figure 1 for locations of W1, W2 . \',3: 3nd + side of C3.
LO

OUTPUT

W1

W2

+12 Vdc

W2

W3

-12 Vdc

+ side of C3

W2

+5 Vdc

HI

PA.RT5 LIST
Basic
C1
thru
C3
CRl
CR2
F1
J1

691975-017

854547
510007-002
510279-004
835887-007

AsS€~

:\ly A6

J2
L1

83::B37-007
270175

thru
L4
Rl
51

691112-181
691664

835680
Tl
TB1
Wl
thru
W3
XFl

270449
835055-001
859834-017

835004

Driver Board A6A 1 835684
Cl
MP1
01
thru
06

847013
835593 (for Ql-6)
867618

Rl
R2
R3
R4

844157
897583
897583
6911 i 3-220

Regulator Board A6A2
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
CR1
CR2
CR3
CR4
MPl
MP2
MP3
01

thru
896798
04
896294
05
896478
06
896478
07
691686-027
08
853531
Rl
844510
R2
844510
R3
853531
854220 (for 05, 6) R4
R5
847825 (for 07)
R6
854441·004
R7
(for TPl-3)
R8
854539

851280
851280
853533
854539
691112-102
198200·222
198200-102
198200-332
198200-223
854535-008
198200-223
198200-332

c====================:::=.~:~
Ch.l

9-73

T1
TPl
thru
TP8

270447
855913

835682
R9
RlO
Rll
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
R17
R18
R19
TPl
thru
TP3

198200-102
691113-470
198200-222
198200-222
198200-392
198200-103
198200·102
854535-006
198200-152
691113-221
198200-222
855913

4 CC========~:::::=========='==:=:::====~-J

v, .. w

OP JI+vl

',UM

wIIIINw-

So-IP l

8"5887-00 7

MOUfiTIN<"-

PI.;Ur..

IN

POSITION

SID ...

of "" .. .J.e

'l'IoM

/'

I® © 00000 00 O®®~~
S/t0WN

FoR

fOSI--r ION

./

~0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ®

/'

/"

/"

/'

/'

------ - --- ---

®I~

'[
-,

'"

~

.J

~ -,

..,

W Ij 8nlfl) .... ·oJ'7

Wl. 1 8S.,.'Jf·'A/!£

1'10 l1'3 -004

FuSE.

)lOL-£)Ep'

r
r
m

-I
Z
Z

o
Figure 1. DC to DC Converter Wiring Diagram

IA-Z.- ------

I

8 3S'" 8Z-

o

+l.8V

-rP3

dl-C )I)~~
"0-7 )J.l.=JLJ

.-_-=Jc.o.-'

I

o rPz.
CAl

,,,el.3

1\3

I

IX

r61-~ >-4--------o~

TBI-i.

11$
3.JI(

liS-

,

clIl.

UK

1\9
II'.

C.3;

,,,""4-

I

TBI-I

1\43·31\

.o2UF

I
I
I
L_

/110

47.1\.

Z.W

>----.+------------------------,

_k-=-__-=-_.

rAiI 8'35 ~S4'-I----+----.~I

I

AI
TI

-£

I
I
I
I
I
I

A'
TI

L __.

.• JJ\.
3W

-=

I'tI

JOOJl..
lIZ. W

--- ----' --- ---- --- ---

=

,.,....-

BULLETI N NO. 3637-1

- - -

--- --- --- --- - - --- --- --o

+U!V

,P3

--------t-------+.--------.--RI

o

IK

,Pi!.

/'<'<'

C,

.08'" I
RIS

,'?J4-

.02.UF

III"
500 J\.

f lA-

ZN4/Z4

CII4IN e1.3

Cl +
l.ZUF

lOY

Rf7
f.SK

d,-Ii't
4+1211

-,}+5V

- - - - - - - - - . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --<=>-.......

I
I

·n7lS

I
I

'§),p t
13)15

I
I
I

o

./..11.
3W

I

III
100.A.

Ill. W

'--.~
. . <. .:--~i

-

-

-

--'

---'

-~.~

-1

Figure 2. DC to DC Converter
Schematic

BULLETIN NO. 3633-1

EDGE A/B RECORD/REPRODUCE

•

GENERAL
This recorderlreproducer, with the edge AlB record/reproduce option, has the capability of recording
and reproducing both voice commentary and time code signals, simultaneously. Actual recording and
reproducing of the voice commentary is independent of which operate mode (Record or Reproduce) the
machine is in. Time code signals are handled much the same as data signals. RECORD must be activated
to record time code signals.
Each individual component of the edge A/B record/reproduce feature for this machine is an option. A
full complement of components would consist of the following five principle assemblies:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Edge AlB Record Board
Reproduce Board (used for reproducing voice and time code signals)
Microehone
Head Set
Remote Speakerl Amplifier Enclosure

CHARACTERISTICS

a.

EDGE A/B RECORD BOARD

1.

Bias
Bias Input level .
Bias Frequency

2.

1Vp-p min.
, 8.4 MHz

-,

Voice Circuitry
Voice fnput Level (from microphone)
Voice Input Impedance . .
Voice Frequency Range , .
Voice Output Level (to head)
Voice Circuits Power Requirements.

C"====:======================~3-

....

,

10mVrms min.
• 47K Ohm
300 Hz to 3kHz
50 rna p-p bias with
3 rna p-p voice +12Vdc±.lVdc at 70 ma
--12Vdc±.lVdc at 60 rna

1 r:==:==========Ch==,
6-7==3::::::::JI ~I~i~~

BULLETIN NO. 3633-1
CHARACTERISTICS (cont'd)
3.

Time Code Circuitry
Time Code Input Level

100 mVrms min. with
a range of .1 to 1 Vrms

Time Code Input Impedance
Time Code Frequency Range

20K max.
IRIG B Signals-l00 Hz
to10kHz
50 ma p-p bias with
5.5 ma p-p time code

Time Code Output Level (to head)

b.

VOICE REPRODUCE BOARD
Input Signal Level (from Head)
Input I mpedance (to Head). .
Ouput Signal Level . . . . .
Output I mpedance (to Speak-Amp Encl.)
Frequency Response
Power Requirement

c.

SPEAKER/AMPLIFIER ENCLOSURE
Loudspeaker Power Output

Headphone Power Output
(Phone Plug inserted in J2)

Power Requirements
Temperature Range.

d.

1 mVrms min.
150 Ohm
1 Vrms
2.5 K Ohm Max.
300 Hz to 3 kHz
+12 Vdc ± .5Vdc
. -12 Vdc ±.5Vdc

Approximately 2
Watts min. across
·45 Ohm load
Approximately 0.05
Watts min. across 2
K Ohm load power.
28Vdc @ 250 ma
Max. Continuous.
O°F. to 130°F.

MICROPHONE
Element Type
Amplifier Voltage Gain
Frequency Response
Battery . . . . .

Ceramic
o to 15 db
300 Hz to 3 kHz
7 Volt

OPERATING PROCEDURES
a.

OPERATOR CONTROLS AND ADJUSTMENTS

1.
RECORD - The following table lists the controls and adjustments associated with the microClone and record board of this feature. For adjustment procedures refer to the maintenance section of
this bulletin.

cc===:=========::=:=========~~ 2 cc:=====~=======================~

BULLETIN NO. 3633-1
TABLE 1. RECORD BOARD AND MICROPHONE CONTROLS
CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT

.

LOCATION AND FUNCTION

On/Off Pushbutton

Located on side of microphone, this control applies the voice signal and bias signal to the board
(annotate feature).

Volume

Located at top rear of microphone, this control
determines the output signal level from the
microphone.

A/B Track Selection Switch (S1)

Located on the side of the edge A/B board, this
switch selects either track A voice and track B
time code or track A time code and track B voice.

Voice Bias Adj (R2)

Located on the lower front of the edge A/B board,
this adjustment controls the input bias level to the
voice record circuitry.

Voice B!as Tune (C5)

Located on the side of the edge AlB board, this
control provides adjustment for maximum power
transfer between bias driver (voice circuitry) and
the load (head).

Time Code Bias Adj (R22)

Located on the upper front of the edge A/B board,
this adjustment controls the input bias level to the
time code record circuitry.

Time Code Bias Tune (C22)

Located on the side of the edge AlB board, this
control provides adjustment for maximum power
transfer between bias driver and load (head).

Time Code Rec Adj (R22)

Locate on the upper front of the edge AlB board,
this controls provides adjustment of the record
current (time code signals) applied to the head.

2. REPRODUCE - The following table lists those controls associated with the voice reproduce
board and speaker/amplifier.
~

TABLE 2. REPRODUCE BOARD AND SPEAKER-AMP CONTROLS
CONTROL
Volume (RS)

Volume'tRl)

FUNCTION
Located directly on voice reproduce board, this
control determines the output signal level from
the board.
Volume control Located on Speaker/Amp enclosure,
, this control determines the v.olume of the reproduced
signal at the Speaker/Amplifier input .
..

BULLETIN NO. 3633-1

b.

VOICE/TIME CODE OPERATING PROCEDURES

1.

RECORD

Step 1.

Ensure the edge AlB record board is positioned properly in the record chassis. Refer to
the proper record chassis wiring diagram and/or bulletin.

Step 2.

The
, microphone plug is inserted into one of the following jacks, dependent on the listed
situations.
(1) Standard portable models only- plug into the IN VOICE jack on the record connector
panel.
(2) Standard laboratory models only- plug into the VOICE A/B jack on the record connector panel (rear of record chassis).
(3) Standard portable or laboratory models with a speaker/amplifier enclosure- plug into
the I N VOICE jack on the speaker/amplifier enclosure.
To record time code signals or other compatible signals, connect the time code source
(normally a BNC connector) to one of the following connectors, dependent on the listed
situations.
(1) Standard portable models only- connect to J 16, labeled' N EDG E track, on the record connector panel.
(2) Standard laboratory models only- connect to J15 on the record connector panel.

Step 3.

Place the A/B Track Selection switch (S 1), located on the side of the edge A/B record
board, in the desired position (edge track B not normally available on one half inch heads).
VOICE A indicates voice will be recorded on track A and time code, if applicable, on
track B. VOICE B indicates voice on B and time code on A.

Step 4.

Place the recorder/reproducer into the desired operate mode at the correct speed. When recording time code signals the RECORD pushbutton must be depressed.

Step 5.

Set the microphone volume/gain control (located on the microphone) to 6 initially. This
should produce approximately 100 mVrms at VOICE REC LEV testpoint, TP1; if not,
readjust to obtain this level. With the microphone approximately 8 inches from the mouth,
depress the pushbutton and speak into microphone at a normal level. This level may need
resetting as determined on reproducing or to compensate for a weak battery.

Step 6.

The voice record level on the voice record circuitry is set at the factory and requires no
operator adjustment. When recording time code signals ensure a 100 mVrms reading at
the TIME CODE REC LEV testpoint, TP2, located on the front of the board. Adjust
TIME CODE REC ADJ, R17, if necessary to obtain 100 mVrms.

=========.=-=.=-=.====~

4

cc=======================

BULLETIN NO. 3633-1
2.
REPRODUCE-Reproducing voice and/or time code signals is detailed in the following paragraphs, dependent on the situation.
(a) STANDARD PORTABl.E MODELS-Track selection for reproducing is obtained by the placement
of the voice reproduce board in the reproduce chassis. With the board plugged into EDG E A, J 15, Track A
is employed. With the board plugged into EDGE B, J16, Track B is employed. Note that a one-half inch
J
tape system normally does not have a Track B. 80th J 15 and J 16 are phone jacks. If a BNC output is required a phone jack to BNC adapter is supplied in the accessory kit. This adapter is to be used only in
reproducing. If both tracks A and B are to reproduce simultaneously an optional voice reproduce board
must be employed. Check jumper placement, as desired, in Table 3.

Step 1.-

If the speaker-amplifier enclosure is supplied, ensure the voice power cable is inserted into
the VOICE POWER jack on the power connector panel.

Step 2.

Insert the speaker-amplifier (or head set) phone plug into the proper phone jack. Use J15
if voice is recorded on edge track A or J16 if voice is recorded on edge track B. If time code
signals were recorded on edge track A the reproduced signal would be available at phone
jack J15. Iftime code signals were recorded on edge track 8 the reproduced signal would
be available at phone jack, J16. All of the previously listed connections in step 2 are made
on the Reproduce Connector Panel.

Step 3.

Place the machine in the desired operate mode at the same speed at which voice or time
code signals were recorded.

Step 4.

Adjust the reproduce board VOLUME and, if applicable, the speaker-amplifier VOLUME,
for an adequate playback level.

(b) STANDARD LABORATORY MODELS-Track selection is obtained by the placement of the
voice reproduce board in the reproduce chassis. With the board plugged into J15 (third slot from endsingle or double chassis) track A is employed. With the board plugged into.J16 (second slot from the endsingle chassis) or J 15 (third slot from the second chassis end-double chassis) track B is employed.

Step 1.

Ensure the speaker-amplifier voice power cable is connected to the VOICE POWER jack
on the reproduce connector panel.

Step 2.

Ensure that:
(1) The time code output, if applicable, is connected to external equipment as desired.
(2) The voice output is connected to the speaker-amplifier.

Step 3.

If the headset is to be used, connect it to the phone jack on the front speaker-amplifier.

Step 4.

Place the machine in the desired operate mode, at the same speed voice or time code was
was recorded at.

Step 5.

Adjust the reproduce board VOLUME and speaker-amplifier VOLUME for an adequate
playback level.

BULLETIN NO. 363~·1
c.
MICROPHONE BATTERY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE-To replace the battery of the M+2U.
microphone complete the following steps:

Step 1.

Place microphone face down on a clean surface, possibly on a bench cloth to prevent
scratches to case.

Step 2.

•

Step 3.

Slowly remove the back of the microphone case, making sure the circuit board, with the
volume control, remains in the front section of the case.

Step 4.

Carefully pull the battery from the battery holder, while holding down on the circuit board.

Step 5.

Place a new Malloi)' TR-175 7 volt battery, or equivalent, into the battery holder, observing
correct polarity.

Step 6.

Carefully reverse the disassembly steps. Be sure the cable wires loop around the battery
when the back is placed in position.

Carefully remove the four screws securing the back.

THEORY OF OPERATION
The entire edge A/B option consists of the microphone, edge A/B record board, voice reproduce board,
and speaker/amplifier enclosure. The following theory of operation covers all available options for this
feature.
The microphone assembly consists of a ceramic element, a two stage amplifier, a volume control and
~nd on/off pushbutton annotate switch. This assembly may be used to record voice on edge A or B, and
possible on a data track.
The edge A/B record board consists of two separate record circuits, voice and time code. Each circuit
consists of a bias driver, signal driver, and adding circuit. The following functional description concerns
the voice record circuitry. With the pushbutton on the microphone depressed, the voice signal from the
microphone, is fed to the edge AlB record board. Also as this pushbutton is depressed, relay K1 is activated providing +12 Vdc to the bias board and ±12Vdc to the voice record circuits. This feature (annotate)
enables voice annotation of pre-recorded tapes. With the bias board activated during this voice annotate
period, a bias signal is fed into the voice record circuits at Pl-21. This bias signal is applied through
VOICE BIAS ADJ, R2, to emitter follower 01. 01 provides current gain for push-pull amplifier 02 and
03, via transformer T1. Coupling transformer T2 is used for impedance matching between the voice record
circuits and the head. The voice signal (during the annotate period) enters the edge AlB record board
through P1-15. The voice signal amplifier consists of 04 and 05 with an ac Voltage, proportional to the
record current, provided at TPf. The current into the head is determined by the input voltage at P1-15,
which is adjustable by the volume control on the microphone. The ae voltage at TP1, suggested for optimum voice recording, should be adjusted for approximately 100 mVrms. This voltage is also available
at P1-20 for use with external monitoring equipment.
The voice adding circuit, used to combine the bias signal current and voice signal current, consists of L 1,
C4, C5, L2, and C7. L1 and C4 are series resonant at the bias frequency. This filter-circuit is utilizied to
leduce harmonics, of the bias frequency, passing the head. Parallel resonant filter, C7 and L2, is used to
t>revent bias from entering the voice signal amplifier stage.

BULLETIN NQ. 3633-1
THEORY OF OPERATION (cont'd)
L2 also provides a low impedance path to the head for the voice signal current. VOICE BIAS TUNE, C5,
is used to tune the secondary of transformer T2 to the particular edge track being used. This adjustment
provides for maximum power transfer between the voice record circuits and the head. Diode CR2 rectifies
the bia's signal providing a dc indicating voltage used to adjust CS.
The following explanation pertains to the time code record circuitry. The bias driver and signal adding
circuits of the time code record section function identically to the bias and adding circuits of the voice
record circuitry, previously explained. Note that the RECORD mode must be activated to ensure a bias
signal to the time code bias driver circuit. The time code signal record circuits function much the same as
the voice signal record circuits with the addition of the TIME CODE REC ADJ, R22. The signal driver is
comprised of a two stage amplifier,. Q9 and Q 10, with the current to the head determined by R22, at the
input of the amplifier. The ac voltage, proportional to the head current, at TP1, suggested for optimum
time code signal recording, should be adjusted, by R22, for 100 mVrms. This voltage is also available at
Pl-2 for use with external monitoring equipment.
The outputs of both the voice record circuits and the time code record circuits are routed through the
A/B TRACK SELECTION SWITCH, Sl, to the head.S1 provides either voice recording on track A and
ttme code on track B, or time code on track A and voice on track B.
On reproducing the signal passes from the reproduce head through the pre-amplifier and into the voice
reproduce board located in the reproduce chassis. The signal is amplified by Aland passes through RB,
output level control (VOLUME).
The amplified reproduced signal enters the speaker/amplifier (when supplied) through P-2 and is applied
to R 1, VOLUME control. R 1 controls the level of the signal being fed into the power amplifier board. On
the amplifier board R 1, R2, and R3 provide the necessary DC bias for Q1. The signal is amplified by Q 1
and applied to the base of Q2 where it is amplified again and applied to the push-pull amplifier Q3 and Q4.
RS and R6 provide a negative feedback circuit which determines the overall gain of the amplifier.
The power amplifier applies the amplified voice signal through the normally closed contacts of J2 to the
10uspeaker.H the head set phone plug is inserted into J2 the signal to the louspeaker is interrupted and
applied to the head set. A resistor in parellel with the head set provides the proper impedance match to the
amplifier.
MAINTENANCE
When maintenance becor:nes necessary the following procedures will assist in locating the malfunction.
Failure to obtain the proper test indication is a clue to a particular malfunction. These procedures make
no attempt to be a complete troubleshooting guide.
AU adjustments contained herein pertain to normal machine operation. Although these adjustments are
performed at the factory the need for their re-adjustment may be evident for correct machine performance.
a.EQUIPMENT REQUIRED - The following equipmentis required for those maintenance procedures'
set forth in this section. In the event of deeply involved maintenance or repair, more advanced equipment
may be employed.
(

BULLETIN NO. 3633-1
MAINTENANCE (cont'd)
Simpson Model 260 YOM or equivalent
HP Model 200 CD Signal Generator or equivalent
HP Model 400 E VTVM or equivalent
HP Model 411 RF Millivoltmeter or equivalent
Tektronic 503 Oscilloscope or equivalent
b.

EDGE AlB RECORD BOARD TEST PROCEDURES

Step 1.

With the edge AlB record board removed from the recorder/reproducer, and its shield re-moved, visually inspect it for loose connections or mountings, dented, misshaped, or broken.components, foreign material, and signs of overheating.

Step 2.

Mount the edge AlB record board on the extender board and insert the microphone plug
into the phone jack on the record connector panel.

Step 3.

_Depress POWER, STOP, and the microphone pushbutton, and ensure the presence of the
following readings and conditions.
+12 Vdc at pin X2 of relay K 1
-12 Vdc at pin A2 of relay K1
Ground at TP5
Approx. 1Vp-p bias signal at 8.4 MHz at R 1, with TP5 grounded

Step 4.

Short the + side of C8 and C16 to TP5, ground.

Step 5.

Monitor the signals individually at VOICE BIAS TUNE MONITOR, TP3, and TIME CODE
BIAS TUNE MONITOR, TP4, with a YOM.

Step 6.

Adjust VOICE BIAS TUNE C5 (TP3) and TIME CODE BIAS TUNE C22 (TP4) individually for maximum dc voltages.

Step 7.

Adjust VOICE BIAS ADJ R2 and TIME CODE BIAS ADJ, R 17, for 2 Vrms at TP3 (R2)
and TP4 (R17). Readjustment may be necessary upon observation of reproduced signal.
Bias should be adjusted for maximum level of reproduced signal.

Step 8.

Remove the short between the + side of C8 and TP5, and connect the signal generator to
these two points.

Step 9.

Adjust signal generator for 10 mVrms at 1 kHz.

Step 10.

Connect the VTVM between VOICE REC LEV TP1 (hi) and GND TP5 (10).

Step 11.

Ensure a reading of approximately 100 mVrrns.

Step 12.

Remove the signal generator connections and replace the short between the + side of C8
and TP5.

Step 13.

Remove the short between the + side of C 16 and TP5 and connect the signal generator to
these two points.

Step 14.

Adjust signal generator for 100 rnVrms at 1 kHz.

§I\K\~WIlJ~~~
~ail~~~~~1}W) c::

=: ,. ------':-:-::--=:J

8

CC=:::=========::==::::===="====·===::1:1

BULLETIN NO. 3633-1
MAINTENANCE {cont'd}

Step 15. Connect a VTVM between TIME CODE REC LEV, TP2 (hi) and GND, TP5 (10).
Step 16. Ensure a reading of approximately 100 mVrms. Adjust TIME CODE REC LEV ADJ, R22, to
obtain this reading.
Step 17. Increase the signal generator output level to approximately 1 Vrms and ensure the capability
of obtaining 100 mVrms at TP2, by adjustment of R22.
Step 18. Set R22 for 100 mVrms at nearest the anticipated time code input level.
c.

VOICE REPRODUCE BOARD TEST PROCEDURE

Step 1.

With voice reproduce board removed from the recorder/reproducer, visually inspect it for
loose connections or mountings, dented, misshaped, missing, or broken components, foreign
material and signs of overheating.

Step 2.

Apply povver after the following connections are made.
a.

Connect +12 Vdc lead to R5.

b.

Connect -12 Vdc lead to R6.

c.

Connect signal generator output to R 1 (hi) and board ground.

d.

Connect a 1.8 K Ohm resistor across the swinger of R8 and ground, output of board.

e.

Connect Hi of vtvm to swinger of R8 and Lo to ground.

f.

Connect oscilloscope across output (1.8K resistor).

Step 3.

Adjust the signal generator output to 1 mVrms at 250 Hz.

Step 4.

Adjust volume control R8 between upper and lower limits. The output should be undistorted
and range frOm 0 volts {R8 full clockwise) to about 1 Vrms (R8 full counterclockwise).

d.

SPEAKER/AMPLIFIERENCLOSURE TEST PROCEDURES

Step 1.

Visually inspect the chassis and amplifier board for loose connections or mountings, dented,
misshaped, missing, or broken components, foreign material and signs of overheating.

Step 2.

Ensure the following ohmic measurements between the indicated points, being sure to observe
correct polarity~

BULLETIN NO. 3633-1
MAINTENANCE (cont'd)

Step 3.

Ensure connection of power cable to chassis and apply power (+28 Vdc) through J5A and
P3A.

Step 4.

Insert head set phone into J2.

Step 5.

Connect signal generator to P2 (Hi and Lo), and adjust fora 1 Vrms 1 kHz signal.

Step 6.

By adjusting R 1, an undistorted signal of 10 Vrms should be obtained.
PARTS LIST
854950
856635

Dual Headset
Microphone

A4A 1 Voice Amplifier Board 855078

A4 Speak-Amp Enc!. 854521
F1
XF1
J1
J2
LS1
R1
R2

Cl
C2
C3
C4
CRl
01

821618
812299
853631
855129
855339
843680
691113-680

691391-038
851139-015
691391-038
851139-015
93240
853037

02
Q3
04
Rt
R2
R3

853532
853533
853532
853530-336
853530-335
853530-246

R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9

896613
853530-101
853530-212
896196
844323
898314

A20A 16 Voice Reproduce Board 856772
510020·043
. 510020-031
510020-127
510020-059
510020-023
855121
691391-002
691686-015
691686-011
691391-012
197212-004
859843

R1
R2,R4
R3
R5,R6
R7
R8
Cl
C2
C3
C4,C5
C6
Al

A19A 16 Edge AlB Record Board 835661
...

C1
C2

C3
C4
C5

859959-001
859959-001
197212-027
197212-050
850862

C6
C7
C8
C9
C10

859959-001
854528-075
859959-002
691391-017
691391-004

Cl1
C12
C13
C14
C15

859959-001
691391-030
859959-001
859959-001
197212-027

C16
C17
C18
C19
C20

859959-002
691391-017
691391-004
691686-030
854528-075

BULLETIN NO. 3633-1

A 19A 16 Edge AlB Record Board 835661
C21
C22
C23
'C24
C25
C26
C27
CRl
thru
CR4
K1
L1
. L2
L3
L4

197212-050
850862
859959-011
mayor may
not be present
859960-001
859959-001
844510

855130-002
853587-029
853587-028
853587-029
853587-028

Pl
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
010
R1
R2
R3
R4

853518
510018
510076
510076
859971
859970
510018
510076
510076
859971
859970
198200-101
854535-008
198200-470
198200-152

R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
Rl0
Rl1
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
R17
R18
R19

198200-100
198200-472
198200··103
198200-222
198200-473
198200-272
198200-680
198200-152
198200-470
198200-470
198200-681
198200-101
854535-008
198200-470
198200-152

R20
R21
R22
R23
R24
R25
R26
R27
R28
R29
*R30
Sl
Tl
thru
T4

198200-100
198200-472
854535-011
198200-103
198200-681
198200-220
198200-152
198200-101
198200-103
198200-222
See Table 3
510277
510015-001

*Used oflly on 1/2 inch heads.
TABLE 3. EDGE AlB RECORD BOARD CONFIGURATIONS
PART NO.

RESISTOR R30

JUMPER

CONFIGURATION

835661-001

Not Used

A to A, B to B, C to C

Voice and Time Code, 1 inch

835661-002

1 K ohm, 870037

A to A, B to B, C to C

Voice and Time Code, 1/2 inch

835661-003

Not used

Not Used

Voice only, 1 inch

835661-004

1 K ohm, 870037

Not Used

. Voice only, 1/2 inch

NOTE

If voice recording only is desired the jumpers (Table 3) should always
be removed to prevent accidental erasure of voice by the time code
circuitry during RECORD mode. If time code recording is cfesired
either with or without voice, the jumper should always be present.

======================:33

c:r

11

="::===--============::=JI ~I~~~

C:::I

.

BULLETIN NO. 3633-1

FROM

IRE~E

REPRODUCE
HEAD

AZOAl7JI5-KJ
TRACK A

A2Q417~6-1O
TRACKB

A2OAIN!5-9

C2

.oat--

I
R.

??
11
it" "i;~~uI
DUAL
HEADSET

R2

C6 47

I

Cl

F~

<:.PI-1Sl.".

PEAKER -AMPLIFIER
OR
REMOTE CHASSIS

,

BOARD

4.712OV

OR
A2OAI7J16 - 9

ENCLOS""'

I

I

HEADSET

OUT

f!4

t

47
l'!6

-12V~-6V
-

-600

1

IN

..LC5

!C 22

"r=~:"
- :p;V
~-

RS
10K

tLC4

f]

r

11

- OR
________________
=.;.OAf7.N6-17
A2

ACOAI?JI6-/B

--

,!2e:DC,

fl-;;

A2
(:WMS-18
TRACKA OR

-AZ0AI7:'-5-17

---- -

I

TRACKS

----

A.J5A
T82-2

P3A

RI
93.1K

C3

047

I

R4
10K

+_

I

-=-

~~

em

r -__~~'~~45~______~__+~'

R2

9O.9K

RG

4.75K

01

R7

22

04

2N2905

2N~904

B

RS
1.2K

AMPLIFIER BOARD

P3H

REPROOUCE
CONNECTOR

PANEL

17>_2_-4..-+-_ _ __

_______ ____________

~3H.

Figure 1. Reproduce Board and Speak/Amp, Schematic Diagram

C=:=C====_:====================:J='~ 12 C[=:============================-:=:====:=::~:J
870887-1M

BIAS IN

+

AI

lloy

,oo~

c.W

NOTE'
ALL VALUES ARE IN OHMS OR MICROFARADS
UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.

lot

AZ

z.K

VOICE

1.

BIAS

A3

ADJ.

C.I

jMiCROPHON~

I

+12v

I

MIKE

I

"'7~

':'

.o'()F

11+
ps K

~--~~--~----~.

I

.

10 ....

ell'

'N~I'"

4----f.l.:l.5.+---+------------r

r...-_ _.q _

__~ P¥~H

ce'

jl-

.",

TALK
51

RECORD
CONNECTOR
PANEL

AI.'
JI-2

PI-TIP

)>'A"'15JI.=5~....,JI5"'-'-I."<5<

_I--e-_-'-'''-''T'P"'-'--=8'''OO~Y~:)AI5JI5 I

....

PI-RING

I

PI-15

JI5-5( (PI-5

AI5J15

"'!.-

I

PI-6

ADJ.

IN

1

JI5-;J

.12V

"'8

+7~

RECORD
MODE

Pl.1

L
54''-'---ti

1-

BIAS

ACTIVATED
J15-6

SPEAKER- AMPLIFIER.
OR
REMOTE CHASSIS
'----'E=N=C~L0~U_..:.R.:..:E,----,

An

z."

TIME
.cODE

<:.1"

H---{§}''-'

:-

s

.OJuI'

lo-

B

C.R3

IIZI

(]--------+----~.-~---------~
IN 91+

Pf-;J

+.7K

c

Pl·6

i
TIME CODE
RECADJ.

BULLETIN f'lO. 3633-1

~-TP3

A7
10K

cs
S-3SPF
.".

VOICE BIAS
TUNE
Cl
,sPF

I-~

.... 7uk
-1.aV

TP1

/113

o

-+1~
e/~

e~

/lID

P1-20 TO VOICE VU METER

luT'

111447~

Z_7K

PI-14 A

.".

r----O:--I-----~

ce

II

./IJP

119
-+7K

e~

I

1·

..

.oolUF

I-=

tSK

Rle

ell

F

51'"
0/1JF

es

AlB TRACK
SELECTION

$'6 uF

P1-9B

____________~------------------.----+------------~PI-/8
eM·
INS/4-

1-3

ez,

101110.

soPP

IIza

IIZS

10K

Z.ZK

TP4

+

I~V
.IRS

oro
~sc..

DURING
ANNOTATE

cz,
.o/u':

""c.

e

ezz
!J-3SPF

.c.~""
.".

1..+

TIME CODE
BIAS TUNE
&&0

"?s PF

.... 'Uk

<:.1...

o

TO
RECORD
HEAD

P1-10 B
P1-17A

_IZV

CIS

Col"

I

.IUF

IME CODe
ECADJ.

r.·OS6UF

o

3

/ll.l.>o-'''-'---4
zoK
j.

·TP2

7"--1----------------.10---------------4)

P1-2 TO TIMING VU METER

/lil-S

.O/UF

zzIIZ6
'.S-I<

______E_D_G_E_A/B RECORD BOARD

r
+

CI7
S"<,UT'

_J
Figure 2. Edge AlB Record Board and
Microphone, Schematic

~~~

==========::;8;;708;;;8;;:;7-1;:;:;JM'~' ~~
Diagram

13 C!

835661-0TTS

BULLETIN NO. 3642·1

PHOTO END·OF·TAPE SENSE

•

GENERAL
The optional PHOTO END·OF-TAPE SENSE feature is provided to accomplish automatic stop for this
recorder/reproducer, without the use of metallic markers or other devices. This tape sense feature is in addition to the standard tape sense feature (marker strips) utilizing the sense post.
The entire option consists of a sense lamp and a sense detector for each tape reel. Refer to figure 1, below. The sense lamp and detector are positioned such that a full or partly full reel of tape does not allow
the lamp emitted light to pass to the associated sense detector. As the tape becomes unwound from the
reel to a determined amount (approx. 60 to 100 ft. of 1.5 mil tape left) the light passes to the sense detector and activates it. The sense detector when activated energizes the same tape sense circuitry (logic board)
that the standard tape sense feature uses, and all tape movement is stopped.

SENSE

.

DETECTOR~

D..

,
'~ .-SENSE
LAMP

~--------______~~~

Figure 1.

«

== :

:: =

Photo End-Of-Tape Sense, Functional Block Diagram

:.:::::J

1

BULLETIN NO. 3642-1
OPERATING PROCEDURES
a. CONTROLS - The only operator control present is the EaT switch, on the Power and Control Connector Panel (right side of the Recorder!Reproducer). This switch, labeled IN and OUT, energizes or deenergizes the sense circuitry on the Logic Board, (utilized also for the sense post method of tape sense).
The sense lamp~ are lit continuously, independent of the EaT switch .
. b. CHECKOUT - The following checkout procedures are provided for determining the operational
status of the photo end-of-tape sense feature. If satisfactory results are not obtained, refer to the test
and adjustments in the maintenance portion of this bulletin.
Step 1.
Step 2.

Step 3.
. Step 4.

Step 5.
Step 6.

.
Ensure tape is threaded properly and the EaT switch is set to the IN position.
Apply power and ensure that both sense lamps (lower right side of RecordevReproducer)
are lit and no obstructions (except tape on reels) are present between the sense lamps and
sense detectors.
Depress STOP, FORWARD, and FAST, in that sequence.
The Recorder/Reproducer should automatically revert to STOP mode prior to the inner reel
becoming completely empty of tape. There should be approximately 60 to 100 feet, (approximately 1/8 inch tape wrap) of tape left on the inner reel.
Depress REVERSE and FAST.
The Recorder;IReproducer should automatically revert to STOP mode prior·to the outer reel
becoming completely empty of tape. There should be approximately 60 to 100 feet (approximately 1/8 inch tape wrap) of tape left on the outer reel.

,~AINTENANCE

Should the photo end-of-tape sense feature fail to operate properly, the test and adjustment procedures
should be followed. The following areas are of major concern with respect to proper operation of this
feature.
(1) Logic board sense circuitry, including the sensitivity adjustment potentiometer.
(2) Sense lamps, sense detectors, and their alignment.
a. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Simpson 260 VOM or equivalent
b. TEST AND ADJUSTMENT
Step 1.
Step 2.

Step 3.

Gain access to the Logic Board, right rear of RecordevReproducer, by removing the top and
rear access panels. Place the Logic Board on its extender.
Ensure tape is threaded properly, apply POWER, and depress STOP and FORWARD. Cover
the sense detectors with masking tape, or other material, to prevent any light from activating
them. Ensure the EaT switch is set to the IN position.
Connect various resistors, ranging in value from 22 K ohm to 27 K ohm, between logic board
pin J8-7 and system ground. Ensure STOP mode is activated with the application of one of
these values. Ensure with a VOM, the presence of 12 to 14 Vdc at J8-7 when the Recordert
Reproducer reverts to STOP mode. This ensures the logic board sensitivity adjustment is
,

I;

BULLETIN NO. 3642-1
approximately set to a satisfactory level for either forward or reverse. Slight adjustment of
sensitivity adjust, R9, may be required to bring the sense circuitry firing level within the above
resistance ranges, providing the 12 to 14 Vdc. This resistance range, when met should also be
appropriate for the sense post feature of tape sense .

•

Step 4.

Complete the following to determine if the sense lamps are aligned properly. If the conditions
and voltage measurements
below are not obtained, refer to step 5, lamp alignment.
a. Remove the material convering the sense detectors and move tape in forward until approximately 60 to 100 feet (approximately 1/8 inch of tape wrap) of tape is left on the inner
reel. At this point move tape at the slowest speed and ensure that approximately one-half
of the light beam is shaded (at the detector) by the tape on the reel. With this approximate
condition present ensure, with a VOM, 12 to 14 Vdc between logic board pin J8-7 and
ground.
b. Remove POWER and physically move tape until the inner reel is nearly empty (three to four
layers). Ensure the reading at J8-7 has changed to less than 5 Vdc.
c. Complete the preceding a and b for the outer reel (reverse tape movement) using logic board
pin J8-6.

Step 5.

If satisfactory results are not obtained in step 4, slight adjustment of the sense lamps and possibly detectors, will be required to produce the proper voltages with each of the two conditions.
Adjustment of the lamp is accomplished by moving the lamp mounting bracket, possibly bending
the lamp mounting bracket, and/or rotating the lamp holder. While adjusting the lamp beam,
first strive to provide the less than 5 Vdc at J8-7 (inner) and J8-6 (outer) with nearly empty
reels. After this has been accomplished ensure approximately 60 to 100 feet (approximately
1/8 inch of tape wrap) of tape on each reel produces 12 to 14 Vdc at J8-7 (inner reel) and J8-6
(outer reel). Slight adjustment of the sensitivity control on the logic board may help achieve improved final results.

Step 6.

In extreme cases, or when replacing lamps or detectors, complete the following:
a. Remove the reels and replace with completely empty reels.
b. Tape the tension arms off their stops with masking tape or other material.
c. Apply POWER and depress STOP and FORWARD.
d. Adjust the lamps and detectors as required to produce less than 5 Vdc at J8-7 (inner reel) and
J8-6 (outer reel).
e. With masking tape, place an obstruction on each reel hub simulating 1/8 inch tape wrap.
f. Check and possibly adjust for the one-half shading effect producing the 12 to 14 Vdc at J8-7
(inner reel) and J8-6 (outer reel, with REVERSE mode activated).

Step 7.

Upon completion of alignment and adjustment, complete the previous operating checkout procedures to ensure proper operation.

3

BULLETIN NO. 3642-1,',.

PARTS LIST
Photo End-of-Tape Sense Kit
Sense Detector Assembly (1) A29
Sense Lamp (2) DS3 and DS4
Sense Lamp Socket Assembly (2)
XDS3 and XDS4

835586
835571
855027
843728

'--'h.---4>--

DS3

r-------;:=+=t-=>

J8-7 (logic Board)

~

SENSE
DETECT R
A29
1---0----'- A6W2

(GND) .

+5Vdc
from E3-3

GND
from

W2
DS4

'-_~_-Q:;"-_ J8-6 (Logic Board)·

Figure 2. Photo End-Of-Tape Sense, Schematic Diagram

4

BULLETIN NO; 3656-1.

FM CALIBRATOR
GENERAL
This bulletin contains information pertaining to the optional SANGAMO FM CALIBRATOR unit. Information contained consists of general (with specifications), operating-use data, theory of operation, maintenance, parts list, and diagrams.

Figure 1. FM Calibrator Unit
The SANGAMO FM CALIBRATOR unit is used to conveniently check and/or calibrate any I RIG FM
record/reproduce system. Capabilities of this unit include, (1) individual FM record channel calibration,
(2) individual FM reproduce channel calibration, and (3) overall FM record/reproduce channel check. All
AC and DC errors are displayed directly on a front panel meter.
Operating features of the unit include five selectable FM bands"(at any tape speed), nine deviation settings,
record-reproduce-test selection, impedance selection, and power on-off selection; all easily operated by front
panel switches. Mounting is conveniently provided by insertion into any two adjacent reproduce board slots.
This mounting feature also provides power acquisition and automatic speed selection from the reproduce
chassis (as with a standard reproduce board), as selected at the recorder/reproducer control panel. Connections from the calibrator unit to the FM record or reproduce boards are possible via patch-cords.
The calibrator unit is adaptable to a" SANGAMO SABRE record/reproduce systems, as well as the 3500
series (adapter required for 3500 series). Calibration of any IRIG FM record/reproduce system may be performed with this unit, providing a SANGAMO system is available for mounting, power acquisition, and speed
s~lection.

1

BULLETIN NO. 3656-1

SPECIFICATIONS
Band Selection Frequencies.

Refer to Table 1

Center Frequency Deviation Selection

9 switch selected positions in 10%
increments. ±30% is full scale dev.
for bands X and II, ±40% for others.

Accuracy.

±0.2 of full scale deviation, in the
applicable band.

Meter Error. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . Front panel zero center ±3% for
full scale.
I nput Impedance .

Selectable - LO - 75 ohms
HI - over 100 K ohms

DC Reference Voltages

9 equally spaced values from +1.414
(±0.5 mv) to -1.414 (±0.5 mv),
selectable via deviation switch.

Temperature Range. . .
DC Power Requ irements .

+12 Vdc at 250 ma and -12 Vdc at
30 ma, supplied by any SANGAMO
SAB R E system or 3500 series system.

Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approximate size of two adjacent
reproduce boards.
OPERATING-USE DATA
a. INSTALLATION - For proper operation the FM Calibrator unit must be inserted into any two adjacent reproduce board slots, not separated by a partition. If two empty slots are not available, remove one
or two FM reproduce boards, as necessary. The removed boards may be calibrated in another slot.
With SABRE series recorders the calibrator adapts directly. With 3500 series recorders an adapter (part
no. 836390) is required between the calibrator and the reproduce chassis jacks. This adapter transposes
the recorder's speed lines to properly interface to the calibrator unit.

::

::

::

-:

)

TABLE.1. FREQUENCY PER SPEED, BAND, AND DEVIATION
SPEED/BAND*

60·15/16 ips Speed Range
SPEED (ips)

BAND

FREQUENCY (kHz)

120· '·718 ips Spe8d
SPEED (ips)

60

1/2 (W.B.I)

120

1/4 liNTER)
1/8 (LOW',

X
30

15

w
7·1/2

II
I
1/2 (W.S.I)
1/4 (INTER)
118 (LOW')

1·7/8

15/16

•

111W,IUII
i (VIlB.I)
1/2 (INTER)
1/41LOW)

1/8

,
60

X
II (W,B.11l
I (W.fl.1l
1/2 (INTER)
1/4 (LOW)

1/8

X

X

II
I
1/2 (W,B.1l
114 (!NTER)
1/8 (LOW')

II (W.B.II)
I (W,B.I)
1/2 (INTER)
1/<1 (LOW)
1/8

30

X

X

II
I
1/2 (W.B.I)
1/4 (INTER)
lIB (LOW')

II (W.B.II)
I (W.B.I)
112 (INTER)
1/4 (LOW)
1/8

15

X
II

3·3/4

BAND

X

X
II
I

Rang~

I
1/2 (W.S.I)
1/4 (INTER)
1/8 (LOW')

X
7·1/2

II (W.ll.lI)
I (W,B.I)
1/2 (INTER)
1/4 (LOW)
1/8

X

X

II
I
112 (W.S.I!
1/4 (INTER)
118 (LOW')

II iW.a.lI!
I (W.S.I)
1/2 (INTER)
1/4 (LOW)
1/8

3·3/4

X

X

II
I
1/2 (W.B.I)
1/4 (INTER)
1/8 (LOW')

II (W.S.II)
I iW.B.1)
1/2 (INTER)
114 (LOWI
1/8

1·718

,

-40

-30

-20

-10

DEVIATION (%)
0
+10

no

540

840
630

960

259.2
129.6
64.8

302.4
151.2
75.6

32.4

37.8

360
270
129.6
64.8
32.4
16.2

420
315
151.2
75.6
37,8
18.9

480
360
172.8
86.4

540
405
194.4
97.2
48.6
24.3

600
450
216
108
54

180
135
64,8
32.4
16.2
8.1

210
157.5
75.6
37.8
18.9

240
180
86,4
43.2
21.6
10.8

270
202.5
97.2
48.6
24.3
12.15

300
225 I

90
67,5
32.4
16.2
8.1
4.05

105
78.75
37.8
18.9

120
90
43.2
21.6
10.8
5.4

135
101.25

60

45

9.45

9.45
4.725

33.75
16.2
8.1
4.05
2.025

52.5
39.375
18.9
9.45
4.725
2.362

22.5

26.25

16.875
8.1
4.05
2.025
1.012
11.25
8.437
4.05
2.025
1.012
.505

1080

1200

720

810

345.6
172.8
86.4
43.2

388.8
194.4
97.2
48.6

900
432
216
108

43.2
21.6

45
21.6
10.8
5.4

I

27

990

+20

+30

1440

1BOO
1110

12fJ(i

561.6
280.8
140.4

604.8
302.4
151,2

1080

415.2
237.6
118.8
59.4

518.4 .
259.2
129.6
64,8

660
495
237.6
118.8
59.4
29.7

720
540
259.2
129.6
64.8
32.4

I
i

I

360
270
129.6
fJ4.S

108

54

59.4

27
13.5

29,7
14.85

32.4

390
292.5
1<10.4
70.2
35,1

16.2

17.55

24.3
12.15
6.075

150
112.5
54
27
13.5
6.75

165
123.75
59.4
29.7
14,85
7.425

180
135
64.8
32.4
16.2
8.1

195
146.25
70.2
35.1
17.55
8.775

67.5
50.625
24.3
12.15
6.075
3.037

75
56.25
27
13.5
5.75
3.375

82.5
61.875

90
67.5
32.4
16.2
8.1
4.05

375

41.25
30.937
14.85
7.425
3.712
1.855

I

48.6

19.M!
9.45
4,725
2.362
1.18

33.75
25.::11;!

10.8
5.4
2.7
1.349

12:15
6.075
3.037
1.518

13.125
9.843
4,725
2.362
1.18
.59

15
11.249
5.4
2.7
1.349
.674

16.875
12.655
6.075
3.037
1.518
.758

I
I

28,126
13.5

6.75
3.375
1.687
18.75
14.062
6.75
3.375
1,687

.843

20.7
14.85
7.425
3.712

20.625
15.468
7.425
3.712
1.855
.927

I

+40

wao

O:2tjE2:(L

7
780
585
280.8
140.4
70.2
35.1

330
247.5
118.8

2.7
30
22.5

1/8 band effective only on low band recorders with 60·15/16 ips speed range.

54

1320

I

840
630
302.4
151.2

75.6
37.8

I

420
315
151.2
75.6
37.8
18.9
210
157.5

j

16.2
8.1
4.05
2.024

"8.75
35.5ll2
17.55
8.775
4.387
2.193

75.n
37.8
18.9
0.45_
105
78.75 !
37.8 I
!
18.9
9.45
4.725
52.5
39,:rn:i
18.9
9.45
4.725
2.361

225
16.874
8.1
4.05
2.024
1.011

24.375
18.28
8.775
4.387
2.193
1.095

26.25
19.686
9.45
4.725
2,361
1.18

45

:.n.75

I

97.5
73.125
35.1
17.55
8.775
4.387

!

co
C

r

z
z
o
w

0)

L"1

u")
,

BULLETIN NO. 3656-1

b. CONTROLS, INDICATORS, and CONNECTIONS

DC IN (TP1) - Accepts the DC
output of the FM reproduce
board under test. This voltage
is compared to the DC reference of the calibrator unit.
BAND Selector 8w (81) Selects the proper carrier
frequency for the bandwidth
desired (see table 1).

I

FM

CALIBRATOR
118

0
BAND

~

METER (M1) - Reads the
error in the output of the
boards under test. Error is _
calibrated in percent of
A,eak-to-peak deviation.

_~>

..
3.

~

2

------l. .~~. 6
~~

n

0

x

DC OUT

R EC-REP-TEST Sw (S3) _.
Selects calibrator operating
0
mod e s 0 f R E COR D
1
_____ CALIBRATE, REPRODUCE
REC db~ .
CALIBRATE or calibrator
TREESPT~
internal test.
CARRIER OUT (TP3) OUT @ 4
Applies a reference carrier freqCARRIER
uency to the FM reproduce
IN ~.
board under test.

0

I
I

.

~O ~~
:r~q~T:;'~~~~~~~p~~
I ~. the~h~~=:r7e~
FM record board under

,

1/

2

tl

HI

3

.

REF

0

ON

d"kl

Q:

DEVIATION Sw (S2) - Selects the percentage of frequency deviation from the
carrier frequency in 10% increments (+40% to -40%). Also
changes the DC calibrating
voltage through a range of
+1.414 Vdc to -1.414 Vdc (9
steps).

I

I

l<:

~

DC OUT (TP2) - Applies a DC
voltage to the FM record board
under test. This DC voltage is
representative of the comparison of the calibrator carrier
frequency and the FM record
board carrier frequency.

. ;::J L.:t...O-FF ~

/10.-0. . . .10\

__---13-f~@:~
40

40

PERCENT
DEVIATION

I

test.

~

8w (S4) - Changes the DC
IN input impedance. LO is 75
ohms and HI is lOOk ohms.

@ I R E F ( T P 5 ) - U s e d t o provide
a DC voltage input to an FM
record board during record/
reproduce system test.
POWER Sw (S5) - Controls
the application of ±12 Vdc
(from the reproduce chassis) to
the calibrator unit.
GND (TP5) - Ground testpoint of calibrator unit.

Figure 2. Calibrator Front Panel

BULLETIN NO. 3656-1

c. USING CALIBRATOR UNIT - Use of the calibrator unit requires cable connections from the calibrator unit to the applicable FM record or reproduce boards. The FM Calibrator Accessory Kit (part
no. 836400) includes all necessary cables as listed below.
(2) Patch-cords, BNC to Pin (1 red - 1 black)
(2) Patch-cords, Pin to Pin (both red)
The maintenance section of this bulletin provides calibrator unit test and adjustment to aid in determining proper operation prior to use.
NOTE

A 5 minute warm-up period (with power on) is recommended for
stablization of some operating characteristics.
. 1. FM RECORD BOARD CALIBRATION - (refer to figure 3)

Step 1.

Ensuring all POWER is off, connect a patch-cord from the input BNC of the record board
to the DC OUT jack of the calibrator.

Step 2.

Connect a patch cord from the CARRIER testpoint of the record board to the CARRIER
IN jack of the calibrator. Also, connect a patch-cord between grounds on the calibrator
and record board.

Step 3.

Select, on the calibrator, the correct
band setting (determined by band of
record board, refer to table 1), zero
deviation setting, and R EC-R EP-TEST
switch to the R EC position. Select
highest speed or speed desired.

Step 4.

Apply recorder power, and depress
STOP and RECORD (tape movement
not required). Ensure the calibrator
POWER switch is set to the ON position.

REC

CALIS
DC IN

--.

DC OUT

r

INPUT

REC

REP~
TEST
CAR OUT
CAR IN

I....

CARRIER

REF

Figure 3. Record Board Calibration Scheme

Step 5.

Ensure the calibrator meter reads zero. If not, adjust the ZERO or CENTERING control
of the record board, to brin~ meter to zero.

Step 6.

Place deviation switch to the maximum +% deviation (+300;{' for X and II bands, +40% for
all others). Adjust, if necessary, the input gain control of the record board for zero on
the meter.

Step 7.

Check at -% deviation, and adjust for compromise as necessary.

Step 8.

Check at all other speeds and deviations, as desired.

2. FM REPRODUCE BOARD CALIBRATION - (refer to figure 4) - This procedure details calibration
of FM reproduce boards having an input testpoint. For those boards not having an input testpoint, refer to
paragraph 4 concerning reproduce calibration via tape.

5

BULLETIN NO. 3656-1,

Step 1.

Ensuring all power is off, connect a
patch-cord from the reproduce board
input testpoint to the CAR R! E ROUT
jack of the calibrator.

Step 2.
J

REPRO

CALIB

.......

DC IN

OUTPUT

DC OUT
REC
REP +--0

Connect a patch-cord from the reproduce board output testpoint to the
DC IN jack of the calibrator. Also,
connect a patch-cord between grounds
on the reproduce board and calibrator.

TEST
CAR OUT

INPUT

CAR IN
REF

Figure 4. Reproduce Board Calibration Scheme

Step 3.

Select, on the calibrator, the correct band (determined by band of reproduce board, refer
to table 1), zero deviation setting. REC-REP-TEST switch to the REP position, and the
r switch to the desired setting. Select the highest speed or speed desired.

Step 4.

Apply recorder power (tape movement not normally required) and place the switch disable switch to the ON position (no squelch action). Systems having servo squelch and
not having a squelch disable switch, normally require tape movement.

Step 5.

Ensure meter reads zero. If not, adjust zero control of reproduce board to bring meter to
zero.

Step 6.

Place deviation switch to maximum +% position (+30% for:, bands X and II, +40% for all
other bands). Adjust, if necessary, the output gain control of the reproduce board for
zero on the meter.

Step 7.

Check at -% deviation, and adjust for compromise, as desired.

Step 8.

Check at all other speeds and deviations, as desired.

3. OVERALL FM RECORD/REPRODUCE CHECK· (refer to figure 5) - Proper tape threading and
tape movement are required for this check via tape. With tape bypassed, ensure the squelch disable switch
is set to ON. Bypass method not applicable when squelch is present without disable switch.

Step 1.

With all power off, connect a patch-cord from the input BNC of the record board to the
/!.£F ~a-jack of the calibrator.
REC
CAlIB
REPRO

Step 2.

Step 3.

Connect a patch-cord from the reproduce board output testpoint to the
DC IN jack of the calibrator.
Set the REC-REP-TEST ~witch to
the R EP position and the BAN D
switch to the correct setting (determined by the band of the record and
reproduce boards, refer to table 1).

DC IN
INPUT

~

A

OUTPUT

DC OUT
REC
REP "---0
TEST
CAR OUT

CARRIER

I

--

CAR IN
REF

..

INPUT

I

REMOVE fOR SYSTEM
I
TEST THRU TAPE _ _---1

L-.._ _ _ _

Figure 5. Record/Reproduce System Test Scheme

C===C=============:=======::=:::=:===:=J~ 6

cc===========:====================:==:::====~~

BULLETIN NO. 3656-1

I

Step 4.

Select the desired tape speed and apply power. Depress STOP, RECORD, and FORWAR D, recording and reproducing. For bypass method connect a patch-cord from the
record board CAR RI ER testpoint to the reproduce board input testpoint (tape movement
not required).

Step 5.

The error will be displayed directly on the calibrator meter.
NOTE

This method provides adequate checking of the FM recordlreproduce system. It is not recommended to make any correctional adjustment during this check, as the record and reproduce errors are combined.
4. FM REPRODUCE BOARD CALIBRATION-VIA TAPE - Proper tape threading and tape movement
are required for this calibration.

Step 1.

Connect a patch-cord from the input BNC of the record board (record channel associated
with the reproduce board under test) to the DC OUT jack of the calibrator.

Step 2.

Connect a patch-cord from the record board CARRIER testpoint to the CARRIER IN
jack of the calibrator.

Step 3.

~onnect

Step 4.

Select the proper band (refer to table 1) and the proper % deviation. Set tape speed as
desired and the REC-REP-TEST switch to the REP position.

Step 5.

Apply power and depress STOP, RECORD, and FORWARD, recording and reproducing.

Step 6.

Ensure meter reads zero. If not, adjust zero control of reproduce board to bring meter
to zero.

Step 7.

Place deviation switch to maximum +% position (+300A> for bands X and II, +40% for all
other bands). Adjust, if necessary, the output gain control of the reproduce board for
zero on the meter.

Step 8.

Check at -% deviation, and adjust for compromise, as desired.

Step 9.

Chefk at all other speeds and deviations, as desired.

Step 10.

Note, by switching the REC-REP-TEST switch to the REC position, the record errors are
read.

a patch-cord from the BNC output of the reproduce board to the DC IN jack of
the calibrator.

J

THEORY OF OPERATION
The FM calibrator unit is composed of two printed circuit boards (A and B),a meter assembly (M1), and
a front panel assembly with switches and testpoints. The B board contains a regulated +5 Vdc power
supply and the reference oscillator circuitry. The A board contains the DC reference voltage circuits, DC
voltage comparison circuits, reference carrier frequency circuits, and the frequency comparison circuits.

au LLETI N NO. 3656-1

SPEED LINES FROM
REPRODUCE CHASSIS

+12VoC FROM
REPRODUCE CHASSIS

r - -

c -

-

-

- -

- - - -

I
I
I

1!r

I

REGULATED
+5VDC
POWER
SUPPLY

I
I

I
L
±12VD C
FROM
REPROD UCE
CHASS IS

·CARRIE 'tIN"
TP4 -'

r
I

I
I
I
I

CRYSTAL
OSC

TO ALL ±12VDC
.. CIRCUITS ON
"A" BOARD

I

FREQUENCY
CIRCUITS

=:: } J

tL

I

I

PART OF
BAND

I

I

I

I
I
I
I

SWITCH

I"CARRIER OUT"

SHAPER

PHASE
DETECTOR

1----~..1iPI

~ _ _ _...
~

DC
AMP

J

•

-.....

.....

AMP

I

I

DIFF
AMP

I

~

TEST

t

,~

I
I
I

'I'
"

PART
OF
DEVIATION
SWITCH

I

,,. ,

I
I
I

REFERENCE
VOLTAGE
SUPPLY

,

+

~F

t
PART
OF
BAND
SWITCH

AMP

,

"GND"
 PH!
INc??

~~C03~

PI-3

/Ni!71

rp4

~S4-

~~,~n.~-+'-+-j
CA.r.II:.IER. 0 9
iN.

IN9.4

CAIlIt/eft

()v""

TP]
TPI

~

/)C IN

@--"---UCOR.O

l

----€)

----------~--------~@
TPc
pc ovT

53

,~.----------~~~wv---­
!?c3

5'CA

T£sr

t

TP399

PATCH CORD ASSY: PIN TO PIN; MFR 53021

836400

ACCESSORY KIT: FM CALIBRATOR: 3600/4900 SERIES; MFR 53021

836411-001

HARDWARE KIT - 14 TRACK RECORD: 4900 SERIES; MFR 53021

836411-002

HARDWARE KIT - 28/32 TRACK RECORD: 4900 SERIES; MFR 53021

836411-004

HARI:lWARE KIT - 28/32 TRACK REPRODUCE: 4900 SERIES; MFR 53021

836423-001

SWITCH, ROTARY: 4 DESKS; CONT'S 1/4 AMP, 115 VAC; MFR 53021

836423-003

SWITCH, ROTARY: 2 DESKS; CONT'S 1/4 AMP, 115 VAC; MFR 53021

836424

PUMP-VACUUM: 4900 SERIES; MFR 24123 PART NO. 0333

836454

BOARD ASSY: CALIBRATION/MONITOR; 3600/4900 SERIES; MFR 53021

836457

SPLICE BLANKING KIT: 3600SERIES; MFR 53021

836533

FMSENSITY KIT: 3600 SERIES; MFR 53021

841121

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 2.2UF 10%, 20V; POLARIZED; MFR 53021

843680

RESISTOR, VAR: LOGRITHMIC TAPER; 2000 OHMS 10%; OAW; MFR 01121

843721

CONNECTOR, PLUG: 5 CONT PINS MOLDED IN BAKELITE; MFR 02660, NO. 126-217

843724

RECEPTACLE: 5 CONT MIN HEX; MFR 07999, NO. 126-218

843728

LAMPHOLDER, SINGLE: TAPE CONTROL INDICATOR; MFR 72619, NO. 7538

843729

LAMP CARTRIDGE: INCAND, RED; MFR 72619, NO. 39-14-1471

843730

LAMP CARTRIDGE: INCAND, GREEN; MFR 72619, NO. 39-14-1472

843733

CONNECTOR, PLUG: 34 PIN; MFR 95238, NO. SM34-20PGD

843734

CONNECTOR, RECEPTACLE: 34 PIN; MFR 95238, CAT. NO. SM34-20S8D

843788

RELAY: MAGNETIC LATCHING; 24 VDCW, DPDT; MFR 77342

843829

REISlTOR, FIXED: COMP; 390 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021

843837

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 3000UUF 5%,300 VDCW; MFR 53021

843934

SOCKET, CRYSTAL: MFR 91506, PART NO. BOOO-DG-3

843996

CONNECTOR, RECEPTACLE: 34 PIN REM; MFR 81312 NO MRAC34S·J6

843997

CONNECTOR, PLUG: C/O HOOD, 34 REMOVABLE CONTACTS; MFR 81312, NO. MRAC 34P JTDH-491

844013

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 4.7 OHMS ±5%, 1/4 W; MFR 53021

844114

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 62UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-15-620F

844115

CAPAClTOR, FIXED: MICA; 220UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-15-221

844118

CAPAClTOR,FIXED: MICA; 2500UUF 1%, 500VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-19-252F

844119

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 511l0UUF 1%, 300VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-19-512F

844152

RESiStOR, FrXED: COMP; 10'OHMS 5%, O.5W; MFR 53021

844155

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 47 OHMS 5%, 1!2W; MFR 53021

-20-

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

844156

RESiSTOR, FIXED: COMP; 68 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021

844160

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 180 OHMS 5%, 1/2 W; MFR 53021

844161

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 220 OHllilS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021

844162

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 270 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021

844163

RESISTOR, FI XED: COMP; 330 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021

844164

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 470 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021

844165

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 560 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021

844166

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 680 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021

844167

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 1000 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021

844169

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 15000HMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021

844170

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 1800 OHMS 5%, 1/2W;MFR 53021

844171

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 2200 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021

844173

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 3300 OHMS 5%, 1I2W; MFR 53021

844174

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 4700 OHMS 5%, 1!2W; MFR 53021

844178

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 8200 OHMS 5%.1/2W; MFR 53021

844179

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 10,000 OHMS 5%, O.SW; MFR 53021

844183

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 22,000 OHMS 5%, 1I2W; MFR 53021

844192

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 0.22 MEG;5%, O.5W; MFR 53021

844193

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 0.33 MEG, 5%, 0.5W; MFR 53021

844244

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 4700 UUF 5%, 600 VDCW; MFR 53021

844269

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; O.05UF 5%, 100VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE 10P-2-503J

844323

RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; INSULATED; 1.5 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021

844325

RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; I NSULATEO; 1.5 OHMS 5%, 1!2W; MFR 53021

844331

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 3.0 OHMS 5%, l/2W; MFR 53021

844510

SEMICONDUCTOR, PIODE: SILICON; MFR 06668, TYPE lN914

844548

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 820UUF, 5%, 300 VDCW; MFR 53021

844549

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 5600UUF 5%,300 VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-20-562

844666

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 470UUF 5%,300 VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-15-471

844675

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 33 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021

844695

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 620UUF 1%,300 VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-15-621

844699

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 2800UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021

844762

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: MAX ZENER 9.45 V; MFR 04713, TYPE 1N938

844769

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 270UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-19-271F

844848

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 22UF 10%,15VDCW; MFR 53021

844981

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 70UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021

·21-

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

844993

RESISTOR, VAR: 50 OHM, ±5%, 1/2W; MFR 80294 NO. 3305P-1-500

844994

RESISTOR, VAR: 100 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 80294 NO. 3305P-l-l0l

844995

RESISTOR, VAR: 500 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 80294, NO. 33079-1-501

845038

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 0.47UF 10%, 35VDCW; MFR 53021

845046

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 200 UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021

845141

RESISTOR, VAR: 10,000 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 80294, NO. 3307P-l-l03

845193

FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 2 AMP, 250 V; MFR 71400, NO AGC-2

845257

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 400UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 00853

845258

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 12UUF 5%, 500VDCW; MFR 00853

845329

RESISTOR, VAR: 200 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 80294, NO. 3507P-1-201

845443

RESISTOR, VAR: 2000 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 80294, NO. 3305P-1-202

846160

RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 75 OHMS, 5W; MFR 53021

846164

SEMICONDUCTOR, UNIJUNCTION-TRANSISTOR: SILICON; PNPN; MFR 53021

846500

SEMICONDUCTOR, TRANSISTOR: SILICON; MFR 53021

846502

CONNECTOR, PLUG: MALE, 66 REM PINS; MFR 81312 NO MRAC66P-JTD-H

846550

CONNECTOR, RCPT: W/O HOOD, 66 REMOVABLE CONTACTS; MFR 81312, NO. MRAC 66S-J6

846551

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 39UUF,l%, 300 VDCW; MFR 53021

846552

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 180UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021

846601

PIN SOCKET, MINIATURE: MFR 06776, PART NO. PS-402-44

846602

CONNECTOR, PIN: USE WITH SOCKET 846601; 0.311 IN. LG; MFR 53021

846615

JACK, JUNIOR PHONE: 64/84 IN. LG; MFR 90201, NO. LA-1

846744

OSCILLATOR: 400,000 KC; 30 VDC OPR; MFR 75378

846759

CONNECTOR, COAXIAL: TEE ADAPTER; MFR 96791 NO. UG-274/U

846776

RELAY, DC: 12 VDCW; DPDT, 210 OHMS 10%; MFR 77342

846901

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 1000UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021

847013

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TAN; 1.0UF 20%, 50 V; MFR 01295, NO. SCM 105FP050CA

847039

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.15UF 5%, 100 VDCW; MFR 72136, NO 1 DP-3-154J

847065

RESISTOR, FIXED: 10 OHMS 1%, 1/8W; MFR 53021

847246

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 840UUF 1%, 300VDCW; MFR 53021

847529

FILTER: GRAY FELT 1/81N THK,O.75 DIA; MFR 53021

847532

MOTOR, ELECTRIC: 115VAC, 3000RPM; MFR 62119, NO. 82AEG

847548

CONNECTOR, RECEPTACLE: FEMALE, 66 REM PINS; MFR 81312 NO. MRAC66SJTDH

847549

CONNECTOR, PLUG: MALE, 66 REM PINS; MFR 81312 NO MRAC66PJ6

847723

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: SILICON; ZENER IS 10. V 5% MFR 01295, TYPE lN758A

. 848159·
848160

PLUG, SUB MINATURE: RED; MFR 02929, NO. 39F846
PLUG, SUB MINIATURE: BLACK; MFR 02929, NO. 39F847

-22-

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTI.ON

850287

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: GERMANIUM; TYPE 1N277; MFR 53021

850288

TRANSISTOR: NPN; SILICON; MFR 01295, TYPE 2N2222

850289

TRANSISTOR: PNP; GERMANIUM; MFR 04713, TYPE 2N1309

850290

TRANSISTOR: SILICON; PNP; MFR 01295, TYPE 2N2907

850305

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: SILICON; ZENER; TYPE 1N752A; MFR 53021

850357

RESISTOR, VAR: CARBON; 2500 OHMS 10%; MFR 53021

850445

RELAY, PLUG·IN: 3 POT; 12 VDC, 10 AMPS; MFR 77342, TYPE KRP14DG

850503

SOCKET: 11 SOLDER TERM LUGS; METAL BASE; MFR 07999, NO. 78RS11

850642

INDUCTOR, FIXED: CHOKE; 470MH; MFR 72259, PART NO. RFC-M-470

850643

RECEPTACLE, PLUG: 9 PIN, MALE; MFR 07999 NO. 126-221

850644

RECEPTACLE, CONN: 9 PIN, FEMALE; MFR 07999 NO. 126-220

850858

INDUCTOR: 150MH 5%; MFR 72259, PART NO. RFC-M-150

850860

INDUCTOR, FIXED: CHOKE; 1000 MH; 5%; MFR 72259 PART NO. RFC·M-l000

850862

CAPACITOR, VAR: 9-35UUF RANGE; MFR 15450, TYPE 538-011'()9.0-35PF

850873

TRANSFORMER: MFR 53021

851018

PLUG,COAXIAL: SINGLE CONT; MFR 02660, PART NO. FXR-99600

851020

CONNECTOR, PLUG: ELEC; MFR 02660, PART NO. FXR-99750

851084

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: SILICON; ZENER, 12 VDC 5%, TYPE lN759A; MFR 53021

851139-001

CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 125UF, 3 VDCW; MFR 00853, TYPE 556

851139-003

CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 435UF, 3 VDCW; MFR 00853, TYPE 556

851139'()04

CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 110UF,6 VDCW; MFR 00853, TYPE 556

851139-007

CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 75UF, 15 VDCW; MFR 00853, TYPE 556

851139-008

CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 23UF, 35 VDCW; MFR 00853, TYPE 556

8511·39-0<)9

CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 40 UF, 65 VDCW; MFR 00853

851139-010

CAPACITOR, FIXED; ELCTLT; 55UF; 2OVDCW; MFR 00853

851139-012

CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 5UF;100 VDCW; MFR 00853

851139-014

CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 275 UF; 10VDCW; MFR 00853

851139-015

CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTL T; 95UF; 35 VDCW; MFR 00853

851139-016

CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELECTLT; 80UF, 65VDCW; MFR 00853

851264

SWITCH, TOGGLE: DPDT, MC; MFR 04009, PART NO. 81057-N

851265

LAMPHOLDER: BAYONET TYPE; MFR 72619, CAT. NO. 8578-111

851271

TRANSISTOR: SILICON; NPN, POWER; MFR 02735, PART NO. 40250'

851280

TRANSISTOR: TYPE 2N2102; MFR 02735

851288

RESISTOR, FIXED: 10 OHMS 5%, 3 W; MFR 44655, NO. 4361

852273

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: DIFF. COMP; 8 TE'RMS;MFR 01295, TYPE SN52710

852475-008

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 3.3 VDC, 5%; MFR 99942, TYPE 1N746A

.

-23-

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

852475-014

DIODE, ZENER: 400 MW; 4.3 V 5%; MFR 99942,1YPE lN749A

852475-016

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 4.7 VDC; 5%; MFR 99942, TYPE lN750A

852475-018

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 5.1 V, 5%; MFR 99942, TYPE 1N751A

1

852475-020

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 5.6 VDC 5%; MFR 99942, TYPE lN752A

852475-022

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 6.2 VDC 5%; MFR 99942, TYPE 1N753A

852475-024

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 6.8VDC 5%; MFR 99942, TYPE 1N754A

852475-028

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 8.2 VDC 5%; MFR 99942, TYPE lN756A

852525

METER, VU: 3600 SERIES; MFR 53021

852532-073

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 5620 OHMS 1%,114 W;MFR 07716 TYPE MEA, T-O

852738

TR.o,NSISTOR: SILICON; PNP; MFR 04713, PART NO. 2N3906

852801-002

TERMINAL SO: PHEN; 2 TERM; MFR 71785 NO 2-140Y

852801-006

TERMINAL SO: PHEN; 6 TERM; MFR 71785 NO &140Y

853037

TRANSISTOR: SILICON; NPN; MFR 04713, TYPE 2N3904

853038

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT, MICRO: MFR 04713, PART NO. MC718G

853473

MOTOR: 0.043 HP/11 ,000 RPM, 27V 1.85 AMPS, MFR 05624, NO. BYLM92802-4

853474

MOTOR ASSY: MFR 53021

853502

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: SILICON; RECTIFIER; MFR 04713, TYPE lN3209

853507

TRANSISTOR: SILICON; NPN; POWER; MFR 02735, PART NO. 40251

853512

TRANSISTOR: SI LICON; NPN; MFR 04713, PART NO. MPS834

853513

TRANSISTOR: SILICON; NPN; MFR 04713, PART NO. 2N3713

853515-002

RELAY,4 PDT: COIL 12 VDC, 160 OHMS; MFR 77342, PART NO. KHP17Dl1

853515-003

RELAY, 4PDT: COIL 24 VDC, 650 OHMS; MFR 77342, PART NO. KHP17Dl1

853516

SOCKET, RELAY: 14 PINS; MFR 77342, PART NO. 9KH2

853518

CONNECTOR, PLUG: 23 CONT; MFR 91662, PART NO. 00-7023-023-000-001

853525

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: MLOPNL AMPL; MFR 04713, PART NO. MC1430G

853527

RESISTOR, VAR: CARBON; 100 K OHMS 20".4>, 0.25 W; MFR 80294, NO. 215L-l-l04

853528

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: MLOPNL AMPL; MFR 04713, PART NO. MC1531G

853529

RESISTOR, VAR: WW; 200 OHMS 10%, 0.25W; MFR 80294, PART NO. 200L-1-201

853530-051

RESISTOR, FIXED: FI LM; 100 OHMS, 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701

853530-087

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 237 OHMS 1%,1I4W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

853530-089

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 249 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

853530-101

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 3320HMS 1%,1I4W;MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

853530-108

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 3132 OHMS 1%,114 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

853530-118

. RESiSTOR, FIXED: FILM; 499 OHMS 1%, 1/4 IN; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

853530-130

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 665 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

-24-

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

85353()"131

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 681 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 01116, TYPE CEATZ

85353()"143

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 909 OHMS 1%. 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

85353()"141

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 1000 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

85353()..155

RESISTOR. FIXED: FILM; 1210 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 01116, TYPE CEATZ

85353()"164

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 1500 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

85353Q..112

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 1820 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

85353()"116

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 2000 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

85353()"186

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 2550 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

85353()"193

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 3010 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

.85353()"196

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 3240 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

85353()"204

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 3920 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

85353()"205

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 4020 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

85353()"208

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 4320 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

85353()"211

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 4640 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

85353()"212

RESISTOR. FIXED: FILM; 4750 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

85353()"214

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 4990 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

85353()"219

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 5620 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

85353()"232

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 7680 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

85353()"234

RESISTOR, FIXED: FI LM; 8060 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

85353Q..236

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 8450 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 01116, TYPE'CEATZ

85353()"243

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 10,000 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101. TYPE MF5C

85353()"246

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 10,100 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFA 19701, TYPE MF5C

85353()"251

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 12.1 K OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

85353()"254

RESISTOR;FIXED: FILM; 13,000 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

85353()"260

RESISTOR. FIXED: FILM; 15,000 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

853530-263

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 16,200 OHMS 1%,1/4W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

85353()"281

RESISTOR, FIXED: FI LM; 24,900 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

85353()"284

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 26,100 OHMS 1%. 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

85353()"292

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 32,400 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

85353()"293

RESISTOR, FIXED:.FILM; 33,200 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

85353()"301

RESISTOR. FIXED: FILM; 40.2 K OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701 TYPE MF5C

85353()"321

RESIS:rOR, FIXED: FILM; 64,900 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

·85353()"330

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 80.6 K OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

85353()"335

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 90,900 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

85353()"336

RESfSTOR, FIXED: FILM; 93,100 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C

-25-

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

853530-342

RESiSTOR, FIXED: FILM; 107,000 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

853530-350

RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 130,000 OHMS 1%,114 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C

853531

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE; MFR 04713, TYPE 1N823

863532

TRANSISTOR: SILICON; PrJP; MFR 04713, PART NO. 2N2905

853533

TRANSISTOR: SILICON; NPN; MFR 04713, PART NO. 2N2219

853536

SWITCH, ROTARY: PHENOLIC INSULATED: ONE SEC, 2 POLE, 6 POS; MFR 76854

853538

SWITCH ASSY:PUSHBUTTON; MFR 82389

853539

SWITCH ASSY: PUSHBUTTON; MFR 82389

853567

PLAYBACK, CHASSIS: AL. FRAME ASSY, MFR 53021

853568

RECORD, CHASSIS: AL FRAME ASSY, MFR 53021

853578

REGULATOR, MODULE: 117 VOLT POWER SUPPLY; MFR 53021

853584

TRANSFORMER, TUNING: MFR 00853, PART NO. EV-141-5001-5

853587-001

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 410MH; Q OF 66 MIN; 180 MA; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE470

853587-002

INDUCTOR. FIXED: 41 MH; Q OF 46 MIN; 420 MA; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE47

853587-003

INDUCTOR. FIXED: 220 MH, 5%, Q OF 57; 280 MA; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE220

853587-004

INDUCTOR. FIXED: 330 MH, 5%, 0 OF 50; 240 MA; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE 330

853587-005

INDUCTOR. FIXED: 22 MH, 10%, Q MIN. 47 MA; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE22

853587-009

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 1500 MH, 10%, Q MIN. 51; MFR 72259, NO. WEE 1500

853587-010

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 6800 MH, 10%, Q MIN. 45; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE6800

853587-011

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 21K, MH, to%, Q MIN. 32; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE 27000

853587-013

INDUCTOR, fiXED: 100,000 MH 10%, Q MIN. 20; MFR 72259, NO. WEE100000

853587-014

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 4700 MH 10%, Q MIN. 48, 68 MA; MFR 72259 NO. WEE4700

853587-015

INDUCTOR: 22,oOOUH, 10%, 219 OHMS RES.: MFR 72259 NO. WEE 22,000

853587-016

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 33 MH 5%, Q MIN. 43; 520 MA; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE33

853587-017

INDUCTOR,. fiXED: 150 UH, 5%, Q MIN. 63; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE150

853587-018

INDUCTOR. FIXED: 210 UH, 5%, Q MIN. 52; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE270

853587-019

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 560 UH, 5%, Q MIN. 64; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE560

853587-020

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 1000 UH, 5%, Q MIN. 62; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE1000

853587-021

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 2200 UH, 10%, Q MIN. 50; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE2200

853587-023

INDUCTOR, fIXED: 3300 UH, 10%, Q MIN. 52; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE3300

853587-024

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 680 UH, 10%, Q; MIN. 71; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE680

853587-025

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 1200 UH, 10%, Q MIN. 52; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE1200

853587-026

fNDUCTOR, FIXED: 2100UH, 10%, Q MIN. 51; MFR 72259, PART NQ. WEE 2700

853587-027

INDUCTOR. FIXED: 12K,UH, 10%, Q MIN. 36; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE12000

853587-028

INDUCTOR,FIXED:

4.7 UH, 5%, Q MtN.40; MFR 12259 PART NO. WEE4.7

-26-

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

853587·029

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 10 UH, 5%,0 MiN. 46; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE10

853587·030

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 2.2UH 10%; 0 MIN. 42; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE2.2

853587-031

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 47K, UH, 10%,0 MIN. 25; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE47K

853587·032

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 820 UH, 5%, 0 MIN. 67; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE820

853587-034

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 3900 UH, 10%, Q MIN. 48; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE3900

853587-035

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 15K, UH, 10%, Q MIN. 38; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE15K

853587-037

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 68 UH, 5%,0 MIN. 40; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE68

853587-039

INDUCTOR, 5600UH, 10%, 104 OHMS RES.; MFR 72259 NO. WEE 5600

853587-040

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 8200UH, 10%,Q.MIN. 38; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE 8200

853590-002

RECEPTACLE, PROBE: RED; MFR 00779, PART NO. 3-582118-2

853590-004

RECEPTACLE, PROBE: YELLOW; MFR 00779, PART NO. 3·582118-4

853590-006

RECEPTACLE, PROBE: BLUE; MFR 00779, PART NO. 3-582118-6

853590-010

RECEPTACLE, PROBE: BLACK; MFR 00779, PART NO. 3-582118·10

853591·023

RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 300 OHMS 5%, 6.5W; MFR 44655

853592

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 33 OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 75042

853593

RESISTOR, VAR: 10,000 OHMS 5%,1 W; MFR 02660, PART NO. 2900W-l-l03

853597

POWER CABLE: CIO BELDEN CABLE, TWO CONN; MFR 53021

853603-001

RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 50 OHMS 5%,15 W; MFR 11502

853604

PLAYBACK CONN BOARD: MFR 53021

853606

1/2 INCH TAPE KIT: CIO PINCH ROLLER ASSY; PERTINENT HDW; MFR 53021

853607

1 INCH TAPE KIT: CIO ROLLER ASSY; PERTINENT HDW; MFR 53021

853611

TAPE KIT: C/O SPECIAL EXT. BDSAND GREASE TUBE; MFR 53021

853612

PREAMP BOARD: MFR 53021

853615-004

TERMINAL BOARD: 4 TERM; MFR 75382, PART NO. 411-4-P

852615-007

TERMINAL BLOCK: 7 TERM., MFR 75382 PART NO. 411-7·P

853615-008

TERMINAL BLOCK: 8 TERM., MFR75382 PART NO. 411-8·P

853623

RELAY: SPST NORMALLY OPEN, 24 VDC; MFR 71342, PART NO. MB 3D

853624

REEL DRIVE BOARD: MFR 53021

853627-001

CAPACITOR, TRIMMER: 5-25UUF; MFR 72982, PART NO. 557·013COPO 39R

853628

PREAMP CONN BOARD: MFR 53021

853631

JACK, 3 CONNECTOR: MFR 82389, PART NO. 12B

853635

PLUG, PHONE, 3 CONDUCTOR: MFR 82389, PART NO. 267

853636

FM CONVERTER BOARD: MFR 53021

853643

RELAY: MFR 71482, PART NO. MRMX-l039

853644

PREAMP BOARD: POWER SUPPLY; MFR. 53021

853646

FUSEHOLDER: BAKELITE; MFR 75915, NO. 387001

-27·

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME ANO DESCRIPTION

853647

EXTENDER BOARD: RECORD; MFR 53021

853649

FUSE, CARTRIDE: AGX, 3 AMP, 125 V OR LESS; MFR 71400

853650

EXTENDER BOARD: PLAYBACK; MFR 53021

853657

RELAY, DPDT: 24 VDC, 10 AMP; MFR 77342

853658-001

DIRECT RECORD BOARD: WIO HANDLE; MFR 53021

853662

DIRECT PLAYBACK BOARD: MFR 53021

853665

CONNECTOR, RECEPTACLE: FEM; SLDR PINS; MFR 71468, PART NO. RWK-S4-31S

853670-002

CONNECTOR BOARD: MFR 53021

853672

SWITCH, TOGGLE: SPST, MFR 04009, PARl" NO. 7501

853674-002

TERMINAL BOARD: 14 CONT; MFR 91662, PART NO. 60 8200 0623

853677-007

TERMINAL BOARD: 7 TERM, MFR 71785, PART NO. 353-14-07-001

853677-010

TERMINAL BOARD: 10 TERM, MFR 71785, PART NO. 353-14-10-001

853681

CAPACITOR, FIXED: PPR OIL; 10UF 5%, 100VDCW; MFR 96733, NO. 12R53Jl106

853682-001

BIAS OSCILLATOR BOARD: WIO HANDLE; MFR 53021

853685-001

CAPACITOR ASSY: 854528-075 CAP. SLDR MTD TO MEL PL; MFR 53021

853685-002

CAPACITOR ASSY: 854528-150 CAP. SLDR MTD TO MEL PL; MFR 53021

853685-003

CAPACiTOR ASSY: 854528-300 CAP. SLDR MTD TO MEL PL; MFR 53021

853685-004

CAPACITOR ASSY: 19881&-600 CAP. SLDR MTD TO MEL PL; MFR 53021

853685-005

CAPACITOR ASSY: 276241-120 CPA. SLDR MTD TO MEL PL; MFR 53021

853690-001

VOICE BOARD ASSY: MFR 53021

853694

CONTROL AMPL BOARD: MFR 53021

853696

BOARD ASSY: REGULATOR; MFR 53021

853700

DC TO DC INVERTER BOARD: MFR 53021

854304

RECORD CONNECTOR80ARD: GLASS MEL; MFR 53021

854305

PLAYBACK CONNECTOR BOARD: GLASS MEL; MFR 53021

854306

POWER AND CONTROL CONNECTOR PANEL: GLASS MEL; MFR 53021

854362-001

BLOCK ASSY, PHOTOCELL AND LAMP: UPPER; MFR 53021

854362-002

BLOCK ASSY, PHOTOCELL AND LAMP: LOWER; MFR 53021

854362-003

BLOCK ASSY, PHOTOCELL AND LAMP: LOOP ADAPTER; MFR 53021

854502

CRYSTAL UNIT: 252,000 CPS 1%; MFR 75378

854505

CONNECTOR, MALE: 4 CONT; MFR 71468, PART NO. WK-S4-325

854508-001

SOLENOID: 66 OHMS, 24 VDCW; MFR 53021

854509

SWITCH, ROTARY; 6 POSITION, NON SHORTING; MFR 81073, PART NO. 5001-6

854510

SWITCH, ROTARY; 6 POSITION; MFR 53021

854512-001

CONTACT, ELECTRICAL: MFR 91662, NO. 6082000513

854512-002

CONTACT, ELE~TRICAL: MFR 91662, NO. 6~82000533

·28-

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

854513-001

CONTACT, ELECTRICAL: MFR 91662, NO. 6082000253

854513-002

CONTACT, ELECTRICAL: MFR 91662, NO. 6082000623

854514

CONTACT, ELECTRICAL: MFR 91662, NO. 6082000313

854515

CONTACT, ELECTRICAL: MFR 91662, NO. 6082002623

854517-001

CRYSTAL UNIT: 2.40 MHZ 005%, MFR 75378

854519

CAPASTAN POWER AMPL BOARD: MFR 53021

854527-004

RESISTOR, VAR: WW; 500 OHMS 10%, 1/4 W; MFR 80294, PART NO. 27H,501

854528-005

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 5UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 00853

854528-018

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 18UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 00853

854528-027

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 27 UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 00853

854528-032

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 32UUF, 1%, 500 VDCW; MFR 00853

854528-033

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 33UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFA 00853

854528-036

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 36UUF ±1%, 500 VDCW; MFA 00853

854528-050

CAPACITOA, FIXED: MICA; 50UUF ±1%, 500 VDCW; MFR 00853

854528-062

CAPACITOA, FIXED: MICA; 62UUF 1%.500 VDCW; MFA 00853

854528-070

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 70UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFA 00853

854528-075

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 75UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFA 00853

854528-091

CAPACITOR. FIXED: MICA; 91UUF 1%.500 VDCW; MFA 00853

854528-100

CAPACITOR, FiXeD: MICA; 100UUF 1%.500 VDCW; MFA 00853

854528-120

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 120UUF 1%, 500VDC; MFR 00853

854528,130

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 130UUF 1%.500 VDC; MFR 00853

854528-150

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 150UUF 1%. 5OOVDCW; MFR 00853

854528-190

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 190UUF 1%.500 VDCW; MFR 00853

854528-230

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 230UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFA 00853

854528-250

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 250UUF 1%, 500VDCW; MFR 00853

854528-270

CAPACITOR, FIXE.D: MICA; 270UUF1%, 500 VDCW; MFR 00853

854533

TRANSISTOR, MEDIUM POWER: PNP; MFR 04713, PAAT NO. MJ3701

854535-003

RESISTOR, VAR: WW; 50 OHMS 1 W; MFR 02660. PART NO. 2600P·500·

854535-005

RESISTOR, VAR: WW; 200 OHMS 1 W; MFA 02660, PART NO. 2600P·201

854535-006

RESISTOR, VAA: WW; 500 OHMS, 1 W; MFA 02660, PART NO. 2600P·501

854535-007

RESISTOR, VAR : WW; 1000 OHMS, 1 W; MFA 02660, PART NO. 2600p·102

854535-008

RES!STOR, VAR: WW; 2000 OHMS, 1 W; MFR 02660, PART NO. 2600p·2002

854535-009

RESISTOR, VAR: WW; 5000 OHMS, 1 W; MFR 02660, PAR.T NO. 2600P·502

854535--010

RESISTOR, VAR: WW; 10,000 OHMS, 1 W; MFR 02660, PART NO. 2600P·103

854535-011

RESISTOR, VAR: WW; 20,000 OHMS, 1 W; MFA 80294, PART NO. 3007p·1·203

854538-001

INVERTER, DC TO AC: SOLID STATE; 28 VOLTS; MFR 82877

-29-

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

854539

TRANSISTOR: SILICON; NPN; MFR 04713, PART NO. 2N4124

854540

TRANSISTOR: SILICON; PNP; MFR 04713, PART NO. 2N4126

854541

THERMOSTAT, FIXED TEMPERATURE: MFR 82647, PART NO. KLIXON 06786

8~544

C/:: TO DC CONY. ASSY: MFR 53021

854547

:FIER, DIODE STACK: MFR 04713

854548

$", iCONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 5.5 V; MFR 12954, PART NO. lN2214

854549-001

FAN: 28 VAC; MFR 82877, PART NO. AO-19994

854550-003

HOOD, CONNECTOR ASSY: 11 PIN, MFR 97954, PART NO. SM1-11H-l RSL

854550-005

HOOD, CONNECTOR ASSY: 20 PIN, MFR 97954, PART NO. SMl-20H-l RSL

854550-007

HOOD, CONNECTOR ASSY: 29 PIN, MFR 97954, PART NO. SMl-29H-l RSL

854551-003

RESISTOR, VAR: 100,000 OHMS 20%, MFR 80294, PART NO. 3368P-1-104

854555-010

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.01 UF 1%, MFR 84171, PART NO. 1MD-l-103-F

854555-014

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.02UF 1%, MFR 84171, PART NO. 1-MD-1-203-F

854555-022

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; .039UF 1%, MFR 84171, PART NO. l-MD-1-393-F

854555-023

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.04UF 1%, MfR 84171, PART NO.1-MD-1-403-F

854555-026

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.05UF 1%,100 VDCW; MFR 84171 NO. IMD-2-503-F

854555-114

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; O.OlUF 5%, 100VDCW; MFR 84171 ND.1MD-l-l03-J

854555-116

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.015UF 5%, 100 VDCW; MFR 72136 NO. lMD-1-153-J

854555-127

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.04UF 5%, 100 VOCW; MFR 84171, NO. IMD-1-403-J

854555-130

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.05UF 5%, 100 VDCW; MFR 72136 NO. lMD-2-503-J

854570

EXTENDER BOARD: SPEED CONT; MFR 53021

854578

POWER SUPPLY: BASIC; MFR 53021

854579-002

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 22UH 5%, Q OF 65 MFR 72259, PART NO. RFC-M-22

854582

PLAYBACK CHASSIS KIT: INSTL HDW; MFR 53021

854583

PLUG, MALE; SHORTING; A THRU W; MFR 53021

854585

FM PLAYBACK BOARD; 2 SPEED; MFR 53021

854588

LEAD HARNESS ASSY; INPUT, PLAYBACK CHASSIS; MFR 53021

854589

LEAD HARNESS ASSY: OUTPUT, PLAYBACK CHASSIS; MFR 53021

854590

LEAD HARNESS ASSY: POWER AND CONTROL; PLAYBACK CHASSIS; MFR 53021

854595

LEAD HARNESS ASSY: INPUT, RECORD CHASSIS; MFR 53021

854596

LEAD HARNESS ASSY: OUTPUT, RECORD CHASSIS; MFR 53021

854598

LEAD HARNESS ASSY: POWER AND CONTROL; RECORD CHASSIS; MFR 53021

854703

BUS BAR: 0.125 THK; 2.25 LG, 4 TERM HOLES &32 THO; MFR 53021

854725

PLUG, FLUSH MTG: 125 V, 15 AMPS; MFR 02660,PART NO. 160-5

854734

TERMINAL BOARD, 7 CONNECTOR: MFR 75382

854922

STANDOFF: CKT 80; MLD NYL; MFR 53021

-30-

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

854950

HEAD SET, MAGNETIC: DUAL PHONES, 2,000 OHMS; MFR 22711, PART NO. 610-2

855027

LAMP: 2.5 V; 0.350 AMPS; MFR 71744, PART NO. CM2(}1

855058

RACK MTG KIT: FOR POWER SUPPLY MOUNTING; MFR 53021

855060

RACK MTG KIT: AUX. ELEC.; MFR 53021

855078

VOICE AMPLIFIER BOARD: MFR 53021

855107

SWITCH, ROCKER: SIX SOLDER TERMS,; MFR 22753, PART NO. RSWC322

855121

RESISTOR, VAR: 10,000 OHMS; LINEAR TAPER; MFR 71590, MODEL 9

855128

EXTENDER BOARD: FLEX; MFR 53021

855129

JACK, 3 CONNECTOR: MFR 82389, NO. 13A

8551 30-002

RELAY: DPDT; 12 V; COIL RES. 218 OHMS 10%, MFR 77342, TYPE HP11 D6V

855130-004

RELAY, ARMT: DPDT; 28VNOM; COIL RES 1400 OHMS 10% MFR 77342, TYPE HP4007

855144

POWER SUPPLY: 115/230 VAC; 47-63 HZ; MFR 53021

855150

KIT, SENSING: C/O 2 RELAYS; MFR 53021

855301

EXTENDER BOARD ASSY: FLEXIBLE; MFR 53021

855339

LOUDSPEAKER: VOICE COIL IMP. 45 OHMS 10%, 3.5W; MFR 74199 MODEL 5A1Z45

855341

PLUG, PHONE, 2 CONDUCTOR: MFR 82389, PART NO. 250

855342

CONTROL ASSY: REMOTE CONTROL; MFR 53021

855344

SIGNAL, CABLE: INTERCONNECTING VOICE CABLE; MFR 53021

855432-001

SWITCH, TOGGLE: DPDT; MC; MFR 09353 MODEL NO. 7201

855432-006

SWITCH, TOGGLE: DPDT; MC; MFR 09353 MODEL NO. 7211

855432-008

SWITCH, TOGGLE: DPDT; MC; MFR 09353 MODEL NO. 7201

855449

AC POWER CORD: RATED15AMP, 125 V; MFR 82076 TYPE 14/3SPT

855451

CORD, POWER: RATED 15A, 125 V, TYPE 14/3 SPT; MFR 82076, NO. 409

855504-XXX

EQUALIZER BOARD: BASIC; SUFFIX -001 THRU -009; MFR 53021

855523

TRANSISTOR: SILICON; PNP; MFR 04713, TYPE 2N3740

855536

EXTENDER BOARD: PLAYBACK; MFR 53021

85554(}001

SWITCH, SLIDE: 4 PDT; MFR 71590

855542

KIT, FM RE-RECORD: MFR 53021

8555455-XXX

FM RECORD BOARD: SUFFIX 001 THRU 008 FOR FREQ.; MFR 53021

855546

RELAY, DPDT: COIL, 24 VDC 10%; MFR 73949, TYPE 905-2C-24VDC

855547

SWITCH, ROTARY: 1 SECT., 6 POLE, 2 POS.; MFR 76854 NO. 399433K

855563

RELAY, SOCKET: 14 TERMS, MLD INTO BAKELITE BASE; MFR 77342, NO. 9KHl

855580

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT, DEVICE: OPER AMPL; MFR 07263, PART NO. U5B770939X

855608

REFERENCE COUNTER BOARD: MOD 2; MFR 53021

855610

CAPSTAN A BOARD: MOD 2; MFR 53021

-31-

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

855612

CAPSTAN B BOARD: MOD 2; MFR 53021

855613

CAPSTAN B BOARD: MOD 2; CPSN SYN ONLY; MFR 53021

855672

CAPSTAN ASSY: PULL-OUT; MFR 53021

85g673

CAPSTAN ASSY: STUFFING; MFR 53021

855674

MOTOR, CAPSTAN: RATED 24 VDC, RATED SPEED 3650 RPM; MFR 04191, NO. U9M4

855694

COMPONENT BOARD; MFR 53021

855695

COMPONENT BOARD; MFR 53021

855696

BOARD ASSY: MFR 53021

855706

POWER SUPPLY ASSY; REG; MFR 53021

855707

STUFFING SERVO AMPL ASSY: MFR 53021

8557.08

PULL-OUT SERVO AMPL ASSY: MFR 53021

855709

DIODE LIMITER ASSY: MFR 53021

855710

SWiTCH, ROTARY: ONE SECT, 6 POLE, 2 POSN, MFR 76854, PART NO. 399433K

855772

CONNECTOR: PLUG JACK, BRASS; MFR 71279, PART NO. 3301

855809

BIAS OSCILLATOR BOARD: MFR 53021

855810

TRANSISTOR: SIUCON; MFR 04713, TYPE 2N4416

855811·001

INDUCTOR, VAR: UH 4.70;

855812-002

JACK, TESTPOINT: RED; MFR 98291, PART NO. SKT-0804

855812-004

JACK, TESTPOINT: YELLOW; MFR 98291, PART NO. SKT-0804

855812-005

JACK. TESTPOINT: GREEN; MFR 98291, PART NO. SKT-0804

855812-010

JACK, TESTPOINT: BLACK; MFR 98291, PART NO. SKT·0804

855872

BLOCK, PHOTO-CELL: AL; W/LAMP; MFR 53021

855874

~HOTO-CELL

855889

MOTOR, TORQUE: 8 AMP, 81 W; MFR 11384 NO. TT-2925

855894

RECEPTACLE, MODIFIED: 23 PINS; MFR 53021

855902

HEAD ASSY; liN. RECORD; W/LEAD HARNESS; MFR 53021

855908

LOGIC BOARD: MFR 53021

855977

RECEPTACLE, BNC: MFR 74868, PART NO. 31-221

855981-001

SOCKET, PIN: BRASS; MFR 06776 NO. 0001144

855981-002

SOCKET,PIN: BRASS; MFR 06776 NO. 0001145

855985

PIN SOCKET: MFR 06776, PART NO. 0001146

856221

CONNECTOR, 23 PIN RECEPTACLE: MFR 91662, PART NO. 00-7024-023-163-002

856222

RECEPTACLE: 23 CONT; MFR 91662, PART NO. 00-7024·023-139-002

856223-001

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTA;22UF 20%,20 VDCW; MFR 80183, NO. 196D226XOO2

856224-011

RESISTOR, VAR: TAPES RES .. 1000 OHMS 20%, 1/4 W; MFR 90201

856256

LAMP: 28V, 0.04 AMPS, 30W; MFR 08806 PART NO. 387

a 75; MFR 72259, PART NO. V1H-4.70

ASSY: MFR 53021

-32-

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

856265-001

BLOCK ASSY, PHOTOCELL: UPPER; MFR 53021

856265-002

BLOCK ASSY, PHOTOCELL; LOWER; MFR 53021

856265-003

BLOCK ASSY, PHOTOCELL: LOOP ADAPTER; MFR 53021

856292

MOD KIT: FOR LOOP ADAPTER; MFR 53021

856385-XXX

peM READ EQUALIZER BOARD: SUFFIX -001 THRU -008; MFR 53021

856387-001

JACK, TESTPOINT: BLACK; MFR 98291

856387-005

JACK, TESTPOINT: RED; MFR 98291

856387-007

JACK, TESTPOINT: YELLOW; MFR 98291

856397

HEAD ASSY: 1 IN .. PLAYBACK;W/LEAD HARNESS; MFR 53021

856424

REEL DRIVE BOARD ASSY: MFR 53021

856427

MOTOR AND HUB ASSY: MFR 53021

856494

BLOCK, CONNECTOR: HOLD CONT; MATL PHEN; MFR 00779 PART NO. 200345-2

856495

BLOCK, CONNECTOR: MATL PHEN; MFR 00779 NO. 200346-2

856530

VIBRATION MOD KIT: MFR 53021

856618-001

FM RECORD BOARD: BASIC; WID HANDLE; OPT 855545-001 THRU 008; MFR 53021

856634

MICROPHONE: W/5 FT. CORD; MFR 74384, MODEL NO. M + 2U

856635

MICROPHONE ASSY: MFR 53021

856718

PIN, COAXICON = SUB-MINIATURE, SHORT; MFR 00779 NO. 51563-2

856772

VOICE PLAYBACK BOARD: MFR 53021

856835-001

KIT, RACK MTG: FM DENSITY CHANGE; MFR 53021

856856

BLOCK ASSY, LAMP:MFR 53021

856916

SENSOR: MFR 07263, PART NO. FPA210

856918

SPLICE DETECTOR BOARD: MFR 53021

856920

RELAY MTG BOARD: 1/2 IN.; 3500 SERIES; MFR 53021

856921

RELAY MTG BOARD ASSY: 1 IN. TAPE; MFR 53021

856923

RELAY MTG AUXILIARY BOARD ASSY: MFR 53021

856997

SWITCH ROTARY: 2 POLES 1 SEC, 9 POSITION; MFR 76854, PART NO. 274686-Al

857023-001

HOUR METER ASSY: MFR 53021

857027

COUNTER: MECHANICAL; 5 DRUM, 10 COUNT; MFR 33203 NO. D4335

857033

DIRECT RECORD BOARD: MFR 53021

857055

SWITCH, ROTARY: TWO SECT, 2 POLE, 7 POSN; MFR 76854 TYPE F

857065

BUS, BAR: BRASS; 9 TERMINAL HOLES; MFR 53021

857084

LEAD HARNESS: RC; INTERCOI\!; MFR 53021

857085

REMOTE CONTROL KIT: MFR 53021

857087

PREAMP REG. BOARD: MFR 53021

857098

COUNTER: FOOTAGE CNTR; 4 DIGIT; MECH CPLD; MFR 53021

-33-

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

857122

HEAD: 1 IN. RECORD; 16 CHANNEL; MFR 26549 NO. 502300

857123

HEAD: 1 IN PLAYBACK; MFR 26549 PART NO. 502400

857124

HEAD: 1 IN. RECORD; 8 CHANNEL; MFR 26549 NO. 501300

8~7125

. TAPE HEAD: PLAYBACK; 1/2 IN:; 2 MHZ; 3600/4900 SERIES; MFR 26549 NO. 501400

857144

KIT, 1 IN. TAPE: ROLLER ASSY'S TO CONVERT 3600 SERIES; MFR 53021

857145

KIT,l/2IN. TAPE: ROLLER ASSY'S FOR 3600 SERIES; MFR 53021

857211

REMOTE VOICE CHASSIS: MFR 53021

857215

MULTIBAND FM REPRODUCE BOARD: MFR 53021

857222

REMOTE CONT & VOICE CHASSIS: MFR 53021

857241

SENSING POST ASSY: TWO SST CONTS, & LEADS W/IN SST POST; MFR 53021

857260

REMOTE SHORTING PLUG: MFR 53021

857266

RECORD HEAD ASSY: 1 INC, W/LEAD HARNESS; MFR 53021

857267

RECORD HEAD ASSY: 1/2 INCH, W/LEAD HARNESS; MFR 53021

857268

RECORD HEAD ASSY: 1 INCH, W{LEAD HARNESS; MFR 53021

857269

RECORD HEAD ASSY: 1/2 INCH, W/LEAD HARNESS; MFR 53021

857276

CONNECTOR, PANEL: RECORD; GL MEL; MFR 53021

857317

JUMPER BOARD: PLAYBACK; MFR 53021

857343

CONNECTOR, BOARD: PLAYBACK; MFR 53021

857363

MOTOR & CAPSTAN ASSY: 28 VDC,2.8A, MFR 16858 MODEL 200A-1-5000G

857377

HOLDER, TIMER: MFR 89597 NO.

857453

HEAD: 1 IN PLAYBACK, 14 TRACK W/TERM BDS; MFR 53021

857461

TAPE HEAD -1/2 IN: 7 TRACK, RECORD; 3600 SERIES; MFR 53021

857476

MOTOR, TORQUE

857478

CONNECTOR, PANEL ASSY: 4900 SERIES; MFR 53021

857487

HEAD: 1 IN. RECORD, 14 TRACK; MFR 53021

857488

TAPE HEAD - 1 IN: 14 TRACK, RECORD; 3600 SERIES; MFR 53021

857491

HEAD: 1/2 IN PLAYBACK, 7 TRACKW/TERM BDS; MFR 53021

857492

TAPE HEAD .1/2IN: 7 TRACK, PLAYBACK; 3600 SERIES; MFR 53021

85882~OOl

FAN: 115 VAC,

85882M02

FILTER ASSY: MFR 82877, PART NO. 15449

859389

SOCKET, COAXICON: MFR 00779, PART NO. 51564-2

859457-002

POWER CORD: 4900 SERIES; MFR 81774 PART NO. 4949

85952~001

NETWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: POSITIVE NAND GATE; MFR 01295, TYPE SN7400N

85952M02

NETWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: POSITIVE NAND GATE; MFR 01295, TYPE SN7401N

85952~003

NETWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: POSITIVE NOR GATE; MFR 01295, TYPE SN7402N

85952~006

NETWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: POSITIVE

= 8 AMP, 81

5~60

920~6

W; MFR 86197, NO. DH-4530-A-1

CPS, 1PH MFR 82877, PART NO. M747115VAC

N~ND ~ATE;

MFR 01295, TYPE SN7430N

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

859520-018

NETWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: FLIP-FLOP; MFR 01295, TYPE SN7472N

859520-019

NETWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: FLIP-FLOP; MFR 01295, TYPE SN7473N

859520-020

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: DUAL D-TYPE EDGE-TRIGGERED FLIP-FLOP; MFR 01295 NO. SN7474N

859520-028

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: DIV-BY-TWELVE CNTR; MFR 01295 PART NO. SN7492N

859520-029

NETWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: 4-BIT BINARY COUNTER; MFR 01295, TYPE SN7493N

859520-034

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: HEX INVERTER; MFR 01295 TYPE SN7404N

859520-038

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: QUADR 2-INPUT POS AND GATE; TYPE SN7408N; MFR 01295

859520-042

NElWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: TTL MONOSTABLE; MFR 01295, TYPE SN74121N

859520-047

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: B-BIT DATA SEL/MULTIPLEXER; NO. SN74151N MFR 01295

859520-048

INTEGRATED CKT: SYN DECADE UP/DOWN CNTR; MFR 01295 NO. SN74192N

859520-053

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: &BIT BINARY MULTIPLIER; TYPE SN7497N MFR 01295

859520-056

INTEGRATED CI RCUIT: DUAL SCHMITT TRIGGER; TYPE SN7413N; MFR 01295

859759

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: MFR 05277 TYPE 1Nl192

859763-001

PLUG CONN: BRASS, RED INSUL WIRE SIZE 22-18; MFR 00779 NO. 42599-2

859763-009

PLUG CONN: BRASS, BLUE INSUL WIRE SIZE 1&14; MFR 00779 NO. 60365-2

859763-015

PLUG CONN: BRASS, TRANS INSUL WIRE 22-18; MFR 00779 NO. 61060-1

859774-005

FUSE: CER TUBE; 250V, 5 AMPS; MFR 71400 TYPE ABC

859774-008

FUSE. CERAMIC TUBE: 250 V, 10 AMPS; MFR 71400 TYPE ABC

859774-011

FUSE, CERAMIC TUBE: 250 V, 20 AMPS; MFR 71400 TYPE ABC

859775-003

CAPACITOR. FIXED: TANTALUM; 0.22UF 20%, 35 VDCW; MFR 56289 TYPE 1960

859775-005

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 0,47UF 20%, 35 WVDC; MFR 56289 TYPE 1960

859775-007

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 1.0UF 20%, 35 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960

859775-009

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 2.2UF 20%, 20 VOCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960

859775-010

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 3.3UF 20%, 15 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960

859775-011

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM;4.7UF 20%,10 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960

859775-012

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 6.8UF 20%,6 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960

859775-013

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 6.8UF 20%, 35 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960

859775-014

. CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 10UF 20%,25 VDCW; MFR56289, TYPE 1960

859775-017

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 22UF 20%. 15 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960

859775-021

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 47UF 20%,6 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960

859775-026

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; l00uF 20%, 20 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960

859775-027

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 150UF 20%, 6 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960

859775-029

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 220UF 20%, 10 VWOC; MfR 56289, TYPE 1960

859775-031

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 4.7UF 20%, 35 VDC; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960

859775-032

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 33UF 20%, 25 VOCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960

-35-

SAt.lGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

859843

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: OPR. AMPL; MFR 04713, TYPE MC1430P

859959-001

CAPACITOR, FIXED: CER; 0.01 UF -20, + 80%, 25V; MFR 56289, NO. C069B250Fl03Z

859959-002

CAPACITOR, FIXED: CER; 0.1 UF -20 + 80%, 10V; MFR 56289, NO. C052Bl00Gl04Z

859960-001

CAPACITOR, FIXED: CER; 0.001 UF MIN % l000V; MFR 56289, NO. C023Bl02El02P

859970

TRANSISTOR: NPN, SILICON; MFR 04713 TYPE 2N5089

859971

TRANSISTOR, PNP: SILICON; MFR 04713, TYPE 2N5087

864752-002

TERMINAL BOARD: 2 TERM, 5-40 TERM SCREW; MIL TYPE 37TB2

864752-004

TERMINAL BOARD: 4 TERM, 5-40 TERM SCREW; MIL TYPE 37TB4

864795-060

RESISTOR, FI XED: FI LM; 7870 OHMS 1%, 1/8 W; MFR 53021

864971-003

RES!STOR, FIXED: WW; 0.39 OHMS 10%, 3W; MFR 53021

864971-014

RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 30 OHMS 5%,3 W; MFR 53021

864971-018

RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 75 OHMS 5%, 3W; MFR 53021

864971-034

RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 2.2 OHMS 5%,3 W; MFR 53021

864972-014

RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 30 OHMS 5%, 6.5 W; MFR 53021

865206-005

TERMINAL BOARD: 5 TERM, 6-32 TERM SCREW; MIL TYPE 41TB-5

865257

MOTOR, PUMP: 3000 RPM; 115 V, 50/60 CY, 1 PH; MFR 62119; MODE L AB1C032

865610-008

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 50UH 1%, MFR 00853, NO. ET-l06-1280-2

865610-009

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 72UH 1%, MFR 00853, NO. ET-l06-13OO-2

865610-010

INDUCTOR, FIXED: 100UH 1%, MFR 00853, NO.ET-l06-1330-2

867618

TRANSISTOR: NPN, SILICON; MFR 04713, TYPE 2N3715

867638

SWITCH, SUB-MINIATURE: MFR 81073

867647

CONNECTOR, PLUG: 2 CONT., MALE; MFR 81312 NO. JF-2P

867648

CONNECTOR, RECEPTACLE: 2 CONT .. FEMALE; MFR 81312 NO. JF-2S

867682

SOLENOID: 24 VDC COIL; MFR 29238, PART NO. 38C24DC-AY

867685

PHOTO-CELL: MFR 21370 NO. SS·23

867686

RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 2 OHMS 5%,21 W; MFR 53021

870037

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 1000 OHMS 5%, 2: W; MFR 01121, PART NO. HB1025

877885

TERMINAL POST ASSY: 4 TERM.; MFR 53021

878687

TERMINAL POST ASSY: 3 TERM.; MFR 53021

896196

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 22 OHMS 5%,114 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF220J

896197

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 150 OHMS, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF151J

896198

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 12000 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF123J

896269

RESISTOR, VAR: 5000 OHMS 10%. MFR 91637,SERIES 295

896282

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 6200 OHMS 5%, 114 W; MFR 01121

896293

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 270 UF 20%,6 V; MFR 01295, NO. SCM277HP006C4

896294

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANT; 2.2UF 20%, 20V;MFR 01295, #SCM225FP020C4

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

896297

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANT; 33UF 20%, 20 V; MFR 01295, #SCM336GP020C4

896298

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANT; 1.0UF 20%, 35 V; MFR 01295, #SCM105FP035C4

896299

CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANT; 4.7UF 20%, 35 V; MFR 01295, #SCM475BP035C4

896458

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: SILICON; MFR 01295, TYPE 1N4385

896464

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 5600 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF562J

896465

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 68 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF680J

896466

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 1800 OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF182J

896467

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 8200 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121

896468

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 820 OHMS 5%,114 W; MFR 53021

896470

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 180 OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121

896474

RESISTOR, VAR: 500 OHMS 10%, MFR 91637, PART NO. A-10-W-5OQ..L

896475

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 100UUF 5%,300 VDCW; MFR 53021

896476

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 50UUF 5%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021

896477

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.04 UF 5%, 100 VDCW; MFR 72136, NO. 1DP-1-403J

896478

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.02UF 5%, 100 V; MFR 72136, TYPE 1DP-1-203J

896479

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.005UF 5%, 100 V; MFR 72136, TYPE lDP·1-502J

896492

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.03UF 5%,100 V; MFR 72136, TYPE lDP-1-303J

896601

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 47 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF470J

896602

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 100 OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF101J

896603

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 220 OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF221J

896604

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 330 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF331J

896605

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 470 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 0112.1, TYPE RC07GF471J

896606

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 680 OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF681J

896607

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 1000 OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF102J

896608

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 1500 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF152J

896609

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 2200 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF222J

896610

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 3300 OHMS 5%,114 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF332J

896611

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 4700 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF472J

896612

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 6800 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF682J

896613

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 10K OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF103J

896614

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP;-15K OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF153J

896615

RESISTOR, FJXED: COMP; 22K OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF223J

896616

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 33K OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF333J

896617

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 47K OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF473J

896519

RESISTOR, FIXED:- COMP; 100K OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF104J

-37-

SANGAMO
PART NO.

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

896620.

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 150K OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GFl54J

896621

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 220K OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF224J

896622

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 330K OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF334J

896623

RESI.,,)TOR, FIXED: COMP;470K OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF474J

896625

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 1.0 MEGOHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121

896626

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 2700 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF272J

896627

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 27K OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF273J

896628

RESISTOR, FIXEO: COMP; 560 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF561J

896629

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 3900 OHMS 5%,114 W; MFR 0.1121, TYPE RCo.7GF392J

896633

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: MFR 73293, TYPE lN625

896642

RESISTOR, FIXED: 250 OHMS 5%, 2 W; MFR 63743, PART NO. 20S250

896655

CONNECTOR, JACK: RED; MFR 53021

896656

CONNECTOR. JACK: BLACK; MFR 530.21

896658

CONNECTOR, JACK: GREEN; MFR 53021

896709

FUSE: 2.5 AMP, 125 V; MFR 71400, PART NO. MOL 2.5

896717

CAPACITOR. FIXED: MICA; 10UUF 10%,50.0 VDCW; MFR 53021

896740.

TRANSISTOR, NPN, GERMANIUM; MFR 01295, TYP.E 2N1304

896742

TRANSISTOR: PNP, GERMANIUM; MFR 01295, TYPE 2N1305

896798

CAPACITOR. FIXED: MYLAR; o..o.01UF 5%, 600 V; MFR 72136, TYPE 6DP-1-102

896835

STANDOFF: BRASS TERM. MFR 71279, PART NO. CAMBION 140-1785-02-00-00

896870.

CAPACITOR. FIXED: MICA; 680UUF 5%, 300 VDCW; MFR 53021

897384

VALVE-50L: 24 VDC, 3 WAY, PUMP PORT 1/4-18NPT; MFR 96487 NO. 54P31o.3B-32

897386

GAUGE, VACUUM: 0-30.; MFR 61349 NO. 516V

897581

RESISTOR, FIXED: 10.0 OHMS, 20 W; MFR 63743, PART NO. 205100

897583

RESISTOR. FIXEO: WW; 0..1 OHMS 10%,3 W; MFR 63743, PART NO. 3X

897596

SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: SILICON; MFR 05277,TYPE lN1199

897604

CAPACITOR. FIXED: 40ooUF, 40 VDC; MFR 530.21

897605

CAPACITOR. FIXED: 25o.OUF, 12 VDCW; MFR 53021

897633

CONNECTOR, PLUG, 15 MALE CONT, MFR 02660, NO. 126-204

897634

CONNECTOR. RECEPTACLE: 15 FEMALE CONT; MFR 02660, NO. 126-20.5

897772

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 820 OHMS 5%,0.5 W; MFR 01121. PART NO. EB8215

8980.53

COUNTER, MECH: 01 RECT DR, 4 FIG. RESET; MFR 18911, NO. 4X11 LAC

8980.76

RV-VACUUM: SPRING LOADED; 3/8 NPTHEX HEAD; MFR 24t23 N();AA840

898234

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLSR; 0.01UF5%, 1o.OV; MFR 72136, TYPE 10P-l-l03J

898235

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0..1 UF 5%~100 VDCW; MFR 72136

898241

LAMP, JNCAND: MINTR INT. LTG; MFR 08806, NO. 680

°_38-

SANGAMO
PART NO;

NAME AND DESCRIPTION

898314

RESISTOR, FI XE D: COMP; 1200 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 53021

898315

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 10 OHMS 5%,114 W; MFR 53021

898323

TERMINAL STRIP: 2 TERMINALS; MFR 75382, PART NO. 599-2-GMF

898330

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 27UUF 5%,300VOCW; MFR 53021

898331

CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELECTLT; 2UF, -10%, +100%, 50 V; MFR 02567, TYPE APD

898333

CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELECTLT; 4UF, -10"A., +100%, 50 V; MFR 02567, TYPE APD

898335

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 500UUF 5%, 300 V; MFR 53021

898339

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 250UUF 5%, SOO VDCW; MFR 53021

898406

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 1oo0UUF 5%, 500 VDCW; MFR 53021

898743

LAMP: 28 VOLTS; 0.04 AMPS MFR 72619, CAT; NO_ 327

898807

SWITCH, MICRO: 5 AMPS, 250 VAC; MFR 91929, TYPE 15M1

899055

TRANSISTOR: NPN; GERMANIUM; MFR 01295, TYPE 2N697

899112

RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 39,000 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121

899161

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA, 2700UUF 5%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021

899171

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 200UUF 1%,300 VDCW; MFR 53021.

899172

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 2000UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021

899250

TERMINAL BOARD: BLACK PHEN., H TERM.; MFR 75382 PART NO. 599-4-GMF

899258

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; O.08UF 5%, 100 V; MFR 72136, TYPE 1DP-2-803

899443

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 1525 UUF 1.%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021

899464

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; O.OOO2UF 5%, 600 V; MFR 72136, TYPE 6DP-1-202J

899465

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; O.OO4UF 5%, 600 V; MFR 72136, TYPE 6DP-1-402J

899466

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.008UF5%, 600 V; MFR 72136, TYPE 6DP-2-802J

899467

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.015UF 5%,100 V; MFR 72136, TYPE 1DP-1-153J

899509

MOTOR, DC: 27V, 1.2 AMP, 9800 RPM; MFR 05624 NO. BYLM 92902-12

899548

CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 600UUF 5%,300 VDCW; MFR 00853

899554

MOTOR ASSY: 27 VDC, 1.2 AMP, 9800 RPM;·MFR 53021

899957

CAPACITOR, FIX-ED: MICA; 150UUF 5%, 500VDCW; MFR 53021

LIST OF MANUFACTURERS

00779

G

. 853
121

295

01766
02567
02660
02735
02929

04009
04191
04221
04713
05276
05277
05397
05574
.05624
06668
06776
07263
07716
07999
08806
09022
09023
09353
11384
11502
12954
13511
15449
16858
18583
18911
19701
ft332

~70

21520
22711
22753
23383
24123
26549
28480
29238

30892
33203
44655
53021
55026
56289
61349
62119
63743
71279
71400
71468
71482
71590
71744
71785
72136
72259
72619

AMP INC
SANGAMO ELECTRIC CO., (CAP. DIV.1
ALLEN BRADLEY CO
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS INC
INTERNATIONAL CRYSTAL MFG CO INC
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES INC
AMPHENOL CORP
RCA CORP
NEWARK ELECTRONICS CORP
ARROW-HART AND HEGEMAN ELECTRIC CO
PHOTOCIRCUITS CORP
AEMCO DIV OF MIDTEX INC
MOTOROLA SEMICONDUCTOR PRODUCTS INC
POMONA ELECTRONICS CO INC
WESTINGHOUSE ELECTRIC CORP
UNION CARBIDE CORP ELECTRONICS DIV
VIKING INDUSTRIES INC
BARBER & COLMAN CO
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS INC
ROBINSON NUGENT INC
FAIRCHILD CAMERA AND INSTRUMENT CORP
IRC DIVISION OF TAW INC
AMPHENOL CORP
GENERAL ELECTRIC CO
CORNELL-DUBILIER ELEC CORP
CORNELL·DUBILIER ELECTRIC CORP
C AND K COMPONENTS INC
INLAND MOTOR CORP
IRC DIVISION OF TRW INC
DICKSON ELECTRONICS CORP
BUNKERRAMO CORP
ACCURATE DIAL & NAMEPLATE INC
SEQUENTIAL ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS INC
CURTIS INSTRUMENTS INC
DURANT MFG CO
ELECTRA/MIDLAND CORP
ELECTRO MATERIALS INC
SOLAR SYSTEMS INC
FANSTEEL METALLURGICAL CORP
TELEX-ACOUSTIC PRODUCTS DIV TELEX CORP
UID ELECTRONICS CORP
DYNAMICS RESEARCH CORP
GAST MFG CORP
G J M INC
HEWLETT·PACKARD CO
HART·ADVANCE RELAY DIV
HECON CORP
ENMCO
OHMITE MFG CO
SANGAMO ELECTRIC CO
SIMPSON ELECTRIC CO
SPRAGUE ELECTRIC CO
AMETEK INC/U.S. GUAGE DIV
UNIVERSAL ELECTRIC CO
WARD LEONARD ELECTRIC CO
CAMBRIDGE THERMIONIC CORP
BUSSMANN MFG DIV OF MCGRAW & EDISON CO
ITT CANNON ELECTRIC INC
CLARE CP AND CB
GLOBE·UNION INC CENTRALAB DIV
CHICAGO MINIATURE LAMP WORKS
CINCH MFG CO & HOWARD B JONES DIV
ELECTRO MOTIVE MFG CO., INC
NYTRONICS INC
DIALIGHT CORP

HARRISBURG, PA
PICKENS,SC
MILWAUKEE, WI
DALLAS,TX
OKLAHOMA CITY, OK
NASHVILLE, TN
BROADVIEW,IL
SOMERVILLE, NJ
CHlCAGO,lL
HARTFORD, CT
GLEN COVE, NY
MANKATO,MN
PHOENIX,AZ
POMONA,CA
YOUNGWOOD, PA
NEW YORK, NY
CHATSWORTH, CA
ROCKFORD, IL
HOUSTON,TX
NEW ALBANY,IN
MOUNTAIN VIEW, CA
BURLINGTON,IA
DELAVAN,WI
CLEVELAND,OH
PROVIDENCE, RI
SANFORD,NC
NEWTON,MA
ROCKFORD,VA
BOONE,NC
SCOTTSDALE, AZ
LOS GATOS, CA
GLENDALE, CA
ELMSFORD,NY
MT. KISCO, NY
MilWAUKEE, WI
MINERAL WELLS, TX
SAN DIEGO, CA
SKOKIE,IL
CHICAGO,ll
MINNEAPOLIS, MN
HOLLYWOOD, FL.
STONEHAM,MA
BENTON HARBOR, MI
GLENDALE, CA
PALO ALTO, CA
ELKHORN,WI
NEW SHREWSBURY, NJ
CHICAGO,IL
SKOKIE,IL
SPRINGFIELD,IL
CHICAGO,ll
NORTH ADAMS, MA
SELLERSBURG, PA
OWOSSO,MI
MOUNT VERNON, NY
CAMBRIDGE, MA
ST. LOUIS,MO
LOS ANGELES, CA
CHICAGO,IL
MILWAUKEE, WI
CHICAGO,ll
CHICAGO,IL
WILLIMANTIC, CT
BERKELEY HEIGHTS, NJ
BROOKLYN, NY

LIST OF MANUFACTURERS (CONT.)

72982
73138
73293
73949
74199
74384
74545
74868
75042
75378
75382
75915
76854
77342
79727
80183
80294
81073
81312
81774
82076
82389
82647
82877
84171
86197
86684
88140
89597
90201
91506
91637
91662
91929
93790
94696
94707
95238
95263
96487
96733
96791
97954
98291
99779
99942

ERIE, PA
FULLERTON,CA
TORRANCE, CA
CHICAGO,IL
CHICAGO,IL
CEDAR RAPIDS, IA
BRIDGEPORT, CT
DANBURY, CT
PHILADELPHIA, PA
SANDWICH, II.
MT VERNON, NY
DES PLAINES, IL
CRYSTAL LAKE, IL
PRINCETON, IN
PHILADELPHIA, PA
NORTH ADAMS, MA
RIVERSIDE, CA
LA GRANGE, IL
OAKVILLE, CT
PAWTUCKET, NJ
MARTINSBURG, WV
CHICAGO,IL
ATTLEBORO, MA
WOODSTOCK, NY
GREAT NECK, NY
CLIFTON HEIGHTS, PA
HARRISON, NJ
LlNCOLN,IL
HUNTINGDON VALLEY, PA
INDIANAPOLIS, IN
ATTLEBORO, MA
COLUMBUS, NB
WILLOW GROVE, PA
FREEPORT,IL
NEW BEDFORD, MA
CHICAGO,IL
PORTLAND, ME
WOODSIDE, NY
LONG ISLAND, NY
KEAILWORTH, NJ
SAN FERNANDO, CA
JANESVILLE, WI
BRONX, NY
MAMARONECK, NY
LANSDOWNE, PA
EL MONTE,CA

ERIE TECHNOLOGICAL PRODUCTS, INC
BECKMAN INSTRUMENTS IN C
HUGHES AIRCRAFT CO
GUARDIAN ELECTRIC MFG CO
QUAM-NICHOLS CO
TURNER CO INC
HUBBELL HARVEY INC
AMPHENOL CORP RF OIV
IRC DIV OF TRW INC
CTS KN IGHTS INC;
KULKA ELECTRIC CORP
L1TTELFUSE INC
OAK MFG CO
AMERICAN MACHINE & FOUNDRY CO
CONTINENTAL-WIRT ELECTRONICS CORP
SPRAGUE PRODUCTS CO
BOURNS INC
GRAYHILLINC
WINCHESTER ELECTRONICS INC
CAROL WIRE AND CABLE CORP
CAROL ELCTRONICS INC
SWITCHCRAFT INC
TEXAS INSTRUMENT INC
ROTRONINC
ARCO ELECTRONICS INC
LITTON PRECISiON PROD INC
RCA CORP ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
CUTLERHAMMER INC
FREDERICKS CO
MALLORY CAPAClTOR CO
AUGATINC
DALE ELECTRONICS INC
ELCO CORP
HONEYWELL INC
CORNELLDUBIUER ELECTRONICS
MAGNECRAFT ELECTRIC CO
STORY MARINE RAI LWA Y
CONTINENTAL CONNECTOR CORP
LEE CRAFT MFG CO INC
VALCOR ENGINEERING CORP
SAN FERNANDO E LEC MFG CO
BUNKERRAMO CORP
US COMPONENTS INC
SEALECTRO -CORP
BARNES CORP
GLOBEUNION INC

-41-



File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19
Create Date                     : 2018:02:24 19:39:12-08:00
Modify Date                     : 2018:02:24 19:58:19-08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2018:02:24 19:58:19-08:00
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:fab1cde8-929f-8a44-a36b-375d4e02e763
Instance ID                     : uuid:1ede5497-aaa4-864d-8be1-7f350b7e342c
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 316